Skip to main content

Full text of "Calendar of the Faculty of Applied Science, 1943-44"

See other formats


speciAL 

coLLecxiONS 


t)OUQLAS 
Lil3RAKy 

quecN’s  UNiveRSiT^^ 

AT  kiNQSrON 

kiNQSTON  ONTARiO  CANAOA 


j: 


/ 


) 


(■ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 
Queen's  University  Archives 


V 


https://archive.org/detaiis/qucaiendarappisci1943 


QUEEN'S  UNIVERSITY 

KINGSTON,  CANADA 


INCORPORATED  BY  ROYAL.  CHARTER  IN  1841 


\t^ 


I 


CALENDAR 


OP 


V4r 

Vr. 


The  Faculty  op  Applied 
Science 


FIFTY-FIRST  SESSION 


1943-44 


This  Calendar  is  published  five  months  before  the  opening 
of  the  session.  Staff,  courses,  and  regulations  will  probably  be 
as  announced,  but  the  University  reserves  the  right  to  make 
changes. 

Special  attention  is  directed  to  the  following: 


Changes  in  Timetables  

Attendance  Regulations  

Summer  Field  Work  in  Surveying  

Scholarships,  Matriculation  and  Undergraduate 

Course  for  Prospectors 

No.  2 Army  University  Course 


Page  SV 
’’  39 

’’  112 
” 31 

” 61 


ANNOUNCEMENT  OF 


No.  2 CANADIAN  ARMY  UNIVERSITY  COURSE 

Queen’s  University,  at  the  request  of  the  Department  of  National  Defence, 
Ottawa,  will  offer  in  the  session  1943-44  to  selected  students  from  schools 
throughout  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  an  Army  University  Course  thirty-three 
weeks  in  length,  of  which  twenty-eight  weeks  will  be  used  to  cover  the  regular 
programme  of  the  ‘first  year  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science.  Candidates 
applying  for  this  course  must  have  the  academic  standing  regularly  required 
for  admission  to  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science.  They  must  be  at  least  seven- 
teen years  of  age  and  not  older  than  twenty  years ; candidates  under  eighteen 
years  will  have  to  have  the  written  consent  of  their  parents. 

Candidates  who  enlist  in  the  Army  University  Course  will  be  under  mili- 
tary supervision  and  they  will  take  military  training.  They  will  be  provided 
by  the  Department  od  National  Defence  with  free  tuition  and  text  books 
and  free  board  and  lodging.  Up  to  the  age  of  seventeen  and  one  half  years 
they  will  be  paid  seventy  cents  a day,  after  which  they  will  go  on  the  standard 
rates  of  army  pay. 

Candidates  who  complete  the  Course  satisfactorily  will  have  first  year 
standing  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science,  and  after  the  war  they  will  be 
admitted  to  the  second  year  of  the  four  year  Course  in  Applied  Science. 

Application  for  the  Army  University  Course  should  be  made  to  the 
Registrar  of  Queen’s  University,  on  forms  which  will  be  provided  on  request. 
The  names  of  candidates  whose  standing  is  satisfactory  to  the  .University  will 
be  forwarded  to  the , Department  of  National  Defence  so  that  arrangements 
may  be  made  for  medical  examinations  and  enlistment  in  the  Active  Army. 
The  final  selection  will  be  made  by  the  Army. 


"'•  ■ ‘ i-r  • r-;^  .- 


.,  5'iifM33Ky6feiA  , "> . ' ' ■ - 

®%Yi\  ix  . : 5^*<m  jiitJiryiwy  v-»rf^A  i:iS0(i^.,.  ,:^,^ 


trPCi  .r  -"  ^ '■•=  •'  ' ' ^ ;^r- iB 

' ' " 


*■  ■ '■  .''^  • >^  . ■^'  ''■pi’'*' ^ r ^''  .■'  ''^.  A‘^V:.’' ^ 

‘ ■ , ',  - .-'•  "p v*'  I • 

ii^’*  (ftf'*.  f’iL  > / ki  kJ 


i';.V*f  ,■> 


:i 


k ■ ijtJ.  |/V. 


t,»'. 


4 «. 


t- 


■ ■■•,■’.  '-J..  ^ 2 ■-'•It'''  ” * 


QUEEN'S  UNIVERSITY 

KINGSTON,  CANADA 


INCORPORATED  BY  ROYAL  CHARTER  IN  1841 


CALENDAR 

OF 

The  Faculty  of  Applied 
Science 

FIFTY-FIRST  SESSION 
1943-44 

PRINTED  FOR  THE  UNIVERSITY  BY 
HANSON  a EDGAR 


KINGSTON 

1943 


CALENDAR 

1943 

JANUARY 

FEBRUARY 

MARCH 

APRIL 

s 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

1 

2 

. • 

1 

2 

3 4 

5 

6 

. , 

1 

2 

3 4 

5 

e 

. . 1 

2 

3 

3 

4 

5 6 7 

8 

9 

7 

8 

9 

10  11 

12 

13 

7 

8 

9 

10  11 

12 

13 

4 

5 

6 

7 8 

9 

10 

10 

11 

12  13  14 

15 

16 

14 

15 

16 

17  18 

19 

20 

14 

15 

16 

17  18 

19 

2( 

11 

12 

13 

14  15 

16 

17 

17 

18 

19  20  21 

22 

23 

21 

22 

23 

24  25 

26 

27 

21 

22 

23 

24  25 

26 

27 

18 

19 

20 

21  22 

23 

24 

24 

25 

26  27  28 

29 

30 

28 

28 

29 

30 

31  .. 

25 

26 

27 

28  29 

30 

31 

MAY 

JUNE 

JULY 

AUGUST 

S 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

1 

. • 

• • 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 

. . 1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 

6 

7 

2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 

8 

6 

7 

8 

9 10 

11 

12 

4 

5 

6 

7 8 

9 

10 

8 

9 

10 

11  12 

13 

14 

9 

10 

11  12  13 

14 

15 

13 

14 

15 

16  17 

18 

19 

11 

12 

13 

14  15 

16 

17 

15 

16 

17 

18  19 

20 

21 

16 

17 

18  19  20 

21 

22 

20 

21 

22 

23  24 

25 

26 

18 

19 

20 

21  22 

23 

24 

22 

23 

24 

25  26 

27 

28 

23 

24 

25  26  27 

28 

29 

27 

28 

29 

30  .. 

25 

26 

27 

28  29 

30 

31 

29 

30 

31 

30 

31 

SEPTEMBER 

OCTOBER 

NOVEMBER 

DECEMBER 

S 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

..  12 

3 

4 

1 

2 

. , 

1 

2 

3 4 

5 

f 

1 2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 8 9 

10 

11 

3 

4 

5 

6 7 

8 

c 

7 

8 

9 

10  11 

12 

13 

5 

6 

7 

8 9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14  15  16 

17 

18 

10 

11 

12 

13  14 

15 

16 

14 

15 

16 

17  18 

19 

20 

12 

13 

14 

15  16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21  22  23 

24 

25 

17 

18 

19 

20  21 

22 

23 

21 

22 

23 

24  25 

26 

27 

19 

20 

21 

22  23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28  29  30 

• • 

24 

25 

26 

27  28 

29 

30 

28 

29 

30 

26 

27 

28 

29  30 

31 

• • 

31 

1944 

JANUARY 

FEBRUARY 

MARCH 

APRIL 

s 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

3 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

1 

. , 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 

1 2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 6 

7 

8 

6 

7 

8 

9 10 

11 

12 

5 

6 

7 

8 9 

10 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11  12  13 

14 

15 

13 

14 

15 

16  17 

18 

19 

12 

13 

14 

15  16 

17 

1 

9 

10 

11 

12  13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18  19  20 

21 

22 

20 

21 

22 

23  24 

25 

2t 

19 

20 

21 

22  23 

24 

25 

16 

17 

18 

19  20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25  26  27 

28 

29 

27 

28 

29 

26 

27 

28 

29  30 

31 

. . 

23 

24 

25 

26  27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

30 

MAY 

JUNE 

JULY 

AUGUST 

S 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

3 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

& 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

. , 

1 

2 3 4 

5 

6 

. . 1 

2 

3 

1 

1 

2 3 

4 

5 

7 

8 

9 10  11 

12 

13 

4 

5 

6 

7 8 

9 

10 

2 

3 

4 

5 6 

7 

8 

6 

7 

8 

9 10 

11 

12 

14 

15 

16  17  18 

19 

20 

11 

12 

13 

14  15 

16 

17 

9 

10 

11 

12  13 

14 

15 

13 

14 

15 

16  17 

18 

19 

21 

22 

23  24  25 

26 

27 

18 

19 

20 

21  22 

23 

24 

16 

17 

18 

19  20 

21 

22 

20 

21 

22 

23  24 

25 

26 

28 

29 

30  31  . . 

25 

26 

27 

28  29 

30 

• . 

23 

24 

25 

26  27 

28 

29 

27 

28 

29 

30  31 

, . 

30 

31 

SEPTEMBER 

OCTOBER 

NOVEMBER 

DECEMBER 

S 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

3 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

S 

M 

T 

W T 

F 

S 

1 

2 

1 

2 

3 

4 5 

6 

7 

1 2 

3 

4 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 6 7 

8 

9 

8 

9 

10 

11  12 

13 

14 

5 

6 

7 

8 9 

10 

11 

3 

4 

5 

6 7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12  13  14 

IS 

16 

15 

16 

17 

18  19 

20 

21 

12 

13 

14 

15  16 

17 

18 

10 

11 

12 

13  14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19  20  21 

22 

23 

22 

23 

24 

25  26 

27 

28 

19 

20 

21 

22  23 

24 

25 

17 

18 

19 

20  21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26  27  28 

29 

30 

29 

30 

31 

26 

27 

28 

29  30 

. 

. . 

24 

25 

26 

27  28 

29 

30 

31 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Academic  Year  5 

Admission  to  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science: 24 

By  Matriculation  24 

By  Equivalent  examination  25 

To  Advanced  standing  26 

Special  Students  26 

Administration  and  Government  16 

Board  of  Trustees  16 

University  Council  16 

University  Senate  17 

Faculty  Boards  18 

Athletics  23  and  126 

Calendar  2 

Course  for  Prospectors  61 

Courses  of  Study  Leading  to  Degrees  47 

To  B.Sc 47 

To  B.A.  and  B.Sc.  (7  years)  63 

To  M.Sc.  45 

Degrees^  B.Sc.  and  M.Sc 45 

Degrees  Awarded,  1942  127 

Equipment  and  Special  Facilities  21 

Engineering  Society  '. 23 

Examinations  39 

Sessional  39 

Mid-term  39 

Mid-session  39 

Supplemental  40 

Field  Work  23 

Fees  • • 43 

Fellowships  26 

General  Information  41 

Expenses  41 

Physical  Welfare  of  Students  41 

Vaccination  41 

Tuberculin  Tests  41 

Student  Self-Government  41 

Alma  Mater  Society  Lecture  41 

Military  Services  42 

Employment  Service  42 

Fraternities  42 

The  Students’  Memorial  Union  42 

Graduate  Course  in  Commerce  62 

Graduate  Course  in  Geology  63 

Historical  Note  ‘ 19 

Library  2i 

Medals — Governor  General’s  and  Departmental  26 

Music  Room  23 


PAGE 


Officers  of  Administration  6 

Trustees  6 

Council  8 

benate  10 

Officers  of  Instruction  • 10 

Plan  of  University  Grounds  140 

Regulations  • 38 

Scholarships  and  Prizes  • 31 

Subjects  of  Study  • 65 

Chemistry  74 

Chemical  Engineering  98 

Civil  Engineering  102 

Descriptive  Geometry  125 

Drawing  124 

Economics  • 66 

Electrical  Engineering  114 

Engineering  Relations  107 

English  65 

Field  Work  112 

Fire  Assaying  97 

French  : 66 

General  Engineering  • 102 

Geology  82 

German  65 

Highway  Engineering  110 

Hydraulic  Engineering  106 

Mathematics  67 

Mechanical  Engineering  117 

Metallography  96 

Metallurgy  95 

Milling  94 

Mineralogy  87 

Mining  Engineering  92 

Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  108 

Ore  Dressing  93 

Physical  Education  126 

Physics  70 

Projection  125 

Railway  and  Highway  Engineering  107 

Shop  Work  123 

Structural  Engineering  104 

Surveying  HI 

Thermodynamics  121 

Time  Table  of  Classes  131 


5 


ACADEMIC  YEAR 

1943 

May  1— Written  notice  due  at  the  Registrar’s  Office  of  candidates’  inten- 
tion to  compete  for  Provincial  Schciar ships  and  Ontario 
Matriculation  Scholarships. 

July  15 — Last  day  for  applying  for  September  examinations,  or  for  degrees. 

Students  applying  after  this  date  will  be  required  to  pay  a 
late  fee  of  $3. 

Aug.  30 — Shop  Work  for  Courses  F and  G begins. 

Aug.  30 — Arts  Supplemental  Examinations  begin. 

Sept.  1 — Last  day  for  receiving  applications  for  the  Robert  Bruce  Bursaries. 
Sept.  8,  9,  10 — Supplemental  Examinations  in  Applied  Science. 

Sept.  13 — Surveying  Field  Class  opens. 

Sept.  28 — Registration  of  First  Year  Students.  Late  fee  after  this  date. 

($3  on  September  29  and  $1  a day  thereafter.) 

Sept.  29 — Gasses  of  First  Year  open  at  8 a.m. 

Sept.  29 — Registration  of  Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Years.  Late  fee  after 
this  date.  ($3  on  September  30  and  $1  a day  thereafter.) 
Sept,  30 — Classes  of  Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Years  open  at  8 a.m. 

Oct.  9 — Last  day  of  registration  (with  extra  fee)  of  students  in  Applied 

Science  who  have  not  previously  obtained  from  the  Faculty 
permission  to  register  later. 

C'ct.  16 — University  Day. 

Dates  of  the  Christmas  examinations  for  1st  and  2nd  years  to  be  announced. 
Dec.  22 — Christmas  holidays  begin  at  noon. 

1944 

Jan.  A — Examinations  in  half  courses  of  the  first  term  begin  at  2 p.m. 
Jan.  4 — Classes  in  whole  courses  re-open  at  8 a.m. 

Jan.  6 — Classes  in  half  courses  of  the  second  term  begin  at  8 a.m. 

Last  day  for  payment  of  second  instalment  of  fees  without  penalty. 
Feb.  11-12 — Mid-term  holiday. 

Mar.  15 — Last  day  for  receiving  applications  for  graduation. 

Apr.  1 — Last  day  for  receiving  manuscripts  and  essays  for  prizes. 

Apr.  1 — Classes  close  at  5 p.m. 

Apr.  7 — Good  Friday, 

Apr.  11 — Examinations  begin. 

May  20 — Convocation  for  distributing  prizes,  announcing  honours  and  con- 
ferring degrees.  (This  date  is  provisional). 


6 


OFFICERS  OF  ADMINISTRATION 


RECTOR 

His  Excellency  the  Right  Honourable  the  Earl  of  Athlone,  K.G.,  P.C.,  LL.D., 

Governor-General  of  Canada 

CHANCELLOR 

The  Honourable  Charles  Avery  Dunning^  P.C.,  LL.D. 

PRINCIPAL  AND  VICE-CHANCELLOR 
Robert  C.  Wallace,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  Ph.D,,  LL.D.,  F.G.S.,  F.R.S.C. 

VICE-PRINCIPAL  AND  TREASURER 
W.  E.  McNeill,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  D.CL.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.C. 

REGISTRAR 
Jean  I.  Royce,  B.A, 

ASSISTANT  REGISTRAR 
K.  Jean  Richardson,  B.A. 


THE  BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 


CHAIRMAN 

J.  M.  Macdonnell,  M.C.,  M.A.,  LL.D. 
SECRETARY 

W.  E.  McNeill,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S  C 


EX-OFFICIO  MEMBERS 

His  Excellency  the  Right  Honourable  the  Earl  of  Athlone, 

K.G.,  P.C,  LL.D Rector 

The  Honourable  Charles  Avery  Dunning,  P.C.,  LL.D Chancellor 

Robert  C.  Wallace,  M.A.,  D.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  F.G.S.,  F.R.S.C.  ..  Principal 


7 

ELECTIVE  MEMBERS 
Retire  1943 

Rev.  G.  a.  Brown,  M.A.,  B.D.,  D.D.^  Kingston,  Ont. 

Elmer  Davis,  Esq,®  Kingston,  Ont. 

A.  J.  Meiklejohn,  B.A,® Kingston,  Ont. 

Fraser  D.  Reid,  B.Sc.,  LL.D.^  Toronto,  Ont. 

Mrs.  George  Ross,  B.A.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

Retire  1944 

G.  C.  Bateman,  B.Sc.^  Ottawa,  Ont. 

C.  Jackson  Booth,  Esq.^  Ottawa,  Ont. 

J.  M.  Campbell,  Esq.'^'  Kingston,  Ont. 

T.  H.  Farrell,  M.A.,  M.D.,C.M.i Utica,  N.Y. 

V.  K.  Greek,  M.A.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

Senator  A.  C.  Hardy,  B.A.,  LL.B.,  P.C.,  K.C.®  Brockville,  Ont. 

John  Irwin,  Esq.^  Montreal,  P.Q. 

Dennis  Jordan,  B.A.,  M.D.,C.M.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

Rev.  Leslie  Pidgeon,  B.A.,  D.D.®  Montreal,  P.Q. 

Mrs.  James  Richardson®  Winnipeg,  Man. 

Retire  1945 

H.  G.  Bertram,  B.Sc.^  Dundas,  Ont. 

E.  A.  Collins,  B.Sc.®  Copper  Cliff,  Ont. 

J.  G.  Dwyer,  M.A.,  M.D.,C.M.,  LL.D.®  New  York,  N.Y. 

R.  D.  Harkness,  D.S.O.,  M.C.,  B.Sc.'^  Montreal,  P.Q. 

M.  N.  Hay,  B.Sc.^  Kingston,  Ont. 

D.  H.  Laird,  M.A.,  K.C.^  Winnipeg,  Man. 

T.  A.  McGinnis,  B.Sc.2  Kingston,  Ont 

D.  I.  McLeod,  B.A.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

R.  M.  Smith,  B.Sc.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

B.  M.  Stewart,  M.A.,  Ph.D.®  Ottawa,  Ont. 

Retire  1946 

D.  D.  Calvin,  B.A.®  Toronto,  Ont. 

His  Honour,  Judge  C.  A.  Cameron,  B.A.^  Belleville,  Ont. 

W.  C.  Clark,  C.M.G.,  M.A.,  LL.D.®  Ottawa,  Ont. 

J.  M.  Farrell,  B.A.,  K.C.®  Kingston,  Ont. 

J.  M.  Macdonnell,  M.C,  M.A.,  LL.D.® Toronto,  Ont. 

J.  C.  Macfarlane,  M.A.,  K.C.^  Toronto,  Ont. 

Alexander  Macphail,  C.M.G,,  D.S.O.,  B.Sc.,  LL.D.®  Kingston,  Ont. 

A.  E.  MacRae,  B.Sc.’^  Ottawa,  Ont. 

Sir  Edward  Peacock,  M.A.,  D.C.L.,  G.C.V.O.,  LL.D.®  London,  Eng. 

Retire  1947 

D.  K.  MacTavish,  B.A.,  K.C.®  Ottawa,  Ont. 


lElected  by  the  University  Council  for  three  years. 
zElected  by  the  Benefactors  for  four  years. 
sElected  by  the  Graduates  for  three  years. 

^Elected  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  to  represent  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  for  three 
years. 

Faculty  of  Queen’s  Theological  College  for  one  year. 

*Flected  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  for  four  years. 

TElected  By  Benefactors  to  represent  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  for  three  ymri. 


I 


8 


THE  UNIVERSITY  COUNCIL 
Secretary 

Gordon  J.  Smith,  B.A.,  B.Sc. 
Ex-officio  Members 

The  Chancellor 
The  Principal 

The  Members  of  the  Board  of  Trustees 
The  Members  of  the  Senate 

Elective  Members 
Retire  1944 


E.  T.  CORKILL,  B.Sc Toronto,  Ont. 

C.  W.  Drury,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D Toronto,  Ont. 

A.  G.  Farrell,  B.A Toronto,  Ont. 

D.  D.  Findlay,  B.Sc Carleton  Place,  Ont. 

•J.  C.  Macfarlane,  M.A.,  K.C Toronto,  Ont. 

B.  R.  MacKay,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D Ottawa,  Ont. 

W.  A.  Newman,  B.Sc Montreal,  Que. 

E.  T.  Sterne,  B.Sc Brantford,  Ont. 


E.  J.  F.  Williams,  B.A.,  M.D.,C.M Brockville,  Ont 


Retire  1945 

R.  W.  Anglin,  M.A 

J.  E.  S.  Dunlop,  B.A 

J.  A.  Edmison,  B.A 

*T.  H.  Farrell,  M.A.,  M.D.,C.M 

S.  H.  Henry,  M.A 

D.  E.  Keeley,  B.Sc 

Francis  King,  M.A.,  K.C 

♦D.  H.  Laird,  M.A.,  K.C 

Mrs.  G.  S.  Silverthorne,  B.A.,  M.D.,C.M. 


. . . Toronto,  Ont 
Winnipeg,  Man. 
. . Montreal,  Que. 

Utica,  N.Y. 

. . . Toronto,  Ont 
Schumacher,  Ont 
. . Kingston,  Ont 
. Winnipeg,  Man. 
. . . Toronto,  Ont 


9 


Retire  1946 


J.  A.  Banxister,  B.A.,  D.Paed 

♦H.  G.  Bertram^  B.Sc 

Campbell  Laidlaw,  B.A.,  M.D.,  C.M 

E.  L.  Longmore,  B.Sc 

B.  T.  McGhie,  M.D.,C.M 

B.  E.  Norrish,  M.Sc 

L.  A,  Pierce,  B.A.,  S.T.D.,  LL.D.,  D.Litt.  . 

Mrs.  R.  O.  Sweezey,  B.A 

James  Wallace,  M.A.,  B.D.,  M.D.,C.M.  . . 

Retire  1947 


Peterborough,  Ont, 

Dundas,  Ont. 

Ottawa,  Ont. 

Timmins,  Ont. 

Toronto,  Ont. 

. . . Montreal,  Que. 

Toronto,  Ont. 

. . . Montreal,  Que. 
...  Renfrew,  Ont 


Miss  Florence  S.  Dunlop,  B.A.,  Ph.D Ottawa,  Ont. 

J.  C.  Elliott,  M.A Toronto,  Ont. 

J.  F.  Houston,  M.D.,C.M Hamilton,  Ont. 

G.  C.  Monture,  B.Sc Ottawa,  Ont 

A.  A.  MacKay,  B.Sc Montreal,  Que. 

A.  G.  MacLachlan,  B.Sc Kingston,  Ont. 

G.  G.  McNab,  M.A.,  D.Paed Guelph,  Ont 

B.  L.  Simpson,  M.A Hamilton,  Ont. 

F.  D.  Wallace,  M.A North  Bay,  Ont. 

Retire  1948 

James  Bartlett,  B.Sc Kirkland  Lake,  Ont 

C.  H.  Bland,  B.A Ottawa,  Ont. 

N.  A.  Brisco,  M.A.,  Ph.D New  York,  N.Y. 

*His  Honour  Judge  C.  A.  Cameron,  B.A Belleville,  Ont 

Mrs.  F.  C.  Casselman,  B.A Edmonton,  Alta. 

Mrs.  D.  M.  Chown,  B.A Kingston,  Ont. 

Rev.  a.  D.  Cornett,  M.A.,  B.D Oshawa.  Ont. 

D.  G.  Geiger,  B.Sc Toronto,  Ont. 

G.  J.  Smith,  B.A.,  B.Sc Kingston,  Ont 

Retire  1949 

♦G.  C.  Bateman,  B.Sc Ottawa.  Ont. 

J.  A.  Bell,  B.Sc Toronto,  Ont. 

W.  G.  Cornett,  B.A.,  M.D.,  C.M Kingston,  Ont. 

J.  J.  Dunlop,  B.A Ottawa,  Ont. 

J.  Y.  MacKinnon,  M.A.,  B.D.,  Ph.D London,  Ont 

N.  B.  MacRostie,  B.A.,  B.Sc Ottawa.  Ont 

J.  L,  Murray,  B.A Kingston,  Ont. 

Mrs.  T.  a.  Newlands,  M.A Kingston,  Ont. 

Miss  Mary  E.  White,  M.A Toronto.  Ont 


®'®P*'csentative  of  the  Council  on  the  Board  of  Trustee*. 


10 


THE  SENATE 
Ex-officio  Members 

Robert  C Waixace,  M.A.,  I). Sc.,  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  F.G.S.,  F.R.S.C.  . . Principal 

W.  E.  McNeill,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.,  F.R.S.C Vice- Principal 

John  Matheson,  M.A Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Arts 

A.  L.  Clark,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C..  .Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science 
Frederick  Etherington,  M.D.,  C.M.,  F.R.C.S.(C.),  C.M.G., 

Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Medicine 

Rev.  H.  a.  Kent,  M.A.,  D.D.,  F.R.S.A., 

Principal  of  Queen’s  Theological  College 

Elective  Members 


The  Faculty  of  Arts 

R.  G.  Trotter,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.Hist.S.,  F.R.S.C Retires  1944 

H.  L.  Tracy,  B.A.,  Ph.D Retires  1945 

R.  O.  Earl,  B.A.,  S.M.,  Ph.D Retires  1946 

The  Faculty  of  Applied  Science 

D.  S.  Ellis,  D.S.O.,  B.Sc.,  M.A.,  M.C.E Retires  1944 

J.  A.  McRae,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C,  F.R.S.C Retires  1945 

T.  V.  Lord,  B.Sc Retires  1946 

The  Facultv  of  Medicine 

G.  H.  Ettinger,  B.A.,  M.D.,  F.R.S.C Retires  1944 

R.  C.  Burr,  M.D.,  CM.,  F.R.C.S Retires  1944 

VV.  F.  Connell,  M.D.,  CM.,  M.R.C.P.,  F.R.C.P.(C),  F.A.C.P...  Retires  1944 

Queen’s  Theological  College 

Rev.  J.  M.  Shaw,  M.A.,  D.D Retires  1944 

Rev.  S.  M.  Gilmour,  Ph.D Retires  1944 


OFFICERS  OF  INSTRUCTION 

I.— EMERITUS  PROFESSORS 

S.  F.  Kirkpatrick,  M.Sc., 

Emeritus  Professor  of  Metallurgy,  Vancouver 

A.  Macphail,  C.M.G.,  D.S.O.,  B.Sc.,  LL.D., 

Emeritus  Professor  of  General  Engineering, 


Kingston 


n 


IL—IN  THE  FACULTY  OF  APPLIED  SCIENCE 


A.  L.  Clark,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C., 

Professor  of  Physics  and  Dean  of  the  Faculty,  200  Albert  Street 

M.  B.  Baker,  B.A.,  B.Sc.,  F.G.S.A.,  F.R.S.C., 

Professor  of  Geology,  120  University  Avenue. 

J.  Matheson,  M.A., 

The  N.  F.  Dupuis  Professor  of  Mathematics,  and  Dean  of  the 

Faculty  of  Arts,  283  Frontenac  Street. 


L.  F.  Goodwin,  F.C.G.I.,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C. 

F*rofessor  of  Industrial  Chemistry  and  Chemical  Engineering, 

311  King  Street  West. 


E.  L.  Bruce,  B.Sc.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C,  F.G.S.A. 
Miller  Memorial  Research  Professor  in  Geology, 

S.  N.  Graham,  B.Sc. 

Professor  of  Mining  Engineering , 


D.  M.  Jemmett,  B.Sc.,  M.A. 

Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering, 

T.  A.  Gray,  O.B.E.,  D.Sc.,  F.R.S.C,  F.R.S. 
The  Chozvn  Research  Professor  of  Physics, 

J.  E.  Hawley,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.G.S.A.,  F.R.S.C. 
Professor  of  Mineralogy, 

T.  V.  Lord,  B.Sc. 

Professor  of  Metallurgy, 

D.  S.  Ellis,  D.S.O.,  B.Sc.,  M.A.,  M.C.E., 
Professor  of  Civil  Engineering, 

J.  A.  McRae,  M.A,,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C,  F.R.S.C. 
Professor  of  Chemistry, 

Major-General  E.  J.  C.  Schmidlin, 

Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering , 

C.  F.  Gummer,  M.A.,  PLD. 

Professor  of  Mathematics, 


140  Beverley  Street 
11  Kensington  Avenue. 
“Elmhurst",  Centre  Street. 

26  Wellington  Street. 

123  Queen’s  Crescent. 

428  Earl  Street. 

418  Earl  Street. 

226  Frontenac  Street. 

130  Earl  Street. 

149  Collingwood  Street 


12 


J K.  Robertson,  M.A.,  F.R.S.C. 

The  Robert  Waddell  Professor  of  Experimental  Physics 


105  Albert  Street 

N.  Miller,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Mathematics, 

28  Kensington  Avenue. 

E.  Flammer,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Professor  of  Physics, 

68  Collingwood  Street. 

A.  Jackson,  B.Sc., 

Professor  of  Draughting, 

Secretary  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science. 

317  King  Street  W. 

B.  Rose,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C,  F.G.S.A. 

Professor  of  Geology, 

208  Albert  Street. 

*C.  E.  Walker,  B.Sc.(Acc.),  C.A., 

Professor  of  Commerce, 

84  College  Street 

Heinrich  Henel,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  German, 

148  Lower  Albert  Street 

L.  T.  Rutledge,  B.A.Sc.,  M.E., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering, 

602  Earl  Street. 

K.  P.  Johnston,  B.A.,  B.Sc., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Annandale  Apts.,  Sydenham  Street 
G.  B.  Frost,  B.A.,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry,  Annandale  Apts.,  Sydenham  Street 


L.  A.  Munro,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.C.I.C., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry, 

93  Beverley  Street. 

J.  F.  Logan,  B.A.,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry, 

154  Union  Street  West. 

R.  L.  Dorrance,  M.A.,  F.C.I.C, 

Associate  Professor  of  Che^nistry, 

81  Lower  Union  Street 

H.  H.  Stewart,  B.Sc.,  M.S., 

Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering, 

288  CollingAvood  Street. 

0.  A.  Carson,  B.Sc.,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Metallurgy, 

72  Barrie  Street 

G.  L.  Edgett,  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics, 

41  Traymoor  Avenue. 

^Deceased,  December  1942. 


13 


B.  W.  Sargent,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C  (on  leave  of 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics, 

E.  E.  Watson,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D,, 

Assistant  Professor  of  Physics, 

H.  M.  Cave,  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (on  leave  of  absence). 
Assistant  Professor  of  Physics, 

R.  A.  Low,  B.Sc.,  M.C.E., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering, 

J.  B.  Baty,  B.Sc., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering, 

H.  W.  Harkness,  B.Sc.,  B.A.,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D., 
Assistant  Professor  of  Physics, 

C,  J.  Vincent,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  English, 

C.  V.  Armour,  M.A.Sc., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering , 

I.  Halperin,  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics, 

G.  A.  Revell,  M.Sc.,  F.C.I.C. 

Assistant  Professor  of  Chemical  Engineering , 

H.  S.  Pollock,  M.Sc., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering, 

W.  A.  Wolfe,  M.Sc., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanieal  Engineering, 

S.  D.  Lash,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  A.C.G.I., 

Assistant  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering, 

n.  J.  Styles,  B.Sc., 

Lecturer  in  Draughting, 

WiujAM  Angus,  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  English, 

N.  W.  Buerger,  S.M.,  Ph.D.,  F.M.S.A., 

Lecturer  in  Mineralogy, 


absence) , 

131  King  Street  East 
82  Traymoor  Avenue. 
133  King  Street. 
98  Clergy  Street  West. 

On  Active  Service. 
181  University  Avenue. 

105  Hill  Street. 

42  Napier  Avenue. 

On  Active  Service. 

34  Traymoor  Avenue. 

435  Frontenac  Street. 

88  Collingwood  Street. 

103  Dundas  Street. 

On  active  service 

22  Collingwood  Street. 

On  active  service. 


14 


H.  G.  Conn,  B.Sc.  (on  active  service), 

Lecturer  in  Mechanical  Engineering,  288  Victoria  Street. 

E.  G.  Taylor,  B.Sc.,  Sc.M.,  Ph.D.,  (Wales)  A.I.C., 

Lecturer  in  Chemistry , 19  George  Street. 

M.  L.  Keith,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Geology,  33  Lower  William  Street. 

J.  D.  Lee,  B.Sc., 

Lecturer  in  Civil  Engineering , 402  Johnson  Street. 

R.  N.  Jones,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Chemistry,  209  Stuart  Street. 

O.  T.  Macklem,  B.Sc., 

Special  Lecturer  in  Civil  Engineering , 18  Barrie  Street. 

R.  A.  Chipman,  Ph.D., 

Lecturer  in  Physics,  31  George  Street. 

R.  H.  Hay,  M.Sc., 

Lecturer  m Physics,  619  Victoria  Street. 

Instructor  in  Physics:  A.  Vibert  Douglas,  M.B.E.,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Instructors  in  Draughting : H.  I.  Marshall,  B.Sc.;  D.  Jack,  M.Sc.;  W.  E. 
Gorham. 

Instructors  in  Physical  Training:  J.  E.  Edwards,  B.Sc.  (on  active  service); 
R.  Seright,  B.Sc. 

Instructor  in  Shop  Work:  A.  C.  Baiden. 

Instructor  in  Blacksmithing : C.  Brown. 

ASSISTANTS  AND  DEMONSTRATORS 

Chemistry : W.  W.  Maynard,  B.Sc.  ; R.  Y.  Moir,  B.A.  ; A.  G.  Stewart,  B.A. 
Civil  Engineering : C.  H.  Ellacott,  B.Sc. 

Draughting : A.  R.  Asquith,  B.Sc.  ; D.  M.  MacKbracher,  B.Sc. 

Electrical  Engineering:  H.  I.  Hamilton,  B.Sc.;  N.  A.  Williams,  B.Sc. 
Mathematics : P.  T.  Demos,  B.Sc.  ; R.  H.  Hay,  M.Sc. 

Mineralogy : J.  M.  Harrison,  M.A. 

Physics : R.  A.  Burr,  B.Sc. 

UNDERGRADUATE  ASSISTANTS  AND  DOUGLAS  TUTORS 

R.  H.  Abbott,  E.  M.  Abraham,  W.  H.  Bechtel,  A.  D.  Berlin,  C.  H.  R. 
Campling,  E.  L.  Dauphin,  N.  B.  H.  Dean,  E.  Diamond,  H.  E.  Gove, 
H.  W.  Habgood,  R.  S.  Haflidson,  W.  H.  Henry,  A.  F.  Holloway, 

A.  C.  G.  Jarvis,  R.  J.  Merrill,  A.  G.  Moreton,  J.  E.  Moyle,  A.  M.  Munn, 

B.  J.  McColl,  D.  C.  McWhirter,  J.  C.  Orr,  L.  A.  Page,  J.  D.  Patterson, 
W.  F.  Reid,  W.  A.  Runge,  L.  K.  Rutledge,  A.  C.  Wise,  G.  M.  Wright, 
H.  R.  Yamanaka,  M.  E.  Young. 


15 


OTHER  OFFICERS 


LIBRARIAN 
E.  C.  Kyte 

CURATORS  OF  THE  LIBRARY 

Principal  Wallace,  Principal  Kent,  Vice-Principal  McNeill, 
Dean  Clark,  Dean  Matheson,  Dean  Etherington,  Professors 
James  Miller,  Corry,  J.  K.  Robertson,  Shaw  and  Trotter. 

CURATORS  OF  THE  MUSEUM 

The  Professors  of  Biology  and  Geology 

DIRECTOR  OF  ENDOWMENT 
Gordon  J.  Smith,  B.A.,  B.Sc. 

DIRECTOR,  DEPARTMENT  OF  UNIVERSITY  EXTENSION 

R.  M.  Winter,  M.A.  (on  Active  Service)* 

SUPERINTENDENT  OF  BUILDINGS 
James  Bews 

SECRETARY-TREASURER  ATHLETIC  BOARD  OF  CONTROL 

Charles  Hicks 

SECRETARY-TREASURER  GENERAL  ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION, 
MANAGER  OF  EMPLOYMENT  BUREAU 

H.  J.  Hamilton,  B.A.  (on  leave  of  absence)** 

G.  J.  Smith,  B.A.,  B.Sc.  (acting) 

MEDICAL  OFFICER 
J.  T.  Tweddell,  M.D.,  CM. 

* Flight-Lieutenant,  Royal  Canadian  Air  Force. 

**  Office  Manager,  Wartime  Bureau  of  Technical  Personnel. 


16 


ADMINISTRATION  AND  GOVERNMENT 


The  administration  of  the  University  is  vested  in  the  Board  of 
Trustees,  the  University  Council,  the  Senate,  and  the  Faculty  Boards. 


THE  BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

The  Board  of  Trustees  consists  of  ex-officio  and  elective  members. 
The  former  are  the  Chancellor,  the  Principal,  and  the  Rector.  The  latter 
consist  of  (1)  one  representative  from  each  affiliated  college,  (2)  repre- 
sentatives as  provided  for  by  the  Statutes  from  (a)  the  University  Council, 
(b)  the  Benefactors,  (c)  the  Graduates,  and  (3)  members  elected  by  the 
Board  of  Trustees. 

The  functions  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  are  to  manage  the  finances,  ' 
to  possess  and  care  for  the  property,  to  procure  legislation,  to  appoint 
instructors  and  other  officers,  and  in  general  to  attend  to  such  external 
matters  as  do  not  relate  directly  to  instruction. 


THE  UNIVERSITY  COUNCIL 

The  University  Council  consists  of  the  Chancellor,  the  Trustees,  the 
members  of  the  Senate,  and  an  equal  number  of  members  elected  by  the 
graduates  from  their  own  members. 

The  Functions  of  the  Council  are: 

(1)  To  elect  the  Chancellor,  except  when  two  or  more  candidates  are 
nominated,  in  which  case  the  election  is  by  registered  graduates. 

(2)  To  elect  six  trustees,  two  of  whom  shall  retire  annually. 

(3)  To  make  by-laws  governing  the  elections  of  (a)  the  Rector  by  the 
registered  students,  (b)  seven  trustees  by  the  benefactors,  (c)  six  trustees 
by  the  University  Council,  and  (d)  six  trustees  by  the  graduates. 

(4)  To  discuss  all  questions  relating  to  the  University  and  its  welfare. 

(5)  To  make  representation  of  its  views  to  the  Senate  or  the  Board 
of  Trustees. 

(6)  To  decide  on  proposals  for  affiliation. 


17 


(7)  To  arrange  all  matters  pertaining  to  (a)  its  own  meetings  and  busi- 
ness, (b)  the  meetings  and  proceedings  of  Convocation,  (c)  the  installation 
of  the  Chancellor,  and  (d)  the  fees  for  membership,  registration,  and  voting. 

Ordinarily  the  annual  meeting  of  the  Council  is  held  on  the  day  before 
the  spring  Convocation. 


THE  SENATE 

The  Senate  consists  of : 

The  Principal. 

The  Vice-Principal. 

The  Principal  of  Queen’s  Theological  College. 

The  Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Arts. 

The  Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science 

The  Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Medicine. 

Three  Professors  elected  by  the  Faculty  of  Arts. 

Three  Professors  elected  by  the  Faculty  of  Medicine. 

Three  Professors  elected  by  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science. 

Two  Professors  elected  by  the  Faculty  of  Queen’s  Theological  College. 

The  Registrar. 

The  Functions  of  the  Senate  are : 

(1)  To  determine  all  matters  of  an  academic  character  which  concern 
the  University  as  a whole. 

(2)  To  consider  and  determine  all  courses  of  study  leading  to  a degree, 
including  conditions  of  Matriculation,  on  recommendation  of  the  respective 
Faculty  Boards ; but  the  Senate  shall  not  embody  any  changes  without  having 
previously  presented  these  to  the  Faculty. 

(3)  To  recommend  to  the  Board  of  Trustees  the  establishment  of  any 
additional  Faculty,  Department,  Chair,  or  Course  of  Instruction  in  the 
University. 

(4)  To  be  the  medium  of  communication  between  the  Alma  Mater 
Society  and  the  Governing  Boards. 

(5)  To  determine  all  regulations  regarding  the  social  functions  of  the 
students  within  the  University,  and  regarding  the  University  Library  and 
University  Reading  Rooms. 

(6)  To  publish  the  University  Calendars. 

(7)  To  conduct  examinations. 


18 


(8)  To  grant  Degrees.  ' ' . ; 

(9)  To  award  University  Scholarships,  Medals,  and  Prizes. 

(10)  To  enforce  the  Statutes,  Rules,  and  Ordinances  of  the  University. 

(11)  And  generally,  to  make  such  recommendations  to  the  Governing 
Boards  as  may  be  deemed  expedient  for  promoting  the  interests  of  the 
University. 


THE  FACULTY  BOARDS 

The  Faculty  Boards  are  constituted  as  follows : 

For  the  Faculty  of  Arts  and  for  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science,  the 
Dean,  Professors,  Associate  Professors,  Assistant  Professors,  and  Lecturers 
of  each  Faculty  have  power  to  meet  as  separate  boards,  and  to  administer 
the  affairs  of  each  Faculty  under  such  regulations  as  the  Board  of  Trustees 
may  prescribe. 

For  the  Faculty  of  Medicine,  the  Dean,  Professors,  Associate  Professors, 
and  Assistant  Professors  have  power  to  meet  as  a separate  board,  and  to 
administer  the  affairs  of  the  Faculty  under  such  regulations  as  the  Board  of 
Trustees  may  prescribe. 

The  Principal  and  Vice-Principal  are  ex-officio  members  of  each  of  the 
Faculty  Boards. 

The  Functions  of  the  Faculty  Boards  are: 

(1) ’  To  recommend  to  the  Senate  courses  of  study  leading  to  a degree, 
and  the  conditions  of  admission. 

(2)  To  decide  upon  applications  for  admission  or  for  change  of  course, 
subject  to  the  regulations  of  the  Senate. 

(3)  To  submit  to  the  Senate  names  for  both  ordinary  and  honorary 
degrees. 

(4)  To  arrange  the  time-table  for  classes  and  to  edit  the  Faculty 
Calendar,  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Senate. 

(5)  To  control  registration,  and  to  determine  the  amount  of  fees  and 
manner  of  payment,  subject  to  the  regulations  of  the  Senate  and  the  approval 
of  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

(6)  To  deal  with  class  failures. 

(7)  To  exercise  academic  supervision  over  students. 


19 


(8)  To  make  such  recommendations  to  the  Senate  as  may  be  deemed 
expedient  for  promoting  the  efficiency  of  the  University. 

(9)  To  award  Faculty  Scholarships,  Medals,  and  Prizes. 

(10)  To  appoint,  within  the  limits  of  the  funds  made  available  by  the 
Trustees,  such  sessional  assistants,  fellows,  tutors,  and  demonstrators  as 
shall  be  needed  to  give  instruction  in  the  subjects  taught  by  the  Faculty. 

(11)  To  pass  such  regulations  and  by-laws  as  may  be  necessary  for  the 
exercise  of  the  functions  of  the  Faculty. 


HISTORICAL  NOTE 

The  School  of  Mining,  now  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science,  Queen's 
University,  was  founded  in  1893  under  an  Ontario  Charter  which  placed  its 
management  in  the  hands  of  a Board  of  Governors  elected  by  its  shareholders, 
i.e.,  the  subscribers  to  its  funds.  While  originally  a Mining  School  it  has 
been  expanded  to  include  courses  of  study  for  degrees  in  mining  and 
metallurgy,  in  civil,  mechanical,  electrical,  and  chemical  engineering,  in 
analytical  chemistry  and  assaying,  in  physics,  and  in  geology  and  mineralogy. 
The  objects  of  the  institution  were  tO'  provide  thorough  instruction  both 
theoretical  and  practical,  in  the  above  and  other  branches  of  applied  science, 
and  to  adapt  courses  of  study  and  methods  of  presentation  to  the  conditions 
prevailing  in  Canada,  so  as  to  secure  as  nearly  as  may  be  a maximum  useful- 
ness to  the  country. 

For  several  sessions  all  its  Departments  were  housed  in  Carruthers 
Science  Hall,  which  had  been  erected  in  1889,  but  in  view  of  the  rapid 
success  and  increased  requirements  of  the  School  the  Provincial  Legislature 
in  1900  provided  for  its  accommodation  two  large  buildings,  Ontario  Hall 
for  the  Departments  of  Mineralogy,  Geology,  and  Physics,  and  Fleming  Hall, 
for  the  Departments  of  Civil,  Mechanical,  and  Electrical  Engineering.  More 
recently  the  Provincial  Government  erected  Gordon  Hall,  which  is  entirely 
devoted  to  Chemistry ; and,  through  the  generosity  of  Professor  Nicol  and 
other  graduates,  Nicol  Hall  was  built  for  the  accommodation  of  the  class 
rooms  and  laboratories  of  the  Department  of  Mining  and  Metallurgy.  These 
changes  permitted  the  Civil  Engineering  Department  to  move  into  Carruthers 
Hall,  leaving  room  in  Fleming  Hall  for  the  already  overcrowded  departments 
of  Electrical  and  Mechanical  Engineering.  Miller  Hall,  one  of  the  finest 
buildings  on  the  campus,  was  opened  in  1931  for  the  Departments  of 
Mineralogy  and  Geology,  permitting  the  Department  of  Qiemical  Engineering 
to  move  into  Ontario  Hall. 

From  its  inception  the  School  of  Mining  was  closely  connected  with 
the  University.  The  students  of  the  School  of  Mining  received  their  degrees 


20 


from  the  University  and  the  graduates  in  Science  enjoyed  the  same  rank  and 
privilege  as  other  graduates  in  representation  upon  the  University  Council 
and  in  the  election  of  University  Trustees.  The  staff  of  the  School  of 
Mining  constituted  practically  the  Science  Faculty  of  the  University,  some 
of  its  members  being  actively  connected  also  with  the  Arts  and  Medical 
Faculties,  and  the  Faculty  being  represented  with  other  faculties  on  the 
. Senate  of  the  University. 

The  School  of  Mining  was  formerly  under  the  control  of  a separate 
board  of  Governors,  but  in  the  year  1916  it  became  the  Faculty  of  Applied 
Science  of  Queen’s  University. 

Kingston  is  well  situated  as  the  seat  of  a college  of  engineering  and 
applied  science.  Geology  and  mineralogy,  two  of  the  fundamental  subjects 
of  a mining  engineer’s  education  and  also  important  in  othejr  scientific 
professions,  are  studied  to  best  advantage  where  the  minerals  can  be  seen 
as  they  lie  in  nature,  and  where  geological  formations  can  be  examined  in 
situ.  In  a few  hours  a class  of  students  can  be  taken  to  a region  so  rich  in 
mineral  species  that  about  forty  different  kinds  have  been  secured  in  an 
afternoon.  There  are  several  geological  formations  out-cropping  within  easy 
walking  distance  of  the  city.  If  to  this  be  added  the  accessibility  by  a short 
railway  journey  of  mines  in  operation,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  opportimities 
for  instructive  demonstrations  to  classes  in  mineralogy,  geology,  and  mining 
are  very  numerous.  The  metallurgical  works  at  Deloro,  eighty  miles  from 
Kingston,  are  also  open  to  our  students.  It  is  thus  possible  to  give  to  the 
study  of  mineralogy,  geology,  mining,  and  metallurgy,  that  practical  turn 
which  not  only  adds  interest  to  the  college  course,  but  shortens  the  period 
between  graduation  and  the  attainment  of  proficiency  and  of  confidence  in 
professional  work. 

The  variety  of  topographical  features  in  the  surrounding  country  affords 
the  best  of  material  for  practice  in  all  branches  of  surveying,  including 
railway,  topographic,  hydrographic,  and  land  surveying.  The  main  line  of 
the  Canadian  National  passes  through  Kingston,  which  is  also  a terminus 
of  the  Canadian  Pacific  Railway.  The  Canadian  Locomotive  Works,  which 
are  the  largest  locomotive  shops  in  Ontario,  are  within  ten  minutes’  walk  of 
the  University,  and  are  open  to  students  for  study  and  for  assisting  in  engine 
testing  and  similar  work.  Kingston  has  a large  Dry  Dock,  in  whose  yards  steel 
construction  can  be  studied  practically.  The  locks  of  the  Rideau  Canal  can  be 
visited  at  Kingston  Mills,  six  miles  from  the  heart  of  the  city.  There  are  also 
several  water  powers  within  easy  distance.  Students  of  civil,  mechanical,  and 
electrical  engineering  thus  have  easy  access  to  practical  illustrations  of  their 
professional  studies. 


21 


EQUIPMENT  AND  SPECIAL  FACILITIES 

THE  LIBRARY 

The  Douglas  Library  building  provides  one  large  reading  room,  three 
smaller  ones,  a number  of  conference  rooms,  exhibition  rooms  and  offices  for 
the  library  and  administrative  staff. 

In  the  main  reading  room  will  be  found  a collection  of  some  5,000 
volumes  of  general  reference  works  on  open  shelves.  The  general  library 
includes  about  160,000  volumes  as  well  as  many  original  manuscripts  and 
prints. 

The  system  of  classification  used  is  that  of  the  Library  of  Congress. 

Seven  hundred  and  fifty  journals  and  other  serials  are  currently  received. 

In  addition  to  the  general  library  there  are  departmental  libraries  for 
physics ; chemistry ; chemical  engineering ; mining  and  metallurgy ; geology  and 
mineralogy;  civil,  mechanical  and  electrical  engineering. 

The  library  of  the  Mddical  Faculty  together  with  a biological  library,  is 
separately  housed  in  the  Old  Arts  Building. 

The  Lome  Pierce  Collection  of  Canadian  Literature  is  very  rich  in  first 
editions,  original  manuscripts  and  rare  Canadiana. 

The  Shortt-Haydon  Collection  of  portraits  and  views  relating  to  Canada 
is  one  of  the  finest  collections  of  its  kind. 

THE  IfUSBUMS 

The  Miller  Memorial  Museum,  named  in  memory  of  the  late  Willet 
G.  Miller,  formerly  Provincial  Geologist  of  Ontario,  has  been  erected 
for  the  Departments  of  Geology  and  Mineralogy.  The  main  floor  is  entirely 
devoted  to  museum  purposes  and  contains  amc»ig  other  things  an  excellent 
collection  of  economic  minerals  used  in  industrial  processes ; a collection  of  at 
least  a thousand  mounted  individual  crystals,  large  collections  illustrating  the 
systematic  classification  of  minerals  and  rocks;  another  illustrating  the  ores 
found  particularly  in  Canadian  mines,  a stratigraphic  assembly  of  rocks  and  a 
paleontological  collection  illustrating  the  geologic  life  record. 

An  Ethnological  collection  of  weapons,  utensils,  dresses,  and  ornaments 
is  also  housed  in  the  east  wing  of  the  museum. 

The  Biological  Museum,  in  the  Old  Arts  Building,  has  a large  Botanical 
collection  illustrating  fully  the  flora  of  North  America,  Europe,  Asia,  South 
Africa,  and  Australia;  a Zoological  collection  representing  the  Canadian  fauna 
by  a large  number  of  prepared  specimens  of  mammals,  birds,  reptiles,  fishes, 
insects,  and  mollusca. 

THE  LABORATORIES 

The  Chemical  Laboratories  are  in  Gordon  Hall.  On  the  fourth  floor 
arc  the  laboratories  of  Medical  Organic,  Biochemistry,  and  Water  Analysis. 


22 


On  the  third  floor  are  two  laboratories  for  General  Chemistry,  and  a laboratory 
for  Electro-chemistrj”  and  Colloid  Chemistry.  On  the  second  or  main  floor 
are  two  laboratories  for  Quantitative  Analysis,  two  for  Organic  Chemistry,  and 
one  for  Industrial  Chemistry.  On  the  first  or  basement  floor  are  three  labora- 
tories for  Qualitative  Analysis,  and  two  for  Physical  Chemistry.  Besides  these 
there  are  a number  of  small  separate  laboratories  for  research  work. 

, The  Physics  Laboratories  occupy  the  major  part  of  Ontario  Hall.  The 
basement  contains  the  large  elementary  laboratory,  the  liquid  air  room,  numerous 
research  laboratories  and  the  research  workshop.  The  main  floor  is  given  over 
to  undergraduate  lecture  and  laboratory  rooms.  The  second  floor  has  two  large 
lecture  rooms,  laboratory  room  for  advanced  undergraduate  classes  and  for  re- 
search. The  attic  is  used  for  workshop  and  storage  purposes. 

The  Geological  and  Mineralogical  Laboratories  are  in  Miller  Hall. 
In  the  basement  is  a laboratory  for  the  preparation  of  rock  sections  and  for 
photography  and  an  X-ray  laboratory  equipped  with  a Hilger  X-ray  spectro- 
graph. On  the  second  floor  a laboratory  occupying  the  west  wing  is  for  elemen- 
tary classes  in  Geology.  Along  the  north  side  of  the  building  is  a map  room 
and  the  petrographical  laboratory.  On  the  south  side  a large  draughting  room 
is  used  by  senior  students  for  the  preparation  of  maps  and  sections  required 
in  field  courses.  On  the  third  floor  at  the  west  end  is  a large  laboratory  for 
blowpipe  analysis,  a dark  room  equipped  with  a two  circle  goniometer,  a mono- 
chromator and  Abbe  refractometer.  The  east  wing  is  a laboratory  for  post- 
graduate students,  a dark  room  for  photography,  a chemical  laboratory  with 
space  for  twelve  students,  a grinding  room  for  preparation  of  polished  surfaces 
and  an  adjoining  optical  laboratory  for  petrographic  and  mineralographic  work. 
Smaller  laboratories  for  research  work  are  equipped  with  a Hilger  £316 
spectrograph,  a Hallimond  Electromagmatic  concentrator  and  facilities  for 
examination  of  ores  by  polarized  light. 

The  Biological  Laboratories  are  on  the  main  floor  and  in  the  basement 
of  the  Old  Arts  Building.  There  is  a large  laboratory  for  General  Botany, 
one  for  General  Zoology,  and  one  for  Medical  Biology,  as  well  as  smaller 
laboratories  for  Plant  Physiology  and  Advanced  Botany.  Laboratories  are 
available  also  for  research  in  Plant  Physiology,  Cytology,  and  the  growth  of 
populations.  A very  carefully  arranged  and  classified  collection  of  representa- 
tive invertebrate  animals  as  well  as  a small  but  growing  entomological 
collection  are  available  for  study.  These  supplement  the  Herbarium  and  the 
collection  of  larger  animals  in  the  Museum. 

THE  OBSERVATORY 

The  Observatory  has  a transit  room,  a computing  room,  and  an  equatorial 
room  with  revolving  dome.  The  equatorial  telescope  has  a six-inch  objective, 
declination  and  right  ascension  circles,  and  a driving  clock.  The  transit  has  a 


23 


three  and  a half  inch  objective.  The  further  equipment  consists  chiefly  of  a 
striding  level,  a chronograph,  a mean  time  clock,  and  a sidereal  time  clock. 

THE  MUSIC  ROOM 

The  Music  Room  in  the  Douglas  Library  is  ideally  furnished  and  equipped 
for  music  study  and  listening.  It  houses  the  Carnegie  collection  of  more  than 
a thousand  gramophone  records,  and  a number  of  musical  scores  and  books 
which  are  available  on  loan  through  the  usual  library  facilities.  The  equip- 
ment also  includes  a Steinway  grand  pianoforte,  a radio-phonograph,  and  a 
high-fidelity  phonograph  with  separate  loud-speaker  console.  The  room  is 
open  every  afternoon  during  the  session,  including  Saturday  and  Sunday. 

FACILITIES  FOR  FIELD  WORK 

Geology  and  Mineralogy.  In  the  vicinity  of  Kingston  a greater  variety 
of  economic  minerals  and  metalliferous  ores  is  mined  than  in  any  similar  area 
in  Canada.  Through  the  kindness  of  the  managers  the  various  mines  may  be 
visited  by  the  Geology  and  Mineralogy  classes,  and  students  may  thus  obtain 
valuable  information  concerning  field  conditions. 

Botany  and  Zoology.  Exceptionally  good  facilities  for  field  study  are 
provided  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston  by  the  great  diversity  of  land  surfaces  and 
bodies  of  water.  A wide  range  of  plant  and  animal  associations  is  within 
easy  reach  of  the  University. 

ENGINEERING  SOCIETY 

The  representative  student  organization  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science 
is  the  Engineering  Society.  All  students  registered  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied 
Science  are  members  of  this  society.  Regular  monthly  meetings  are  held  and 
the  Society  has  been  fortunate,  in  recent  years,  in  securing  successful 
engineers  to  address  the  students  during  the  session.  Any  student  member 
who  wishes  to  read  a scientific  paper  before  the  society  will  always  find  the 
executive  of  the  Engineering  Society  ready  and  willing  to  arrange  a date. 
Prizes  are  offered  in  connection  with  such  student  papers. 

The  Society  conducts  a Technical  Supplies  Department,  where  all  books 
prescribed,  stationery,  note  books,  drawing  paper  and  instruments,  and 
other  supplies,  may  be  purchased  at  prices  but  slightly  over  cost.  Any  books 
not  in  ^tock  will  be  ordered  on  payment  of  a small  deposit. 

FACILITIES  FOR  ATHLETICS 

The  University  provides  ample  facilities  for  athletics.  A gymnasium, 
one  of  the,  finest  in  Canada,  was  built  during  the  summer  of  1930.  In  the 
University  Grounds  is  a large  covered  skating  rink  with  artificial  ice. 
Adjoining  the  University  is  the  football  field,  with  the  George  Richardson 
Memorial  Stadium  given  by  Dr.  James  Richardson,  formerly  Chancellor  of  the 
University,  in  memory  of  his  brother.  Captain  George  Richardson,  a Queen’s 
graduate  and  a former  athlete,  who  was  killed  in  the  Great  War.  There  is 
room  and  equipment  for  all  students  who  wish  to  take  part  in  football, 
hockey,  basketball,  tennis,  track  athletics,  swimming,  boxing,  fencing,  of 
wrestling. 


24 


REQUIREMENTS  FOR  ADMISSION. 

The  number  of  students  admitted  to  the  first  year  of  the  Faculty  of 
Applied^  Science  is  limited.  Selection  from  applicants  for  admission  will  be 
made  on  the  basis  of  their  qualifications.  Candidates  must  make  application 
by  September  1st  on  forms  which  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  This  application  must  be  accompanied  by  academic  certificates,  a 
certificate  of  successful  vaccination,  a photograph  2"  x 3",  and  a fee  of  $10 
which  will  be  applied  on  tuition  payable  at  registration.  This  fee  will  be 
returned  up  until  one  week  before  the  opening  of  the  session  if  the  student 
notifies  the  University  that  he  cannot  register. 


I.^ADMISSION  BY  MATRICULATION. 

♦The  requirements  for  admission  to  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  are 
as  follows: 

Part  I.  The  Ontario  Secondary  School  Graduation  Diploma  with  sliding 
in  the  following  subjects : English,  History,  Mathematics,  (Algebra  and, 
Geometry),  Experimental  Science  (Physics  and  Chemistry)  or  Agriculture 
(Parts  I and  II),  and  any  two  of  Latin,  Greek,  French,  German,  Spanish, 
Italian,  or  Arithmetic.  Arithmetic  to  be  offered  by  candidates  from  technical 
schools  only. 

Part  II.  Grade  XIII  in  the  following  subjects:  English,  Mathematics 
(Algebra,  Geometry,  including  Analytical  Geometry,  and  Trigonometry  with 
an  average  of  60%),  Experimental  Science  (Physics  and  Chemistry),  and 
one  of  Latin,  Greek,  French,  German,  Spanish,  Italian,  History,  Biology. 

Note : — Grade  XIII  standing  in  History,  or  in  Biology,  or  in  a Foreign 
Language,  not  offered  under  Part  II  may  be  substituted  for  one  of  the 
Languages  of  Part  I. 

Candidates  who  have  had  practical  engineering  training  or  who  are  other- 
wise specially  qualified  for  an  Engineering  Course  may  be  admitted  at  the 
discretion  of  the  Faculty,  on  conditions  to  be  determined  in  each  case,  even 
though  they  do  not  present  precisely  the  subjects  named  above. 

Candidates  entitled  to  enter  the  Faculty  of  Arts  may  satisfy  the  require- 
ments of  Part  II  by  extramural  and  Summer  School  work. 


•The  experience  of  many  years  has  shown  that  a good  foundation  in  and  a liking 
for  Mathematics  are  essential  for  success  in  a Science  Course. 


25 


II.—ADMISSION  BY  EQUIVALENT  EXAMINATION 

The  following  certificates  are  accepted  provided  that  the  subjects  covered 
are  the  same  as  the  subjects  of  the  Ontario  Secondary  School  Graduation 
Diploma. 

Alberta Junior  Matriculation  (Grade  XI). 

British  Columbia Junior  Matriculation  (Grade  XII). 

Manitoba .Grade  XI. 

New  Brunswick Junior  Matriculation. 

Newfoundland Associate  (Junior). 

Nova  Scotia Grade  XI.  (average  60,  minimum  50). 

Ontario Ontario  Secondary  School  Graduation 

Diploma. 

Prince  Edward  Island First  Qass  Teachers’  License  or 

Second  Year  Certificate  from  Prince 
of  Wales  College. 

Quebec Quebec  School  Leaving  Certificate. 

McGill  Junior  Matriculation. 

Saskatchewan Grade  XI. 

Any  one  of  the  following  certificates  will  be  accepted  in  place  of  Ontario 
Grade  XIII  in  the  same  subjects  if  the  required  standing  has  been  made  in 
the  subjects  covered. 

Alberta Senior  Matriculation  (Grade  XII). 

British  Columbia Senior  Matriculation  (Grade  XIII). 

Manitoba First  Class. 

New  Brunswick Grammar  School  or  First  Class 

Licenses. 

NewfoundlcUid Associate  Grade. 

Nova  Scotia Grade  XII. 

Ontario... Grade  XIII. 

Prince  Edward  Island Honour  Diploma  .of  Third  Year, 

Prince  of  Wales  College. 

Quebec McGill  Senior  Matriculation. 

Senior  High  School  Leaving  Certificate. 

Saskatchewan Grade  XII. 

Great  Britain The  School  Certificate  of  the  various 

English  Universities  and  the  Central 
Welsh  Board;  the  candidate  will  be 
granted  Grade  XIII  standing  in  those 
subjects  in  which  he  has  obtained 
“credit”.  Similar  standing  will  be  given 
those  having  the  Leaving  Certificate  of 
the  Scottish  Education  Department  pro- 
vided that  the  subjects  are  of  the 
Higher  Standard. 

NOTE. — A certificate  from  any  school  which  is  on  the  list  of  schools 
approved  by  any  University  or  Technical  College  of  recognized  standing 
in  the  United  States  will  be  accepted  as  equivalent  to  matriculation  exam- 
ination pro  tanto. 


26 

III.— ADMISSION  TO  ADVANCED  STANDING 

A student  who  transfers  to  Queen’s  University  from  another  educational 
institution  will  be  admitted  to  the  year  for  which  he  is  qualified.  Ordinarily 
such  a student  must  spend  a minimum  of  two  years  in  residence  in  order 
to  obtain  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  Since  laboratory  accommodation  is 
limited,  it  may  be  necessary  to  refuse  admission  to  certain  Courses. 

A candidate  for  advanced  standing  must  submit  with  his  application  a 
Calendar  of  the  institution  in  which  he  has  studied,  together  with  an  official 
statement  of  the  subjects  passed  and  the  standing  made. 

IV.— ADMISSION  OF  SPECIAL  STUDENTS 

Students  not  proceeding  to  a degree  may  take  any  classes  for  which 
they  are  prepared.  The  work  in  all  classes  is  so  arranged  that  those  who 
wish  to  study,  either  for  scientific  interest  or  to  improve  their  qualifications 
for  any  particular  position,  may  profitably  pursue  their  studies  in  the  Faculty 
of  Applied  Science. 

The  Faculty  will  admit  under  this  paragraph,  as  special  students,  only 
such  candidates  as  are  fitted  to  take  part  of  the  classes  of  a course.  It  will 
not  admit  as  special  students  those  whom,  on  account  of  previous  poor  re- 
cords, it  is  no  longer  desirable  to  retain  as  regular  students. 

Prospective  students  under  this  section  should  correspond  with  the  Dean 
of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  in  regard  to  the  arrangement  of  such  a 
course. 


MEDALS,  FELLOWSHIPS,  SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  PRIZES 

I.— MEDALS 

Governor-Generars  Medal 

The  Governor-General’s  Medal  is  awarded  each  year  to  the  student  of  the 
graduating  class  who  has  made  the  highest  standing  throughout  the  four  years 
of  his  Course.  A student  who  has  lost  a year  is  not  eligible.  Grades  obtained 
on  supplemental  examinations  will  not  be  included  in  determining  the  candidate’s 
standing. 

Departmental  Medals 

A medal  may  be  awarded  annually  in  each  department  to  the  student  of 
the  graduating  class  who  has  made  the  highest  average  standing  in  all  subjects 
of  the  third  and  fourth  years,  and  secured  honour  standing  in  his  fourth  year. 

II.— GRADUATE  FELLOWSHIPS  AND  SCHOLARSHIPS 

FELLOWSHIPS  CONTROLLED  BY  THE  UNIVERSITY 

Science  Research  Fellowships 

1.  Applications  for  Fellowships  will  be  received  by  the  Registrar  up  to 
May  1st.  If  no  appointment  is  made  by  that  date  further  applications  will  be 
received  up  to  September  1st. 


27 


2.  Fellows  will  be  selected  and  the  character  of  their  work  will  be 
determined  by  the  Department  concerned  in  consultation  with  the  Dean.  The 
University  reserves  the  right  to  dismiss  a Fellow  whose  work  is  not  satis- 
factory. 

3.  A student  appointed  to  a Fellowship  must  carry  on  research  work 
for  the  whole  session  and  embody  the  results  in  a thesis.  The  research  may 
take  the  form  either  of  independent  investigation  or  of  assistance  in  an  in- 
vestigation carried  on  by  some  department.  The  Fellow  may  be  required  to 
undertake  tutorial  work  not  to  exceed  six  hours  a week. 

4.  The  income  of  the  Fellowship  will  be  paid  in  five  instalments,  of 
which  the  last  will  be  paid  only  after  the  thesis  has  been  accepted.  A candi- 
date for  degree  at  the  May  Convocation  must  submit  his  thesis  by  April  20. 
Except  by  special  permission,  other  Fellows  must  submit  their  theses  not  later 
than  September  20. 

The  C.I.L.  Fellowship  in  Chemistry  and  Chemical  Engineering 

Value  $750.  Founded  by  the  Canadian  Industries  Limited  for  research  in 
Chemistry  or  Chemical  Engineering.  This  is  a Resident  Fellowship  open  to 
graduates  of  Queen’s  or  other  Universities.  Applications  must  be  received 
by  the  Registrar  by  April  1st. 

The  Milton  Hersey  Fellowship  in  Chemistry 

1 his  Fellowship  of  the  annual  value  of  $400,  has  been  endowed  by 
M^ilton  L.  Hersey,  M.Sc.,  LL.D.,  of  Montreal.  It  is  open  to  graduates  of 
all  universities  and  technical  colleges. 

The  holder  of  this  Fellowship  shall  carry  on  research  work  for  the  whole 
session  and  embody  the  results  in  a thesis.  The  research  may  take  the  form 
either  of  independent  investigation  or  of  assistance  in  an  investigation  carried 
on  by  some  department.  The  Fellow  may  be  required  to  undertake  tutorial 
work  not  to  exceed  six  hours  a week. 

Applications  for  Fellowships  will  be  received  by  the  Registrar  up  to  May 
1st.  If  no  appointment  is  made  by  that  date,  further  applications  will  be 
received  up  to  September  1st. 

William  Neish  Fellowship  in  Chemistry 

This  Fellowship  of  an  annual  value  of  $400  has  been  endowed  by  Ada 
E.  Neish  and  Laura  Neish  Black  of  Kingston.  It  is  open  to  graduate  students 
in  Chemistry  from  Queen’s  or  another  University. 

The  holder  of  this  Fellowship  shall  carry  on  research  work  at  Queen’s 
for  the  whole  session  under  the  direction  of  some  member  of  the  Department 
of  Chemistry  and  embody  the  results  in  a thesis.  The  Fellow  shall  be  required 
to  give  laboratory  instruction  or  its  equivalent  not  to  exceed  nine  hours  a week. 


28 


Inco  Scholarship 

I 

The  International  Nickel  Company  of  Canada  has  established  a Scholar- 
ship of  the  value  of  $500  for  graduate  work  in  Chemistry,  Chemical  Engineer- 
ing, Mining,  Metallurgy,  Geology  and  Mineralogy,  to  be  awarded  to  a student 
holding  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree,  who  has  made  consistently  high 
standing  throughout  the  four  years  of  his  undergraduate  Course. 

Applications  must  be  submitted  by  April  1st  each  year. 

J.  B.  Tyrrell  Scholarship  in  Economic  Geology 

Founded  by  J.  B.  Tyrrell,  LL.D.,  of  Toronto. 

Value  dependent  on  dividends  received.  This  Scholarship  will  be  awarded 
to  a graduate  student  who  is  working  in  the  field  of  Economic  Geology. 

Applications  must  be  submitted  by  April  1st  each  year. 

The  Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Fellowships 

Under  the  will  of  the  late  Reuben  Wells  Leonard  provision  was  made  for 
four  Fellowships  of  the  value  of  $500  to  be  awarded  to  graduates  of  the  Uni- 
versity “who  are  willing  and  qualified  to  undertake  independent  research  work 
in  the  interests  of  higher  culture”.  These  Fellowships  are  tenable  only  by 
students  in  attendance  at  Queen’s. 

Applicaticm  must  be  made  to  the  Registrar  not  later  than  April  1st 

The  Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Fellowships 

Fellowships  of  varying  amounts  will  be  available  during  session  1943-44 
for  Queen’s  graduates  continuing  their  work  at  Queen’s  University.  Applica- 
tion for  these  Fellowships  must  be  received  by  April  1. 

Postgraduate  Scholarship  in  Chemical  Engineering 

This  Scholarship  established  by  a friend  of  the  University,  and  of  the  .value 
of  $300  is  to  be  awarded  on  recommendation  of  the  Department  of  Chemical 
Engineering  and  the  Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  to  a student  at 
the  end  of  the  fourth  year  of  the  Chemical  Engineering  course  on  the  basis  of 
ability,  academic  record,  character  and  personal  qualifications. 

The  purpose  of  this  Scholarship  is  to  enable  a student  to  devote  a year 
to  postgraduate  study,  attending  a number  of  lecture  courses,  and  devoting  part 
of  his  time  to  research  work. 

FELLOWSHIPS  NOT  CONTROLLED  BY  THE  UNIVERSITY 

Royal  Society  of  Canada  Fellowships 

Ten  annual  fellowships  to  be  known  as  the  Royal  Society  of  Canada 
Fellowships,  each  of  $1500,  and  open  cm  equal  terms  to  men  and  women, 


29 


have  been  endowed  through  the  generosity  of  the  Carnegie  Corporation.  They 
are  tenable  at  institutions  of  learning  or  research,  save  in  exceptional  circum- 
stances outside  of  Canada,  and  are  available  for  advanced  research  in  Litera- 
ture, History,  Anthropology,  Sociology,  Political  Economy,  or  allied  subjects, 
in  French  or  English;  and  in  Mathematics,  Chemistry,  Physics,  Geolog^y, 
Biology,  or  subjects  associated  with  any  of  these  sciences. 

An  applicant  for  a Fellowship  should  be  a graduate  of  a Canadian 
university  or  college,  or  should  have  received  an  equivalent  training  in  a 
Canadian  institution  possessing  adequate  facilities  in  his  particular  subject, 
and,  except  in  special  cases,  should  have  the  Master’s  degree  or  its  equivalent, 
or,  preferably,  have  completed  one  or  more  year’s  work  beyond  that  degree. 

Applications,  addressed  to  “The  Secretary,  Royal  Society  of  Canada 
Fellowships  Board,  Ottawa,  Canada,”  should  contain  particulars  of  the 
candidate’s  age  and  place  of  birth,  a full  statement  of  his  academic  career, 
with  copies  of  original  papers  and  any  other  evidence  of  his  ability  or 
originality  in  his  chosen  field;  also  an  indication  of  the  particular  work  he 
proposes  to  undertake,  at  what  institution,  and  under  whose  direction;  and 
should  be  supported  by  recommendations  from  the  head  of  the  department 
of  the  institution  in  which  the  candidate  has  studied,  and  from  the  instructors 
under  whom  he  has  chiefly  worked.  All  these  papers  should  be  in  duplicate. 

Further  particulars  may  be  obtained  from  the  Registrar. 

The  following  graduates  of  Queen’s  have  held  these  Fellowships : 

1932-33,  Christine  Rice;  1932-33,  H.  W.  Fairbairn;  1933-34,  G.  A.  Har- 
court;  1936-37,  W.  C Giissow;  1937-38,  A.  W.  Currie;  1938-39,  J.  S.  Marshall; 
1941-42,  J.  Dingwall;  1942-43,  J.  L.  Evans. 

These  fellowships  will  not  be  awarded  again  until  after  the  war. 

Exhibition  of  1851  Science  Research  Scholarship. 

This  scholarship,  of  the  annual  value  of  £250  sterling,  is  awarded  by  Her 
Majesty’s  Commissioners  for  the  Exhibition  of  1851  to  students  who  have 
given  evidence  of  capacity  for  original  research,  and  are  under  26  years 
of  age.  A given  number  of  scholarships  are  awarded  annually  to  students 
in  Canada  recommended  by  the  Universities  approved  by  the  Commissioners. 

The  nominee  must  be  a British  subject,  must  have  been  a bona  fide 
student  of  science  for  three  years,  must  have  been  a student  of  the  Univer- 
sity for  a full  year  immediately  before  his  nomination,  must  be  a student  of 
the  University  at  the  time  of  his  nomination,  and  must  pledge  himself  not 
to  hold  any  position  of  emolument  whilst  holding  the  scholarship  without 
special  permission  from  the  Commissioners.  He  is  recommended  to  the 
Commissioners  by  the  Senate  of  the  University.  The  scholarship  will  be 
tenable  ordinarily  for  two  years  and  in  cases  of  exceptional  merit  for  three 
years.  The  scholar  will,  in  the  absence  of  special  circumstances,  be  required 


30 


to  proceed  to  a country  other  than  that  in  which  he  received  his  scientific 
training,  and  there  pursue  some  investigation  likely  to  promote  technical  in- 
dustries or  scientific  culture.  The  particular  investigation  the  student  pro- 
poses to  pursue  must  be  stated  before  a scholarship  can  be  awarded. 

Students  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  are  eligible  for  this  scholarship. 

Recommendations  must  be  received  at  the  office  of  the  Commissioners 
before  June  1. 

The  following  Science  Research  scholars  have  been  appointed  from 
Queen’s  University: 

1894,  N.  R.  Carmichael;  1896,  T.  L.  Walker;  1898,  F.  J.  Pope;  1900, 
W.  C.  Baker;  1901,  C.  W.  Dickson;  1904,  C.  W.  Knight;  1905,  F.  H. 
McDougall;  1907,  C.  Laidlaw;  1909,  N.  L.  Bowen;  1911,  W.  A.  Bell;  1913, 
J.  R.  Tuttle;  1915,  R.  C.  Cantelo;  1921,  D.  G.  H.  Wright;  1924,  R.  H.  F. 
Manske;  1924,  D.  C.  Rose;  1926,  H.  M.  Cave;  1928,  B.  W.  Sargent;  1931, 
E.  H.  Charlesworth ; 1932,  G.  S.  Farnham ; 1932,  W.  J.  Henderson ; 1934, 
W.  E.  Bennett;  1935,  J.  S.  Marshall;  1937,  A.  G.  Ward. 

This  Scholarship  will  not  be  awarded  again  until  after  the  war. 

The  Rhodes  Scholarship 

1.  General  Regulations : — A Rhodes  Scholarship  is  tenable  at  the 
University  of  Oxford  and  may  be  held  for  three  years.  Since,  however, 
the  majority  of  Rhodes  Scholars  obtain  standing  which  enables  them  to  take 
a degree  in  two  years,  appointments  are  made  for  two  years  in  the  first 
instance,  and  a Rhodes  Scholar  who  may  wish  to  remain  for  a third  year 
will  be  expected  to  present  a definite  plan  of  study  for  that  period  satisfactory 
to  his  College  and  to  the  Rhodes  Trustees. 

Rhodes  Scholars  may  be  allowed,  if  the  conditions  are  approved  by  their 
own  College  and  by  the  Oxford  Secretary  to  the  Rhodes  Trustees,  either  to 
postpone  their  third  year,  returning  to  Oxford  for  it  after  a period  of  work 
in  their  own  countries,  or  may  spend  their  third  year  in  postgraduate  work 
at  any  university  of  Great  Britain,  and  in  special  cases  at  any  university  on 
the  continent  of  Europe,  the  overseas  dominions,  or  in  the  United  States,  but 
not  in  the  country  of  their  origin. 

The  stipend  of  a Rhodes  Scholar  is  fixed  at  £400  per  year.  At  most 
Colleges,  and  for  most  men,  this  sum  is  not  sufficient  to  meet  a Rhodes 
Scholar’s  necessary  expenses  for  Term-time  and  Vacations,  and  Scholars 
who  can  afford  to  supplement  it  by  £50  per  year  from  their  own  resources 
will  find  it  advantageous  to  do  so. 

2.  Conditions  of  Eligibility : — A candidate  to  be  eligible  must : 

1.  Be  a British  subject,  with  at  least  five  years’  domicile  in  Canada,  and 
unmarried.  He  must  have  passed  his  nineteenth  year,  but  not  have  passed 
his  twenty-fifth  birthday  on  October  1st  of  the  year  for  which  he  is  elected. 


31 

!'  -J--' 

2.  Have  reached  such  a stage  in  his  course  at  one  of  the  Universities  in 
Canada  that  he  will  have  completed  at  least  two  years  at  the  university  in 
question  by  October  1st  of  the  year  for  which  he  is  elected. 

Candidates  may  apply  either  for  the  province  in  which  they  have  their 
ordinary  private  domicile,  home  or  residence,  or  for  any  province  in  which 
they  have  received  at  least  two  years  of  their  college  education  before  applying. 

In  that  section  of  the  Will  in  which  he  defined  the  general  type  of 
scholar  he  desired,  Mr.  Rhodes  wrote  as  follows : 

“My  desire  being  that  the  students  who  shall  be  elected  to  the  scholarships 
shall  not  be  merely  bookworms,  I direct  that  in  the  election  of  a student  to  a 
Scholarship  regard  shall  be  had  to: 

1.  his  literary  and  scholastic  attainments ; 

2.  his  fondness  for  and  success  in  manly  outdoor  sports  such  as  cricket, 
football  and  the  like; 

3.  his  qualities  of  manhood,  truth,  courage,  devotion  to  duty,  sympathy 
for  and  protection  of  the  weak,  kindliness,  unselfishness  and  fellowship,  and 

4.  his  exhibitions  during  school  days  of  moral  force  of  character  and  oi 
instincts  to  lead  and  to  take  an  interest  in  his  schoolmates  for  those  latter 
attributes  will  be  likely  in  after  life  to  guide  him  to  esteem  the  performance 
of  public  duty  his  highest  aim,” 

Full  particulars  may  be  obtained  from  D.  R.  Michener,  372  Bay  St., 
Toronto,  Secretary  of  the  Selection  Committee  for  the  Province  of  Ontario, 
Two  Scholarships  may  be  awarded  annually  in  the  provinces  of  Quebec  and 
Ontario  if  qualified  candidates  appear. 

Each  candidate  for  a Scholarship  is  required  tO'  make  application  to  the 
Secretary  of  the  Committee  of  Selection  of  the  Province  in  which  he  wishes 
to  compete,  not  later  than  November  10th,  Application  forms  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Registrar’s  Office. 

The  following  graduates  of  Queen’s  University  have  been  awarded  Rhodes 
Scholarships : 

1905,  J.  M.  Macdonnell ; 1906,  A.  G.  Cameron ; 1907,  N.  S.  Macdonnell ; 
1911,  S,  Scott;  1912,  H.  S.  Smith;  1914,  A.  G.  Gumming;  1919,  H.  R.  Mac- 
Callum;  1920,  K.  E.  Taylor;  1922,  A.  D.  Winspear;  1925,  L.  F.  Kindle; 
1926,  D,  A.  Skelton ; 1936,  J.  G.  Davoud ; 1937,  G.  M.  Brown ; 1938,  G.  P. 
Grant;  1941,  G.  S.  Bowell ; 1941,  R.  S.  Rettie. 

This  Scholarship  is  not  controlled  by  the  University. 

III.— SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  PRIZES 

Scholarships  are  tenable  in  the  session  following  award.  By  special 
permission  of  Faculty,  the  recipient  of  a Scholarship,  available  in  the  third 
and  fourth  years  of  his  course,  may  postpone  the  use  of  the  Scholarship  for 


32 


one  year  in  order  to  engage  in  practical  work  connected  with  his  chosen 
professicai. 

Scholarships  and  prizes  are  awarded  on  the  standing  obtained  by  a student 
on  a regular  year  of  work.  A student  who  is  repeating  his  year,  or  who 
fails  in  a class  in,  the  current  year  is  not  eligible. 

An  undergraduate  student  may  not  hold  more  than  two  Faculty  Scholar- 
ships, or  receive  more  than  $300  in  scholarship  money  in  any  one  year. 

These  Scholarships  may  he  held  only  by  students  who  register  tn  the 
Faculty  of  Applied  Science  in  the  year  following  the  award. 

SCHOLARSHIPS  FOR  AWARD  IN  FIRST  YEAR 
University  Scholarships* 

Some  Scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100,  and  some  of  the  value  of  $75, 
will  be  awarded  to  students  in  the  first  year,  on  the  basis  of  standing  obtained 
in  all,  subjects  having  examinations,  namely,  English,  Mathematics,  Chemistry, 
Physics,  and  Surveying. 

William  Coombs  Baker  Memorial  Prize 

A prize  of  the  value  of  about  $22  in  books  selected  from  a list  approved 
by  the  Department  of  Physics.  This  prize  has  been  founded  by  graduates  in 
memory  of  William  Coombs  Baker,  formerly  the  Robert  Waddell  Professor 
of  Experimental  Physics  at  Queen’s  University.  Awarded  annually  to  the 
student  making  the  highest  standing  in  Physics  I. 

Robert  Bruce  Scholarships 

Under  provisions  of  the  will  of  the  late  Robert  Bruce  of  Quebec  the 
University  has  established  a Scholarship  worth  about  $70  in  each  of  the 
Faculties  of  Arts,  Applied  Science,  and  Medicine.  Until  1948  the  award  is 
limited  to  students  of  Scottish  extraction. 

The  Scholarship  in  each  Faculty  will  be  awarded  at  the  end  of  the  first 
year  to  the  student  who  has  made  the  highest  standing  on  the  regular  exam- 
inations of  that  year.  One  third  of  the  value  of  each  scholarship  will  be 
paid  to  the  winner  in  each  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  years  of  his 
Course  provided  that  he  is  in  attendance  in  the  Faculty  in  which  the  award 
was  made. 

The  N.  F.  Dupuis  Scholarship 

Value  $50.  Founded  by  the  graduates  as  a mark  of  their  appreciation 
of  the  long  and  effective  services  of  Dr.  N.  F.  Dupuis,  as  Dean  of  the 
Faculty  of  Applied  Science  and  Professor  of  Mathematics.  Awarded  to  the 
student  who  makes  the  highest  marks  in  Mathematics  of  the  first  year  at 
the  April  Examinations. 

The  Dr.  William  Moffat  Scholarship 

Value  $20.  Founded  by  Dr.  William  Moffat,  of  Utica,  N.Y.  Awarded 
annually  to  the  student  making  the  highest  standing  in  first  year  chemistry. 
The  award  will  be  made  on  combined  results  of  class  work  and  examination. 

* One  of  these  scholarships  is  maintained  by  the  Class  of  Science  ’41  in  memory 

of  Mr.  J.  O.  Watts,  lecturer  in  the  Department  of  Mathematics,  1931-1941. 


33 


Roberta  McCxdloch  Scholarships  in  English 

Founded  by  the  late  Andrew  McCulloch,  M.A.,  of  Thorold. 

1.  Value  $40:  awarded  annually  to  the  student  standing  first  in  Science 
English. 

2.  Value  $30:  awarded  annually  to  the  student  standing  second  in  Science 
English. 

William  Wallace  Near  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Established  under  provisions  of  the  will  of  the  late  William 
Wallace  Near  of  Toronto.  To  be  awarded  to  the  student  in  the  first  year  who 
has  the  highest  average  on  all  the  work  of  the  year. 

Pipe  Band  Scholarship 

Value  $25.  Maintained  by  the  Queen’s  University  Pipe  Band.  Awarded 
annually  to  the  best  piper  among  first  year  students  in  all  faculties  on  the 
basis  of  a piping  contest. 

SCHOLARSHIPS  FOR  AWARD  IN  SECOND  YEAR 
* University  Scholarships* 

A number  of  scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100  each  will  be  awarded  m 
Sections  ABCDM  and  EFG  in  proportion  to  the  registration  in  these  Sections, 
on  the  basis  of  the  returns  in  all  subjects  in  which  examinations  are  written, 
that  is,  in  all  subjects  except  Drawing  and  Shop  Work. 

The  Alexander  Macphail  Scholarship 
Value  $100.  Founded  by  the  members  of  Science  T4.  Awarded  to  a 
student  in  Section  EFG  on  the  basis  of  the  returns  in  all  subjects  in  which 
examinations  are  written. 

The  W.  P.  Wilgar  Memorial  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Founded  by  members  of  the  Qasses  of  Science  ’03-’16  and 
other  friends  of  the  late  Professor  W.  P.  Wilgar,  B.Sc.  ’03.  Awarded  to 
a student  in  Section  EFG  on  the  basis  of  the  returns  in  all  subjects ' in 
which  examinations  are  written. 

Scholarship  of  the  Association  of  Professional  Engineers,  No.  I 

Value  $100.  Founded  by  the  Association  of  Professional  Engineers  of 
Ontario.  Awarded  in  alternate  years  to  the  student  in  Courses  ABCDM 
and  EFG  who  makes  the  highest  average  on  the  work  of  the  second  year. 
To  be  awarded  to  a student  in  EFG  in  1943-44. 

Scholarship  of  the  Association  of  Professional  Engineers,  No.  II 

Value  $75.  Awarded  by  the  Association  of  Professional  Engineers  of 
Ontario.  Awarded  in  alternate  years  to  the  student  in  Courses  ABCDM  and 
EFG  who  makes  the  highest  average  on  the  work  of  the  second  year.  To  be 
awarded  to  a student  in  ABCDM  in  1943-44. 

Mowat  Scholarship 

Value  $40.  Founded  by  the  late  John  McDonald  Mowat,  B.A.,  '95. 
Awarded  to  the  student  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  who  obtains  the 
highest  average  on  the  examinations  at  the  end  of  the  second  year. 

* One  of  these  scholarships  is  maintained  by  the  Class  of  Science  ’42  in  memory 
of  one  of  their  members,  Harry  G.  Beaty,  who  was  killed  on  active  service 
on  July  30th,  1941 ; one  is  maintained  by  the  Class  of  Science  ’43  in  memory 
of  one  of  their  members,  Donald  J.  Sterling,  who  was  killed  on  active 
service  on  July  7th,  1942. 


34 


William  Wallace  Near  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Established  under  the  provisions  of  the  will  of  the  late 
William  Wallace  Near  of  Toronto.  To  be  awarded  to  the  student  in  the 
second  year  who  has  the  highest  average  on  all  the  work  of  the  year. 

Dr.  William  H.  Nichols  Scholarship  in  Chemistry 

Founded  by  Dr.  William  H.  Nichols. 

A Scholarship  of  the  value  of  $40  will  be  awarded  to  the  student  obtaining 
the  highest  marks  during  the  year  in  Qualitative  Analysis  I. 

The  P.  D.  Ross  Scholarships 

Two  scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100  and  $50  respectively.  These 
scholarships  are  awarded  annually  to  the  students  obtaining  highest  and  second 
highest  standing  in  the  subjects  common  to  the  courses  of  the  second  year. 

Science  *11  Scholarship 

Value  $20.  Awarded  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  to  the  student 
with  the  highest  average  standing  in  the  term  work  and  examinations  of  the 
second  year. 

SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  PRIZES  FOR  AWARD  IN  THIRD  YEAR 

The  Joseph  Abramsky  Scholarship  in  Mechanical  Engineering 

Value  $50.  Founded  by  his  sons  in  memory  of  the  late  Joseph  Abramsky. 
Awarded  to  the  student  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  who  obtains  highest 
standing  in  Mechanical  Engineering  during  his  third  year. 

J.  J.  Denny  Memorial  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Founded  by  members  of  the  Class  of  Science  ’03-’06  and 
other  friends  of  the  late  James  J.  Denny,  M.Sc.  *21.  To  be  awarded  upon 
entrance  to  the  third  year  of  the  Course  in  Mining  or  Metallurgy,  to  the 
student,  who,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science,  is  most 
worthy  of  the  award. 

The  Manley  B.  Baker  Scholarships  in  Geology 

Founded  by  Agnes  Moreland  Baker.  Two  Scholarships  of  the  value  of 
$125  and  $75  will  be  awarded  annually  to  the  students  in  the  Faculties  of 
Applied  Science  or  Arts  obtaining  highest  and  second  highest  standing  in  the 
first  three  courses  in  Geology.  These  may  include  Mineralogy  10a  (Arts)  or 
Mineralogy  III  (Science).  If  two  students  are  equal  preference  will  be  given 
to  the  one  whose  need  is  greater. 

The  Kenneth  B.  Carruthers  Scholarships  in  Mining  and  Metallurgy 

Value  $110  each.  Founded  in  memory  of  Major  Kenneth  B.  Carruthers, 
B.Sc.,  who  was  killed  at  Passchendaele  in  October,  1917.  Two  scholarships 
are  awarded  annually  on  the  results  of  third  year  work,  one  to  the  student 
in  Mining  Engineering  (Course  A)  and  the  other  to  the  student  in  Metallurgical 
Engineering  (Course  M)  making  the  highest  standing  on  the  whole  year’s 
work. 


35 


Isaac  Cohen  Scholarship  in  Electrical  Engineering 
Value  $100.  Awarded  to  the  student  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science 
who  has  obtained  at  the  end  of  his  third  year  the  highest  standing  in  the 
following  subjects : Hydraulics  I,  Mechanical  Engineering  I,  Electrical  Engi- 
neering II  and  III,  Physics  V,  and  Mathematics  VII. 

Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Penultimate  Year  Scholarships 
One  Scholarship  of  the  value  of  $300  and  one  of  the  value  of  $200. 
Awarded  at  the  end  of  the  penultimate  year  to  the  students  obtaining  highest 
and  second  highest  standing  respectively.  The  winning  students  must  be 
in  residence  the  year  following  the  award. 

Susan  Near  Scholarships 

Five  scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100  each.  Established  under  the 
provisions  of  the  will  of  the  late  Susan  Near  of  Toronto.  To  be 
awarded  at  the  end  of  the  third  year  by  Departments  in  proportion  to  the 
number  of  students  in  each  Department.  The  exact  distribution  of  scholar- 
ships will  be  announced  at  the  beginning  of  each  session.  Eligibility  for  one 
of  these  scholarships  requires  an  average  of  at  least  66%  on  the  work  of 
the  third  year  with  no  failures. 

William  Wallace  Near  Scholarships 
Three  scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100  each.  Established  under  the  pro- 
visions of  the  will  of  the  late  William  Wallace  Near  of  Toronto.  To  be 
awarded  at  the  end  of  the  third  year  to  the  best  students  in  each  of  the  three 
Courses,  Chemistry,  Chemical  Engineering,  and  Civil  Engineering.  Eligibility 
for  one  of  these  scholarships  requires  an  average  of  at  least  66%  on  the  work 
of  the  third  year  with  no  failures. 

Scholarships  of  the  Association  of  Professional  Engineers 
Three  scholarships  of  the  value  of  $100,  $75,  and  $50.  Founded  by  the 
Association  of  Professional  Engineers  of  Ontario.  Awarded  to  students  in 
any  branch  of  engineering  with  the  highest  average  on  the  examinations  of 
the  third  year. 

Engineering  Institute  of  Canada  Prize 
Value  $25.  Awarded  by  the  Engineering  Institute  of  Canada  to  the 
student  in  any  department  of  engineering,  who,  in  the  year  prior  to  his 
graduating  year,  has  proved  himself  most  deserving,  as  disclosed  by  the 
examination  results  of  the  year  in  combination  with  his  activities  in  the 
students’  engineering  organization,  or  with  a local  branch  of  a recognized 
engineering  society. 

Fifth  Field  Company  Scholarship 

Value  $40.  The  Fifth  Field  Company  Scholarship  is  provided  by  funds  accumu- 
lated for  this  purpose  by  tlie  officers,  N.CO.’s  and  sappers  of  that  unit  since 
the  war,  and  is  given  to  the  student  of  the  third  year  in  courses  E,  F or  G who 
makes  the  highest  standing  in  Hydraulic  Engineering  I. 

PRIZES  FOR  AWARD  IN  FOURTH  YEAR 
The  L.  M.  Arkley  Prize 

Value  $40.  This  is  a prize  founded  by  the  Scots  Run  Fuel  Corporation  of 
Morgantown,  W.  Va.,  in  recognition  of  Professor  Arkley’s  interest  in  the 


36 


proper  methods  of  purchasing,  analyzing  and  burning  coal.  To  be  awarded  to 
the  fourth  year  student  in  Mechanical  Engineering  who  gives  evidence  that 
he  understands  the  sampling  and  analyzing  of  coal  and  submits,  before  April 
1st  of  each  year,  the  best  paper  on  the  phase  of  the  subject  assigned. 

The  E.  T.  Sterne  Prize  in  Chemical  Engineering 

Value  $25.  To  be  awarded  to  a student  in  Chemical  Engineering  after  finish- 
ing his  third  year,  for  the  best  essay  describing  his  summer’s  work.  Essays  to 
be  handed  in  by  December  31st.  The  donor  desires  that  emphasis  be  laid  on  a 
discussion  of  the  theoretical  principles  in  Chemistry  and  Physics  underlying 
any  one  of  the  manufacturing  processes  described. 

GENERAL  SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  PRIZES 
The  Alexander  MacLachlan  Peace  Prize 

The  Alexander  MacLachlan  Peace  Prize  has  been  established  by  the 
MacLachlan  family  in  memory  of  Alexander  MacLachlan,  former  President 
of  International  College,  Smyrna,  who  throughout  his  life  worked  for  a 
better  understanding  among  nations. 

Value  $30.  Awarded  annually  for  the  best  essay  of  3,000  words  on  the 
subject  Promotion  of  Enduring  World  Peace.  The  prize  is  open  to  all 
undergraduates  of  Queen’s  University,  both  intramural  and  extramural.  The 
essay  must  be  clearly  written  or  typewritten,  and  must  be  sent  in  to  the 

Registrar’s  Office  on  or  before  March  1st,  accompanied  by  a statement 

signed  by  the  candidate  that  the  essay  is  the  result  of  his  own  reading, 
thinking,  and  discussion  and  that  he  has  not  been  assisted  by  other  students 
in  writing  it 

B’nai  B’rith  Kingston,  Bursary 

Value  $50.  Founded  by  the  B’nai  B’rith  Lodge  of  Kingston. 

This  Bursary  will  be  awarded  annually  to  a student  of  promising  ability 

but  straitened  circumstances.  The  award  will  be  made  on  the  basis  of  the 

April  examinations.  Applications  will  be  received  by  the  Registrar  up  until 
April  1 of  each  year. 

Prizes  of  The  Canadian  Institute  of  Mining  and  Metallurgy 

Premiums  and  prizes  at  the  discretion  of  the  Council  may  be  g^iven 
annually  for  papers  read  by  student-members  of  the  Institute  and  affiliated 
students  during  the  year.  Any  such  award  will  be  made  by  the  Council 
within  three  months  after  the  Annual  Meeting. 

Engineering  Society  Prizes 

The  Engineering  Society  of  Queen’s  University  offers  two  prizes  of 
$15.00  and  $10.00  for  the  two  best  papers  on  scientific  subjects,  by  members 
of  the  society.  These  papers  must  be  read  before  the  society,  and  five  papers, 
at  least,  must  be  presented  before  the  prizes  will  be  awarded.  These  prizes 
are  open  for  competition  to  all  students  of  Engineering. 

Khaki  University  and  Y.M.C.A.  Memorial  Fund 

This  fund  is  part  of  a sum,  left  from  the  Khaki  University  after  the  War, 
which  was  divided  among  the  Canadian  Universities. 

The  interest,  amounting  to  $240,  will  be  used  to  award  one  or  more 
scholarships  open  to  undergraduate  students  in  any  Faculty.  In  awarding  these 


37 


scholarships  the  need  as  well  as  the  standing  of  applicants  will  be  considered 
and  preference  will  be  given  to  returned  men,  or  sons  or  daughters  of  soldiers 
of  the  Great  War.  Applications  will  be  received  by  the  Registrar  up  to 
April  1st. 

Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Special  Scholarships 

Special  Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Scholarships  for  merit  and  need  will  be 
awarded  in  varying  amounts  to  students  of  promising  ability -but  straitened 
circumstances.  The  awards  will  be  made  on  a loan  or  service  basis. 

George  J.  MacKay  Prize  in  Metallurgy 

Value  $25.  A prize  given  by  the  Mining  and  Metallurgical  Society  of 
Queen’s  University  in  memory  of  Professor  George  J.  MacKay,  formerly 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Metallurgy  at  Queen’s  University.  This  prize 
will  be  awarded  annually  for  seven  years  to  the  student  in  any  year  who 
submits,  by  February  1st,  the  best  essay  dealing  with  some  branch  of 
Metallurgy. 

The  A.  E.  Segsworth  Prize. 

Value  $40.  This  is  a prize  founded  by  R.  F.  Segsworth,  Esq.,  Toronto, 
in  memory  of  his  brother,  A.  E.  Segsworth,  B.A.,  Ph.D.  The  prize  is  awarded 
to  the  student  of  any  year  who  hands  in  before  December  1st  the  best  account 
of  his  previous  summer’s  experience  in  practical  underground  mining. 

The  O.  M.  Montgomery  Memorial  Fund 

Established  by  the  Aluminum  Company  of  Canada  in  memory  of  Mr. 
O.  M.  Montgomery,  who  graduated  from  Queen’s  University  in  Electrical 
Engineering  in  1905.  This  Fund  will  be  used  to  provide  bursaries  for  worthy 
students  in  need  of  financial  help.  It  will  be  administered  by  a Committee 
consisting  of  the  Principal,  the  Vice-Principal,  the  Registrar,  and  a repre- 
sentative  of  the  Aluminum  Company.  Awards  may  be  made  in  any  Faculty, 
and  may  only  be  regarded  as  gifts  at  the  discretion  of  the  Committee  when 
made  to  sons  or  daughters  of  employees  of  the  Aluminum  Company.  Other- 
v/ise  repayment  is  expected  in  one  or  both  of  the  various  ways : 

(1)  By  service  to  the  University  if  the  beneficiary  has  time  and  is  qualified 
for  the  work  available.  Such  service  shall  be  assistance  in  a department, 
or  office,  or  library,  or  laboratory,  or  some  other  comparable  employ- 
ment. 

(2)  By  return  in  cash  of  the  sum  granted,  or  of  the  part  not  worked  out. 
In  such  case  the  award  is  regarded  as  a loan  without  interest,  payable 
at  some  convenient  time  to  be  agreed  upon. 

Prize  of  Society  of  Chemical  Industry 
Value  $25.  The  Society  of  Chemical  Industry  offers  an  annual  prize  of 
$25  to  be  awarded  to  the  undergraduate  student  in  any  branch  of  chemistry 
who  presents  a paper  on  his  summer’s  work,  or  on  any  other  chemical  subject 
which  he  may  select.  This  paper  may  be  a thesis  or  paper  required  in  his 


38 


regular  work  of  the  year.  The  work  or  subject  treated  must  relate  to  some 
branch  of  chemistry.  Essays  must  be  submitted  not  later  than  February 
28th  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Ottawa  Section  of  the  Society  of  Chemical 
Industry.  The  successful  competitor  will  be  called  upon  to  read  his  winning 
essay  at  a regular  meeting  of  the  Ottawa  Section  of  the  Society. 

C.O.T.C.  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Maintained  by  the  regimental  funds  of  the  Queen’s  Univer- 
sity Contingent  of  the  Canadian  Officers’  Training  Corps.  To  be  awarded 
annually  to  a member  of  the  Contingent  who  is  not  an  officer.  The  selection 
will  be  made  by  the  Committee  on  Military  Education  from  a group  recom- 
mended by  the  Commanding  Officer.  In  determining  the  award  academic 
standing  will  be  taken  into  consideration. 

American  Legion  Scholarship 

Value  $100.  Established  by  Dr.  George  Hayunga  of  New  York. 

To  be  awarded  annually  to  a student  officer  of  the  Queen’s  University 
Contingent  of  the  Canadian  Officers’  Training  Corps,  the  selection  to  be  made 
by  the  Committee  on  Military  Education  from  a group  nominated  by  the 
Commanding  Officer.  In  determining  the  award  academic  standing  will  be 
taken  into  consideration.  If  the  winning  student  is  in  his  final  year  the 
scholarship  will  be  awarded  as  a prize. 

IV.— THE  DOUGLAS  TUTORSHIPS 

At  the  beginning  of  session  1910-1911  a gift  from  Dr.  James  Douglas,  of 
New  York,  led  to  the  establishment  of  a system  by  which  first  year  students 
were  tutored  by  men  selected  from  the  senior  years.  The  instruction  is  given  • 
out  of  class  hours  and  as  each  tutor  gives  his  whole  attention  to  not  more 
than  five  students  in  a period,  the  result  is  that  of  individual  teaching. 

REGULATIONS 

N.B. — Students  taking  the  regular  course  are  subject  to  all  Rules  and 
Regulations  immediatelv  upon  publication,  unless  otherwise  specified. 

1.  The  Faculty  may  at  any  time,  either  during  the  term,  or  after  the  close 
of  the  term,  require  any  student  to  withdraw  whose  conduct,  attendance,  work 
or  progress  is  deemed  unsatisfactory. 

2.  Registration. — Students  of  the  first  year  must  register  and  pay  fees  on 
the  day  before  the  opening  of  session.  Students  of  other  years  will  register 
and  pay  fees  on  the  first  day  of  session.  A student  who  fails  to  register 
at  the  prescribed  time  must  pay  an  additional  fee  of  $3.00  on  the  first  day 
with  $1.00  for  each  day  after  that  date,  unless  granted  exemption  by  the 
Faculty.  No  student  proceeding  to  a degree  will  be  allowed  to  register  after 
the  tenth  day  except  by  special  permission  of  the  Faculty.  P ermission  must 
be  obtained  before  the  opening  of  session. 

A student  entering  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  for  the  first  time 
must  submit  a certificate  showing  successful  vaccination. 


39 


3.  Attendance. — Students  are  required  to  attend  seven-eighths  of  their  class 
lectures  before  permission  will  be  given  to  write  the  examinations,  and  seven- 
eights  of  their  laboratory  hours  before  their  laboratory  work  will  be  certified. 
Exemption  from  this  rule  can  be  obtained  only  on  application  to  the  Faculty. 
All  absences  for  whatever  cause,  including  illness  or  late  registration,  must 
not  exceed  one-eighth  of  the  total  number  of  hours  of  work  required  in  any 
subject. 

4.  Courses. — All  students  must  take  the  subjects  required  in  their  courses 
in  conformity  with  the  calendars  of  their  year  of  attendance.  If  a student 
wishes  to  change  his  course,  he  must  first  obtain  the  permission  of  the  Faculty. 

5.  Sessional  Examinations. — Sessional  examinations  are  held  in  all  the 
subjects  prescribed  in  the  various  courses.  Fifty  per  cent,  is  required  in 
each  subject  for  pass  standing.  In  determining  a student’s  standing  at  a 
sessional  examination,  professors  are  empowered  to  take  into  account  his 
entire  class  record. 

Students  must  take  the  April  examinations  in  all  classes  in  which  they 
are  registered.  If  they  fail  in  more  than  four  classes  including  practical  classes 
in  which  no  written  examinations  are  held,  they  are  regarded  as  having  lost 
their  year. 

Students  who  fail  in  not  more  than  four  classes  may  write  supplemental 
examinations  in  the  following  September.  The  pass  mark  for  supplemental 
examinations  is  fifty-five  per  cent.  Students  who  fail  in  more  than  one  sup- 
plemental must  repeat  the  year.  Students  who  twice  fail  a year  are  required 
to  withdraw. 

A student  may  not  enter  the  third  year  until  he  has  passed  all  the 
examinations  of  the  first  year ; or  the  fourth  year  imtil  he  has  passed 
all  the  examinations  of  the  second  year.  Surveying  Field  Work  I is 
regarded  as  a second  year  class  and  comes  under  this  regulation  both  in 
respect  to  back  classes  and  to  admission  to  the  fourth  year.  A student  who 
is  debarred  from  entering  the  third  year  because  of  back  classes  in  the  first 
year,  or  from  entering  the  fourth  year  because  of  back  classes  in  the  second 
year,  will  not  be  allowed  to  write  subsequent  examinations  in  these  classes 
without  special  permission  from  the  Faculty. 

6.  Repeaters. — No  student  may  repeat  more  than  one  year  of  his  course 
except  by  special  permission  of  the  Faculty. 

7.  Mid-Term  Examinations. — Examinations  are  held  for  all  first  year 
students  about  the  middle  of  the  Autumn  term  in  the  regular  class  hours. 

8.  Mid-Session  Examinations. — Two  hour  examinations  in  all  subjects  are 
held  for  first  and  second  year  students  the  week  before  the  Christmas  vacation. 
A student  repeating  his  first  year  who  fails  in  four  or  more  of  these  examina- 
tions will  be  required  to  withdraw  from  the  faculty.  A student  repeating 


40 


his  second  year  who  fails  in  more  than  four  subjects  will  be  required  to  with- 
draw.  A proper  proportion  of  fees  paid  will  be  refunded.  The  attention  of 
all  students  is  called  to  Regulation  No.  1. 

Final  examinations  are  held  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  term  in  all 
subjects  in  which  the  instruction  terminates  at  that  time.  No  other  papers  are 
set  in  these  subjects  until  the  following  September. 

9.  Supplemental  Examinations. — Unless  specially  excused  by  the  Fac- 
ulty upon  application  received  at  the  Registrar’s  office  before  July  15th,  all 
students  who  fail  in  one  or  more  subjects  of  their  year  up  to  a total  of  four 
must  write  supplemental  examinations  in  all  such  subjects  in  September  of 
the  same  year,  as  a condition  of  admission  to  the  next  higher  year  of  their 
course. 

A student  who  has  one  failure  in  the  April  examinations  of  his  final  year 
must  write  off  this  class  by  the  following  April. 

A student  who  has  not  been  registered  in  the  session  in  which  he  wishes 
to  take  any  supplemental  examinations  must  pay  the  registration  fee  of 
$10  in  addition  to  the  examination  fee. 

Students  may  take  supplemental  examinations  at  approved  outside  centres  if 
application  is  made  by  July  15th  to  the  Registrar. 

10.  Penalty  For  Failure  To  Write. — If  a student  fails  to  write  an  exam- 
ination from  which  he  has  not  been  excused  by  the  Faculty,  a penalty  of  $10 
is  charged.  The  student  must  pay  in  addition  the  regular  supplemental 
examination  fee  of  $10.00. 

11.  Practical  Work. — Students  are  required  to  take  the  practical  courses 
given  in  the  calendar  unless  they  have  followed  similar  courses  in  other 
educational  institutions,  but  instructors  may,  at  their  discretion,  modify  the 
work  for  students  who  have  had  experience  in  the  field,  in  engin- 
eering works,  etc.  Such  students  may  be  set  immediately  at  more  advanced 
work  than  that  required  of  those  who  have  not  had  such  experience. 

12.  Excursions. — The  excursions  are  compulsory  for  all  fourth  year  stu- 
dents in  courses  A,  D,  M,  E,  F,  and  G,  and  third  year  students  in  courses  A,  B, 
and  M. 

13.  Vacation  Work. — Before  applying  for  a degree  a candidate  is  re- 
quired to  submit  certificates  of  having  had  at  least  six  months’  employment 
of  a nature,  that  in  the  opinion  of  the  departments  concerned,  shall  have 
given  him  suitable  experience  in  the  practice  of  his  profession. 

14.  Graduation. — Application  for  degree  must  be  made  before  March  15 
on  forms  which  may  be  obtained  from  the  Registrar. 


41 


GENERAL  INFORMATION 

EXPENSES 

The  following  statement  of  expenses  for  a session  in  normal  times  is 
compiled  from  information  obtained  from  students  who  have  kept  an  ac- 
count of  their  expenditures.  Personal  expenses  are  not  included  in  the 


estimate. 

Class,  Hospital,  Athletic  and  other  fees  $255.00  $255.00 

Board,  lodging  and  laundry  275.00  to  325.00 

Books  and  Stationery  35.00  to  45.00 

Excursions,  Field  and  Technical  15.00  to  45.00 


$580.00  to  $670.00 

The  average  student  pays  for  board  from  $6.00  to  $6.50  a week;  and  for 
a room  $3.00  to  $4.00  a week.  A few  pay  as  little  as  $8.00  for  board  and 
room ; while  others,  with  more  expensive  tastes,  pay  over  $10.00.  Any  student, 
however,  may  count  on  finding  satisfactory  board  and  lodging  at  from  $9.00 
to  $9.50  a week. 

Lists  of  Boarding  Houses  for  men  students  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Registrar.  Meals  may  be  obtained  at  the  cafeteria  in  the  Students’  Union. 

PHYSICAL  WELFARE  OF  STUDENTS 

0 

Every  student  is  required  upon  registration  to  contribute  $4  towards  a 
health  insurance  fund.  In  return  the  student  has  the  free  services  of  the  Uni- 
versity medical  officer  and  a special  hospital  rate  of  fifty  cents  a day.  Details 
of  the  plan  are  given  in  a printed  leaflet  which  may  be  had  on  request 

All  students  in  their  first  year  are  required  to  take  physical  training  for 
two  hours  a week,  unless  excused  on  account  of  military  training.  They  are 
examined  by  the  University  physician,  who  prescribes  proper  exercises  to 
correct  any  physical  defects. 

VACCINATION 

Every  student  registering  for  the  first  time  must  submit  evidence  of 
successful  vaccination. 

TUBERCULIN  TESTS 

Tuberculin  tests  will  be  given  to  all  students  entering  Queen’s  Uni- 
versity for  the  first  time  in  September  1943.  This  service  will  be  free  of 
charge  but  those  who  react  positively  are  expected  to  have  an  X-ray  examina- 
tion at  their  own  cost. 

STUDENT  SELF-GOVERNMENT 

Queen’s  was  the  first  University  in  Canada  to  introduce  student  self- 
government.  All  students  are  members  of  the  Alma  Mater  Society,  the 
chief  instrument  of  student  government,  and  are  expected  to  share  in  its  duties 
and  responsibilities. 

ALMA  MATER  SOCIETY  LECTURE 

In  1939,  as  a contribution  from  the  student  body  to  the  Centenary  En- 
dowment Fund,  the  Alma  Mater  Society  gave  the  University  its  accumulated 
reserve  of  $1711.  The  income  will  be  used  to  provide  an  annual  lecture  to 
be  known  as  the  Alma  Mater  Society  Lecture. 


42 


MILITARY  SERVICES 

University  Naval  Training  Division 

The  University  Naval  Training  Division,  Queen’s  University,  was  orga- 
nized in  March  1943,  under  the  direction  of  Lieutenant  S.  T.  Hill,  Command- 
ing Officer  H.M.C.S.  “Cataraqui.” 

A minimum  of  110  hours’  training  will  be  given  during  the  academic  year, 
and  two  weeks’  spring  training  in  H.M.C.S.  “Cornwallis”  or  H.M.C.S.  “Na- 
den”  at  the  end  of  the  academic  year. 

Under-graduates  in  science  or  non-science  courses  will  be  enrolled  as 
ratings  on  Divisional  Strength.  Students  in  mechanical,  electrical  engineering 
and  engineering  physics  courses  will  be  enrolled  as  Stokers  II.  Students  in 
other  University  courses,  except  Medicine,  will  be  enrolled  as  Ordinary  Sea- 
men. Students  who  fail  to  pass  the  medical  examination  for  Ordinary  Seamen 
may  be  considered  for  other  rates  still  being  recruited. 

Canadian  Officers’  Training  Corps 

The  Queen’s  University  Contingent  of  the  C.O.T.C.,  formed  at  the  out- 
break of  the  last  war  under  Lieutenant- Colonel  A.  B.  Cunningham,  was  orga- 
nized as  a Unit  of  the  Militia  in  February,  1915.  Reorganized  after  the  war 
by  Colonel  A.  Macphail,  C.M.G.,  D.S.O.,  it  is  now  commanded  by  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  R.  O.  Earl,  E.D. 

Basic  military  training  is  provided  for  students  in  all  faculties  of  the 
University. 

University  Air  Training  Corps 

The  Royal  Canadian  Air  Force  has  established  a University  Air  Training 
Corps,  with  squadrons  in  the  various  Canadian  universities  and  colleges.  The 
Queen’s  University  unit  is  known  as  No.  4 Squadron.  In  a two-year  course, 
instruction  is  offered  equivalent  to  that  of  an  R.CA.F.  Initial  Training  School, 
comprising  drill,  mathematics,  navigation,  signals,  airmanship,  aircraft  recog- 
nition, visits  to  service  flying  stations  and  familiarization  flights.  At  the  end 
of  each  academic  session,  U.A.T.C.  airmen  attend  camp  for  two  weeks  at  an 
R.C.A.F.  station. 

No.  4 (Queen’s  University)  Squadron  is  under  the  command  of  Squadron 
Leader  H.  L.  Tracy. 

EMPLOYMENT  SERVICE 

An  Employment  Service  has  been  in  successful  operation  at  the  University 
for  several  years.  It  is  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the  Service  Control  Com- 
mittee of  the  Engineering  Society  and  administered  by  the  Secretary  of  the 
General  Alumni  Association.  It  is  financed  by  the  Engineering  Society  and 
the  University.  The  objects  of  the  Service  are  to  assist  graduates  in  all 
Faculties  to  secure  suitable  positions,  and  to  help  students  to  obtain  work 
during  vacation  periods. 

Communications  should  be  addressed:  Manager,  Employment  Service, 
Queen’s  University. 

FRATERNITIES 

By  resolution  of  Senate  no  student  registered  with  the  University  may 
form  or  become  a member  of  any  chapter  of  any  externally-affiliated 
fraternity  or  sorority  at  or  near  Kingston. 

THE  STUDENTS’  MEMORIAL  UNION 

The  Students’  Memorial  Union  was  built  to  commemorate  the  service  of 
the  students  and  graduates  of  Queen’s  in  the  Great  War. 


43 


Every  male  student  is  a member  of  the  Union,  which  is  really  a club, 
where  the  men  of  all  Faculties  may  meet  in  a University  building  designed 
for  that  particular  purpose  and  privilege. 

There  are  the  usual  club  facilities,  dining  room,  lounge,  billiard  room, 
reading  room  and  comrnittee  rooms. 

FEES 

Sessional  Fees  (including  registration,  tuition,  examination,  degree,  library, 
laboratory,  health  insurance  and  student  interests.  The  fee  for  athletics, 
which  is  part  of  student  interests,  gives  admission  to  all  home  games  except 


play-offs)  : — 

If  paid  on  registration  $255.00 

If  paid  in  instalments : 

1st  payment,  on  registration  $144.00 

2nd  payment,  on  or  before  Jan.  6 $116.00 


Fees  may  be  paid  in  two  instalments,  in  which  case  an  additional 
$5  will  be  added  to  the  first  instalment.  The  first  instalment  and  the  laboratory 
deposit  must  be  paid  at  the  time  of  registration  in  September,  the  balance  on  or 
before  January  6th,  1944.  No  student  will  be  admitted  to  classes  until  the 
above  conditions  have  been  complied  with,  nor  will  he  be  permitted  to  continue 
the  work  of  the  second  term  until  the  fees  have  been  paid  in  full. 

Fees  must  be  remitted  by  accepted  cheque,  postal  order,  or  bank  draft,  pay- 
able to  Queen’s  University.  Cheques  or  bank  drafts  on  any  point  where  there  is 
a branch  of  the  Bank  of  Montreal  will  be  received  at  par ; all  other  cheques 
should  have  ^ of  1%,  minimum  15c,  added  to  cover  exchange,  or  drawn 
plus  exchange. 

Fifth  Year  in  Commerce. 


If  paid  in  full  on  registration  $150.00 

Student  Interests  $23.00 

This  includes  all  sessional  fees. 


(This  year  is  taken  in  the  Faculty  of  Arts  under  regulations  of  that 
Faculty.) 

Deposits. — For  covering  expenses  of  breakages,  etc.,  a first  year  student 
must  deposit  $10  with  the  Treasurer.  If  at  any  time  the  amount  of  breakages, 
etc.,  exceeds  $3,  an  additional  deposit  of  $5  must  be  made. 

For  second,  third  and  fourth  years  the  deposit  is  $5  except  in  the  follow- 


ing courses : — 

Second  Year  Courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M $10.00 

Third  Year  Courses  A and  M 10.00 

Third  Year  Courses  B and  D 15.00 

Fourth  Year  Course  B 15.00 


Charges  will  be  made  for  the  use  of  platinum,  and  other  expensive 
chemicals  and  apparatus.  All  money  to  the  credit  of  the  depositors  will  be 
returned  at  the  end  of  the  session  on  presentation  of  the  deposit  receipt  pro- 
perly certified. 


44 


The  fees  below  are  payable  as  they  are  incurred. 


Special  Charges. 

Pro  tanto  allowance  of  courses  $10.00 

Late  registration.  See  Regulation  2 3.00 

Supplemental  Examination,  one  subject  10.00 

Each  additional  subject 2.00 

Writing  at  outside  centre  in  April  (if  permitted),  each  paper  5.00 

Late  application  for  supplemental  examination  or  graduation  3.00 

Special  fee  for  Surveying  Field  Course  15.00 

Fees  for  Single  Classes. 

Registration 10.00 

Student  Interests  23.00 

Any  course  of  lectures  (limited  to  five  courses)  30.00 

Drawing,  One  Course,  per  Session  20. (X) 

Surveying,  One  Course,  per  Session 20.00 

Assaying  Laboratory,  per  Session  10.00 

Chemical  Laboratory,  per  Session  20. (X) 

Petrographical  Laboratory,  per  Session 10.00 


Mechanical,  Electrical  or  General  Engineering  Laboratory,  per  Session  20.00 

A student  not  paying  full  fees  who  wishes  to  take  for  credit  any  course  not 
required  in  his  degree  prescription  must  obtain  permission  to  do  so  from  the 
Departments  concerned  and  must  pay  the  fees  for  extra  classes  as  laid  down 
in  the  Calendar. 

Fees  for  M.Sc.  Work 

♦Total  Sessional  Fee  (including  laboratory  fee,  and  student  interests)  $143.00 
Laboratory  deposit 10.00 

Additional  charges  may  be  made  in  the  case  of  students  requiring  special 
material  and  apparatus. 

♦If  a student  decides  to  spread  his  work  over  two  years,  he  will  pay  each 
year  $87.50  for  total  sessional  fee,  and  $10  for  laboratory  deposit. 

In  addition  to  regular  examination  fees,  supplemental  or  otherwise,  there 
will  be  the  following  fees  for  special  examinations : 


Examination  in  one  paper  $5.00 

Examination  in  two  or  more  papers  10.00 


Graduation  and  Other  Fees 

No  graduation  fee  is  charged  for  B.Sc.  unless  the  degree  is  taken  in 
absentia,  in  which  case  there  is  a charge  of  $10.00. 

Graduation  M.Sc, 


$20.00 


45 


DEGREES 

L Bachelor  of  Science. 

1.  The  degree  of  B.Sc.  will  be  given  on  the  satisfactory  completion  of  a 
four  years’  course  in  any  one  of  the  following  departments : — 

A — Mining  Engineering;  B — Chemistry;  C — Mineralogy  and  Geology; 
D — Chemical  Engineering;  M — Metallurgical  Engineering;  E — Civil  Engin- 
eering; F — Mechanical  Engineering;  G — Electrical  Engineering;  H — Physics. 

A graduate  in  any  course  who  desires  to  take  the  degree  of  B.Sc.  in  any 
other  course,  or  a student  desiring  to  change  from  one  course  to  another, 
shall  take  all  the  classes  which  he  has  not  already  passed  in  that  course  or 
by  examination  satisfy  the  Department  in  charge  of  those  classes  as  to  his 
knowledge  of  the  subjects  involved. 

Graduation  with  Honours. — Honour  standing  will  be  given  to  any 
student  who  graduates  with  an  average  of  seventy-five  per  cent,  or  upwards 
on  the  full  work  of  the  fourth  year  of  his  course.  Credit  for  Honour  standing 
will  be  given  on  the  diploma,  and  in  the  list  of  graduates  a mark  of  distinction 
will  be  placed  against  the  names  of  those  graduating  with  Honour  standing. 

The  following  percentages  are  required  for  standing  in  all  courses : 
Division  I — 75%  and  over ; Division  H — 62%  to  74%  ; Division  HI — 50% 
to  61%. 

2.  The  degrees  of  B.A.  and  B.Sc.  will  be  given  on  the  satisfactory  com- 
pletion of  a seven  years’  course  in  Arts  and  Applied  Science.  See  pages  63-64. 

A candidate  for  graduation  must  have  completed  either  a four  or  a seven 
years’  course  and  have  passed  all  the  required  examinations. 

H.  Master  of  Science 

The  Degree  of  Master  of  Science  (M.Sc.)  is  granted  to  candidates  who 
have  graduated  with  the  B.Sc.  degree  and  thereafter  have  been  in  attendance 
in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  for  at  least  one  full  session. 

The  work  prescribed  consists  of  two  parts,  as  follows: 

A.  Research  and  Thesis  representing  not  less  than  half  the  session’s  work. 
Except  by  special  permission  the  thesis  must  be  submitted  by  April  20.  A 
candidate  who  is  allowed  to  postpone  his  thesis  must  submit  it  by  September  20 
if  he  desires  a degree  in  the  fall. 

B.  One  or  both  of  the  following  which  must  be  cognate  to  the  field  of 
study  and  tested  by  examinations : 

(a)  Prescribed  lecture  courses.  These,  except  by  special  permission  of 
the  Faculty,  must  be  advanced  courses  (i.e.  courses  not  offered  for  the  B.Sc. 
degree).  If  allowed  to  take  an'  undergraduate  course,  the  candidate  must 
pass  a special  examination  of  a standard  higher  than  is  exacted  from  B.Sc 
candidates. 

(b)  Directed  special  studies  with  reports. 

Written  examinations  will  be  set  on  the  lecture  courses  prescribed  and  also 
on  the  directed  spec  al  studies  and  a minimum  standing  of  66%  must  be 
made  on  each  paper. 


46 


An  oral  examination  will  be  given  on  the  subject  of  the  thesis. 

Candidates  must  apply  for  permission  to  enter  the  M.Sc.  course  at  least 
one  week  before  the  opening  of  the  session. 

No  candidate  who  has  not  made  an  average  of  66%  in  his  final  year 
will  be  accepted  for  the  M.Sc.  course  except  by  special  recommendation  of 
Ihe  Department  concerned. 

A committee  consisting  of  the  Vice-Principal,  the  Dean,  the  Head  of  the 
Department  concerned  and  the  Professor  or  Instructor,  selected  to  supervise 
the  candidate’s  work  shall  report  to  the  Faculty  on  his  fitness  to  enter  the 
M.Sc.  course  and  recommend  to  the  Faculty  the  prescribed  programme  of 
work.  On  the  recommendation  of  this  committee,  the  Faculty  may  decline  to 
accept  a candidate  with  the  formal  requirement  of  66%  if  because  of  lack 
of  space,  equipment,  time  or  for  other  reasons  the  department  concerned 
finds  itself  unable  to  conduct  the  work. 

A candidate  in  full  time  employment  in  the  University  (or  elsewhere) 
will  not  normally  be  accepted  as  a candidate  for  the  M.Sc. 

THE  INSTITUTION  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERS  OF 

GREAT  BRITAIN 

The  Council  of  the  Institution  of  Civil  Engineers  of  Great  Britain  has 
recognized  the  degree  of  B.Sc.  of  Queen’s  University  obtained  in  the  depart- 
ments of  Civil,  Mechanical  and  Electrical  Engineering  as  exempting  from 
Sections  A and  B of  the  Institution  Associate  Membership  Examination. 
Graduates  in  the  departments  of  Mining  and  Metallurgy  are  exempt  from 
Section  B. 

DOMINION  LAND  SURVEYORS 

Revised  Statutes  Canada  Qiap.  117  Sec.  22,  1927 

Every  person  wno  has  followed  a regular  course  of  study  in  all  the 
branches  of  education  required  for  this  act  for  admission  as  a Dominion  Land 
Surveyor  in  any  college  or  university  where  a complete  course  of  theoretical  and 
practical  instruction  in  surveying  is  organized,  and  who,  after  examination,  had 
thereupon  received  from  such  college  or  university  a degree  attesting  to  his 
completion  of  the  said  course  of  instruction,  which  degree  shall  be  the  degree 

of  Bachelor  of  Science  shall  be  exempt  from  serving  three  years  as 

aforesaid  as  an  articled  pupil,  and  shall  be  entitled  to  examination  for  a com- 
mission after  being  admitted  upon  examination  as  aforesaid  as  an  articled  pupil, 
and  serving  one  year  under  articles  with  a Dominion  Land  Surveyor  including 
six  months’  actual  service  with  him  in  the  field.  

ONTARIO  LAND  SURVEYORS 

Revised  Statutes  Ontario  1927,  Chap.  201,  Sec.  28  (1). 

The  privilege  of  a shortened  term  of  apprenticeship  shall  also  be  accorded 

to  any  graduate  of  the or  to  any  graduate  in  Civil  Engineering  or  of 

Mining  Engineering  of  Queen’s  University  at  Kingston,  and  such  per- 

son shall  not  be  required  to  pass  the  preliminary  examination  for  admission  to 
apprenticeship,  and  shall  only  be  bound  to  serve  under  articles  with  a practicing 
surveyor,  duly  filed  as  required  by  section  31,  during  twelve  successive  months 
of  actual  practice  after  which  on  complying  with  all  the  other  requirements 
he  may  undergo  the  examination  for  admission  to  practice. 


47 


COURSES. 


A — Mining  Engineering;  B — Chemistry;  C — Mineralogy  and  Geology; 
D — Chemical  Engineering ; M — Metallurgical  Engineering ; E — Civil  En- 
gineering ; F — Mechanical  Engineering ; G — Electrical  Engineering ; H — 
Physics. 

First  Year,  All  Courses 


English  

Mathematics  I.  . . . 
Mathematics  II.  . . 
Mathematics  III. 
Mathematics  IV.  . 

Projection  

Physics  I & II  . . 
Chemistry  I.  (2)* 
Drawing  I 

Surveying  I 

Physical  Training 


Lect.  Hrs. 
per  week. 
2 

2 

2 

2 

2 

0 

4 

3 

0 

0 

0 


Lab.  Hrs. 
per  week. 
0 
0 
0 
0 
0 
3 
2 
3 
3 
2 
2 


17 


15 


Page. 

65 

67 

67 

67 

68 

125 
70,71 

75 

124 

111 

126 

Total  32 


Second  Year 
Courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M. 


Mathematics  V 

0 

68 

Descriptive  Geometry  

0 

2 

125 

Physics  XIV 

2b 

4a,  2b 

72 

Qualitative  Analysis  I.  (Chem.  10)* 

2 

6 

76 

Mineralogy  I.  (1)*  

2b 

2 

87 

Geology  I 

2 

0 

82 

General  Engineering  I 

2 

0 

102 

Surveying  II 

1 

3 

111 

Drawing  II 

0 

3 

124 

14a 

20a  Total  34a 

14b 

18b  Total  32b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 

Students  in  Courses  A,  C and  E must  take  .Surveying  Field  Work.  See 

p.  112. 


/ 


48 


Courses  E,  F,  G. 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 
per  week,  per  week. 


Mathematics  V 3 0 

Astronomy  II 1 0 

Descriptive  Geometry  0 2 

Physics  III 2 2 

Physics  IV 2 2 

General  Chemistry  II 2 0 

Grcneral  Engineering  1 2 0 

Mechanical  Engineering  IX 1 2 

Surveying  II 1 3 

Drawing  III 0 5a,  3b 

Shop  Work  0 2^ 


Page. 

68 

69 

125 

71 

71 

76 

102 

120 

111 

125 

123 


14a  183/2a  Total  325^a 

14b  16Hb  Total  30Hb 

Students  in  Courses  A,  C and  E must  take  Surveying  Field  Work.  See 

p.  112. 

A.— MINING  ENGINEERING. 

This  course  is  necessarily  a very  broad  one,  so  that  it  may  give  a foun- 
dation for  whatever  branch  of  the  profession  a graduate  may  enter. 

Experience  has  shown  that  graduates  do  not  usually  follow  any  narrow 
differentiation  which  they  make  during  their  course,  but  are  governed  by 
many  other  factors  in  the  practice  of  Mining  Engineering.  These  factors 
are  often  out  of  their  control,  and  the  wisest  plan  in  a four  years'  course 
appears  to  be,  not  to  specialize,  but  by  a broad  training  in  the  final  years 
to  obtain  a suitable  introduction  to  any  branch  of  the  work. 

There  are,  however,  certain  well  known  avenues  towards  professional 

work,  such  as  a good  training  and  a manipulative  skill  in  drafting,  chemical 
analysis,  and  surveying.  These  subjects  are  essential  for  almost  any  profes- 
sional position  in  mining  and  metallurgy,  and  are  therefore  perfected  as  far 
as  is  possible  while  at  college. 

At  the  present  time  there  are  no  summer  classes,  or  summer  field  work 
in  mining  or  metallurgy.  Under  these  conditions  the  student  can,  usually, 
obtain  practical  and  remunerative  work  during  four  or  five  months  each 
summer.  This  work,  if  in  connection  with  Mining,  Metallurgy  or  Survey- 
ing is  considered  to  be  more  useful  as  a training  than  practical  work  under 
academic  supervision. 

Visits  are  paid  to  mines  and  smelters.  One  trip  at  least  is  required  of 
each  student,  the  expense  not  to  be  more  than  twenty-five  dollars. 


49 


First  and  Second  Years 
See  Page  47. 

Third  Year 

Before  entering  the  third  year  in  Mining  Engineering  it  will  be  necessary 
for  the  student  to  satisfy  the  department  that  he  is  physically  fit  for  the  work 
he  intends  to  follow.  This  refers  particularly  to  examination  of  eyes  and 
chest. 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week 

Page.' 

Surveying  Field  Work  

112 

Quantitative  Analysis  I.  (3)* 

1 

3 

78 

Mineralogy  IV.  (11)*  

2 

2 

89 

Geology  IV 

2a 

0 

83 

Geology  III.  (b)  (10b)*  

2b 

2b 

83 

Mining  I 

2 

2a,  lb 

92 

Ore  Dressing  

2a,  lb 

0 

93 

Metallurgy  II 

2 

0 

95 

Thermodynamics  I 

1 

0 

121 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

(jeneral  Engineering  V 

1 

3 

103 

Electrical  Engineering  I 

2 

2 

114 

Fire  Assaying  

0 

4b 

97 

15a 

14a  Total  29a 

14b 

19b  Total  33b 

Fourth  Year 

Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week 

Page. 

Mechanical  Engineering  IV.  . . 

2 

0 

118 

(Geology  V 

0 

84 

Geology  VIII.  (15)*  

2 

0 

84 

Hydraulic  Engineering  IV.  ... 

2 

0 

107 

Metallurgy  IV 

3 

0 

95 

Milling 

Mining  II.  ... 
Mining  III.  . . 

Economics  I.  . 
Summer  Essay 


0 

3 

0 

2 


9 

2 

3 

0 


94 

92 

93 
66 
93 


15 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


14 


Total  29 


50 


To  those  students  who  wish  to  do  further  work  in  Geology  the  following 
optional  course  in  the  fourth  year  is  offered.  Only  specially  recommended 
students  will  be  allowed  to  take  this  course. 

Fourth  Year,  Geology  Option 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week.  Page. 

Geology  II.  (11)* 

0 

2 

83 

Geology  V 

1 

0 

84 

Geology  VII 

0 

2b 

84 

Geology  VIII.  (15)^  

2 

0 

84 

Geology  X 

0 

3 

85 

Mineralogy  II.  (10b)*  

2b 

2b 

88 

Mineralogy  III.  (10a)*  

2a 

88 

Mineralogy  VI.  (14a)*  

2a 

90 

Mining  II 

3 

0 

92 

Milling  

0 

3 

94 

Metallurgy  IV 

3 

0 

95 

Hydraulic  Engineering  IV 

2 

0 

107 

Mechanical  Engineering  IV 

2 

0 

118 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

Summer  Essay  

93 

18a 

12a 

Total  30a 

17b 

12b 

Total  29b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


B. — CHEMISTRY  (Industrial  and  Research) 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  fit  students  to  enter  on  graduation  upon 
the  practice  of  the  profession  of  chemistry  whether  it  be  exercised  in  the 
analytical  chemical  laboratory,  the  research  laboratory  or  in  the  operation 
and  control  of  chemical  industries  or  other  industries  in  which  chemistry 
plays  an  important  role.  It  comprises  instruction  in  the  principal  branches 
of  chemistry  as  well  as  fundamental  training  in  mathematics,  physics  and 
other  closely  related  sciences.  The  course  is  identical  in  the  first  two  years 
with  that  in  mining,  metallurgical  and  chemical  engineering.  In  the  third 
year  more  intensified  study  of  chemistry  begins  and  is  continued  and  de- 
veloped in  the  fourth  year.  In  the  latter  year  by  the  assignment  to  each 
student  of  a minor  research  problem  training  is  given  in  methods  of  research, 
independent  study  and  the  use  of  the  library  for  investigational  work. 


51 

First  and  Second  Years — See  page  47. 


Third  Year 

Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week 

Page. 

Quantitative  Analysis  II.  (13)*  

2 

6a,  10b 

79 

Industrial  Chemistry  II.  (17)*  

2 

3 

80 

Physical  Chemistry  I.  (14)*  

2 

3 

79 

Organic  Chemistry  I.  (12)*  

2 

3 

77 

General  Chemistry  III 

2 

0 

76 

Metallurgy  II 

2 

0 

95 

Mineralogy  III.  (10a)*  

2a 

2a  - 

88 

German  I 

3 

0 

65 

17a 

17a  Total  34a 

15b 

19b  Total  34b 

Fourth  Year 

Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week 

Page. 

Organic  Chemistry  II.  (22)*  

2 

6 

78 

Physical  Chemistry  II.  (25)*  

2 

3 

79 

Physical  Chemistry  III.  (24)*  

2 

3 

80 

Industrial  Chemistry  Ilia 

2a 

3a 

81 

Colloid  Chemistry  II 

2 

2a 

81 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

German  II 

2 

0 

6o 

Option  in  Chemistry 

General  and  Inorganic  Chemistry  IV,  Organic 
Chemistry  IV,  Quantitative  Analysis  IV,  Physi- 
cal Chemistry  IV  or  Industrial  Chemistry  IV. 

0 

9b 

76-81 

14a 

17a  Total  31a 

12b 

21b  Total  33b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 

C.— MINERALOGY  AND  GEOLOGY 

This  course  furnishes  a foundation  for  the  professions  of  mineralogy,  geo^ 
logical  surveying,  mining  and  consulting  geology,  and  is  useful  for  those 
who  will  in  any  way  be  connected  with  the  discovery  or  the  development  of 
the  mineral  resources  of  the  country.  It  forms  a good  postgraduate  course 
for  the  mining  engineer  who  wishes  to  understand  thoroughly  the  ground- 
work of  his  profession.  Since  a knowledge  of  chemistry  is  essential  for 
proper  comprehension  of  many  mineralogical  and  geological  phenomena, 
considerable  stress  is  laid  on  this  science  in  the  earlier  part  of  the  course. 
The  departments  of  mineralogy  and  geology  are  furnished  with  well  equip- 
ped laboratories  for  the  physical  and  chemical  examination  of  minerals, 
rocks  and  ores,  and  also  with  collections  of  illustrative  material.  Miller  Hall 
has  a large  museum  on  the  main  floor  with  fine  specimens  of  rocks,  minerals, 
and  fossils.  Although  field  excursions  are  made  during  the  session,  students 
are  advised  to  spend  the  summer  vacations  in  practical  field  work. 


52 


First  and  Second  Years 
See  Page  47. 

Third  Year 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week  Page. 

Surveying  Field  Work  

course 

112 

Quantitative  Chemistry  I.  (3)*  ... 

1 

3 

78 

Physical  Chemistry  1.  (14)*  

2 

3 

79 

Mineralogy  II.  (10b)*  

2b 

2b 

88 

Mineralogy  III.  (10a)*  

2a 

88 

Mineralogy  IV.  (11)* 

2 

2 

89 

Geology  IL  (11)*  

2 

83 

Geology  III.  (10b)*  

2b 

2b 

83 

Geology  VII 

0 

2b 

84 

Geology  X.  (17)*  

0 

4 

85 

Ore  Dressing  

0 

93 

10a 

16a 

Total  26a 

13b 

20b 

Total  33b 

Fourth  Year 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week,  per  week  Page. 


Mineralogy  V.  (12)*  

2 

2 

89 

Mineralogy  VI.  (14a)*  

2a 

90 

Geology  V 

1 

0 

84 

Geology  VI.  (13)* 

2 

2 

84 

Geology  VIII.  (15)*  

2 

0 

84 

Geology  XII.  (14a)*  

2a 

85 

Reports  

0 

4 

85 

Mining  IV 

1 

0 

93 

Fire  Assaying  

0 

4a 

97 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

Research  and  Thesis  

0 

6 

90 

German  I 

3 

0 

65 

16a 

22a 

Total  38a 

13b 

14b 

Total  27b 

Graduates  in  Course  A or 

Course 

C who  wish  to  take 

further  work  in 

Geology  and  Mineralogy  are 

referred 

to  the  graduate  courses 

in  Geology, 

p.  63,  and  in  Mineralogy,  p.  90. 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


53 


D^CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING 

Chemical  Engineering  is  the  application  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
Physics,  Chemistry,  Engineering,  ^nd  Physical  Chemistry,  to  the  construction 
and  operation  of  Chemical  plant.  The  course  must  therefore  be  a broad  one 
and  avoid  too  narrow  a specialization.  Graduates  have  been  found  to  enter 
the  most  diverse  industries. 

The  first  two  years  are  the  same  as  those  for  the  Mining,  Metallurgy  and 
Chemistry  students.  Specialization  begins  in  the  third  year,  more  time  being 
devoted  to  Chemistry,  whilst  continuing  fundamental  courses  in  Mechanical, 
Civil  and  Electrical  Engineering.  Specialization  is  continued  in  the  fourth  year, 
with  additional  training  in  Chemical  Engineering,  Mechanical  Engineering  and 
Applied  Thermodynamics. 

The  course  aims  at  training  students  for  research  and  operating  positions 
in  chemical  and  allied  industries. 

Visits  are  paid  to  local  chemical  works  and  to  a number  of  the  largest 
chemical  plants  outside  of  Kingston,  attendance  being  compulsory.  The 
expense  of  the  outside  trip  in  the  fourth  year  does  not  exceed  twenty-two 
dollars. 

First  and  Second  Years 
See  Page  47. 


Third  Year 


Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week. 

Page. 

Quantitative  Chemistry  I.  (3)* 

1 

3 

78 

Physical  Chemistry  I.  (14)*  

2 

3 

79 

Industrial  Chemistry  II.  (17)*  

2 

3a,  2b 

98 

Chemical  Engineering  I 

2b 

0 

99 

Organic  Chemistry  I.  (12)* 

2 

3 

77 

Thermodynamics  I 

1 

0 

121 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

General  Engineering  V 

1 

3 

103 

Electrical  Engineering  I 

2 

2 

114 

Mechanical  Engineering  XII 

1 

3b 

121 

12a 

19a  Total  31a 

14b 

21b  Total  35b 

54 


Fourth  Year 


Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week.  Page. 

Physical  Chemistry  II. 

(25)^  ........ 

2 

3 

79 

Colloid  Chemistry  la. 

(15a)*  

2a 

81 

Chemical  Engineering 

II 

2 

3 

99 

Chemical  Engineering 

Ill 

5a,  6b 

100 

Chemical  Engineering 

IV 

0 

101 

Chemical  Engineering 

V 

2 

0 

101 

Thermodynamics  III.  . 

2 

3a 

121 

Hydraulic  Engineering 

IV 

2 

0 

107 

Shop  Work  

0 

3b 

123 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

16a 

16a 

Total  32a 

16b 

15b 

Total  31b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


M— METALLURGICAL  ENGINEERING 

Metallurgy  is  divided  into  chemical  metallurgy,  the  extraction  of  the 
metals  from  their  ores  and  the  refining  of  the  metals,  and  physical  metallurgy, 
the  use  of  the  metals  and  their  alloys  in  the  industries.  The  former  requires 
in  students  a grounding  in  inorganic  chemistry  and  its  application  in  metal- 
lurgical processes;  the  latter,  a grounding  in  physics  and  its  application  in 
the  study  of  the  constitution  of  alloys  and  their  physical  changes. 

The  first  two  years  of  the  course  are  the  same  as  those  in  Mining 
Engineering,  Chemical  Engineering  and  Chemistry.  The  engineering  aspect 
of  metallurgical  work  is  to  the  fore  in  these  preparatory  years,  and  is  kept 
in  view  during  the  third  and  fourth  years. 

In  the  third  year  specialization  begins  and  particular  stress  is  placed  on 
inorganic  and  physical  chemistry  and  chemical  metallurgy.  In  the  fourth 
year  these  are  continued,  while  a foundation  is  laid  in  physical  metallurgy  in 
lecture  room  and  well  equipped  laboratories. 

As  far  as  industrial  conditions  permit,  students  are  required  to  work  in 
mills  or  smelters  during  their  summer  vacations.  For  graduation  an  essay 
on  some  phase  of  this  practical  experience  is  demanded. 


55 


First  and  Sec©nd  Years 
See  Page  47. 

Third  Year 

Lect.  Hrs,  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week.  Page. 

Quantitative  Analysis  I.  (3)*  

1 

3 

78 

Physical  Chemistry  I.  (14)*  

2 

3 

79 

Organic  Chemistry  V 

1 

0 

77 

I hermodynamics  T 

1 

0 

121 

Mineralogy  Vila 

2^ 

0 

90 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

General  Engineering  V 

1 

3 

103 

Electrical  Engineering  I 

2 

2 

114 

Mechanical  Engineering  XII 

1 

3b 

121 

Metallurgy  II 

2 

0 

95 

Metallurgy  III 

0 

2 

95 

Ore  Dressing  

2a,  lb 

0 

95 

Fire  Assaying  

0 

4a 

97 

15a 

19  a 

Total  34a 

12b 

18b 

Total  30b 

Fourth  Y"ear 

Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week.  Page. 

Physical  Chemistry  II.  (25)*  

2 

3 

79 

Mining  IV 

1 

0 

93 

Metallurgy  IV 

3 

0 

95 

Metallurgy  V 

0 

1 

96 

Metallurgy  VI 

lb 

0 

96 

Metallurgy  VII 

0 

2 

96 

Metallurgy  Lab 

0 

3 

97 

Metallography  I 

la 

3a 

96 

Metallography  II 

lb 

3b 

96 

Hydraulic  Engineering  IV 

2 

0 

107 

Milling 

0 

9 

94 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

Summer  Essay  

97 

Mineralogy  Via.  optional  (14a)*  

la 

2a 

90 

11a 

21a 

Total  32a 

12b 

21b 

Total  33b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


56 


B.^CXVIL  ENGINEERING. 

The  Course  in  Civil  Engineering  proceeds  from  the  fundamentals — 
Mathematics,  Physics,  Mechanics,  Surveying  and  Draughting  — to  their  ap- 
plication in-— Structural,  Sanitary,  Highway  and  Hydraulics — which  make  up 
the  general  field  of  Civil  Engineering. 

Throughout  the  Course  specially  adapted  classes  in  Metallurgy,  Geology, 
Chemistry,  Electrical  and  Mechanical  Engineering  are  added.  Attention  is 
given  particularly  to  Economics  and  English. 


First  and  Second  Years 
See  Pages  47  and  48. 


Third  Year 


Lect  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week 

Page. 

Surve)ring  Field  Work  

2 weeks  course 

112 

Metallurgy  I.  

1 

0 

95 

Thermodynamics  I 

1 

0 

121 

General  Engineering  II 

1 

0 

102 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

Gieneral  Engineering  VI 

3a 

104 

Foundations 

lb 

3b 

104 

Structural  Engineering  I 

2 

3 

104 

Hydraulic  Engineering  I 

2 

0 

106 

Surveying  III 

3a 

111 

Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  I.  . . . 

2b 

3b 

108 

Railway  and  Highway  Engineering  

2 

3 

107 

Electrical  Engineering  I 

2 

114 

Geology  IX 

0 

84 

15a 

16a 

Total  31a 

16b 

16b 

Total  32b 

57 


Fourth  Year 


Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week. 

Page. 

Industrial  Chemistry  I 

1 

0 

98 

General  Engineering  IV 

0 

3a 

103 

Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering 

H.  . 

1 

0 

108 

Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering 

HI. 

1 

3b 

109 

Highway  Engineering  

1 

3a 

no 

Structural  Engineering  II 

2 

5 a,  6b 

105 

Structural  Engineering  IV 

2a,  lb 

5 

105 

Mechanical  Engineering  IV 

2 

0 

118 

Hydraulic  Engineering  II 

2 

0 

106 

Hydraulic  Engineering  III 

0 

3b 

106 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

Engineering  Relations  

1 

0 

107 

Thesis  

0 

0 

112 

15a 

16a  Total  31a 

14b 

17b  Total  31b 

P.— MECHANICAL  ENGINEERING. 

Mechanical  Engineering  embraces  the  design,  manufacture  and  operation 
of  all  classes  of  machinery,  of  power  plants  and  manufacturing  plants,  as  well 
as  the  executive  management  of  industries.  A four  years*  course  must  there- 
fore be  broad  enough  to  give  the  student  a thorough  training  in  the  funda- 
mental principles,  and  not  merely  provide  training  for  one  of  the  many  special 
branches  of  the  profession. 

The  first  two  years  are  devoted  to  the  study  of  the  fundamental  sub- 
jects of  Mathematics,  Physics,  Chemistry  and  Mechanics,  including  experi- 
mental work  in  the  various  laboratories.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the 
strength  of  materials,  with  practice  in  testing  during  the  second  and  third 

years.  The  third  and  fourth  year  courses  include  theoretical  and  applied 
Thermodynamics,  the  study  of  reciprocating  steam,  engines,  with  their  valve 
gears,  governors,  etc.,  the  study  of  steam,  turbines,  and  the  engineering  and 
economics  of  steam  power-plant  design.  Courses  are  also  included  on  Internal 
Combustion  Engines  of  all  types,  on  Air  Compression,  Refrigeration  and 
Heating.  Instruction  is  also  given  in  Mechanism,  Machine  Design,  Production 
Engineering,  Shop  Work,  and  the  fundamental  principles  of  Electrical  Engi- 
neering, and  in  the  elements  of  Aerodynamics  and  of  Aircraft  Design  and 
Manufacture. 

As  part  of  the  above  special  attention  is  being  paid  to  the  internal  com- 
bustion engine  as  applied  to  aircraft,  together  with  such  auxiliaries  as  super- 
chargers, magnetoes,  ignition,  and  air  cooling  systems. 


58 


Instruction  in  drawing  extends  over  the  four  years,  and  gives  a thorough 
drill  in  modern  drafting- room  practice.  In  the  more  advanced  courses 
of  the  fourth  year  the  student  is  taught  how  to  apply  the  general 
principles  to  the  design  and  operation  of  special  machinery,  steam  and  gas 
engines,  steam  boilers  and  gas  producers,  and  complete  power  plants ; 
each  student  is  allowed  to  specialize  as  far  as  is  practicable.  The  instruction 
in  the  laboratories  is  intended  not  only  to  familiarize  the  student  with  stand- 
ard methods  of  testing,  but  also  to  teach  him  how  to  attack  original  problems. 

The  fourth  year  students  are  kept  in  touch  with  manufacturing  works 
in  order  to  familiarize  them  with  the  practice  of  modern  power  plants  and 
shops. 

First  and  Second  Years 
See  Pages  47  and  48. 

Third  Year 

Lect.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 


per  week. 

per  week.  Page. 

Mathematics  VI 

2a 

0 

68 

Thermodvnamics  I 

1 

0 

121 

Thermodynamics  V 

2 

2 

122 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

General  Engineering  V 

1 

3 

103 

Electrical  Engineering  IV 

2 

2 

115 

Metallurgy  I 

1 

0 

95 

Mechanical  Engineering  I.  . . . , 

2 

0 

117 

Mechanical  Engineering  II.  . . 

3b 

0 

118 

Mechanical  Engineering  III.  . 

0 

6 

118 

Shop  Work 

0 

3 

123 

Hydraulic  Engineering  I 

2 

0 

106 

13a 

18a 

Total  31a 

14b 

Fourth  Year 

18b 

Total  32b 

Thermodynamics  III 

2 

3a 

121 

Thermodynamics  IV 

0 

3a,  4b 

122 

Electrical  Engineering  VII.  . . 

2 

2 

115 

Mechanical  Engineering  V.  . . . 

3 

6a,  3b 

119 

Mechanical  Engineering  VI.  . . 

2a,  lb 

0 

119 

Mechanical  Engineering  VIII. 

0 

3 

120 

Mechanical  Engineering  X.  . . . 

2 

0 

120 

Mechanical  Engineering  XI.  . 

2 

0 

120 

Hydraulic  Engineering  II.  . . . 

2 

0 

106 

Hydraulic  Engineering  III.  . . . 

0 

3b 

106 

Metallurgy  VIII 

0 

2a 

96 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

17a 

19a 

Total  36a 

16b 

15b 

Total  31b 

59 


G.— ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING 

The  instruction  in  the  first  two  years  of  the  course  in  Electrical 
Engineering  provides  for  a thorough  training  in  the  fundamental 
subjects  of  Mathematics,  Physics,  Chemistry  and  Mechanics,  including  suit- 
able work  in  the  various  laboratories.  Part  of  the  time  is  devoted  to 
elementary  drawing  and  shop  work.  In  the  third  year  the  work  consists  of 
an  introduction  to  the  general  principles  underlying  all  electrical  work  to- 
gether with  elementary  laboratory  work.  Considerable  time  is  devoted  to 
the  study  of  Thermodynamics  together  with  more  advanced  Mathematics 
and  Physics.  The  fourth  year  is  devoted  to  the  study  of  the  theory  and 
action  of  the  main  types  of  electrical  apparatus,  the  design  and  operation 
of  central  stations,  electric  lighting,  electric  railways  and  power  transmission 
together  with  a thorough  grounding  in  the  principles  underlying  the  electron 
lube. 

An  important  part  of  the  course  consists  in  solving  problems  such  as 
arc  frequently  met  with  in  practical  work.  In  this  way  the  student  is  trained 
in  the  application  of  theory  to  the  solution  of  practical  problems. 

Arrangements  are  made  for  occasional  visits  to  electrical  works. 

The  whole  course  is  designed  to  give  the  student  a thorough  under- 
standing of  the  general  principles  w’hich  constitute  the  basis  of  all  electrical 
work,  together  with  some  knowledge  of  their  practical  application.  No  effort 
is  made  to  give  that  intimate  knowledge  of  practical  details  which  experience 
alone  can  supply. 

Students  are  advised  not  to  enter  Course  G unless  they  have  taken  a high 
standing  in  Physics  III,  Physics  IV,  and  Mathematics  V. 

First  and  Second  Years 

See  Pages  47  and  48. 

Third  Year 


Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab.  Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week. 

Page. 

Mathematics  VII.  

2 

0 

69 

•Physics  V 

1 

2 

72 

Thermodynamics  I 

1 

0 

121 

General  Engineering  III 

0 

2 

103 

•Electrical  Engineering  II 

2 

3 

114 

•Electrical  Engineering  III 

3 

3 

114 

Electrical  Engineering  VI 

2b 

0 

115 

Mechanical  Engineering  I 

2 

0 

117 

Mechanical  Engineering  II 

3b 

0 

118 

Mechanical  Engineering  VII 

0 

3 

119 

Metallurgy  I 

1 

0 

95 

Hydraulic  Engineering  I 

2 

0 

106 

14a 

13a  Total  27a 

19b 

13b  Total  32b 

•Students  must  pass  these  subjects  before  entering  the  fourth  year. 


60 


Fourth  Year 


Lcct.  Hrs.  Lab.  Hrs. 
per  week,  per  week.  Page. 


Electrical  Engineering  V 

4 

6 

115 

Electrical  Engineering  VIII 

1 

3 

115 

Electrical  Engineering  IX 

2 

3 

116 

Electrical  Engineering  X 

1 

3 

116 

Electrical  Engineering  XI 

1 

3 

116 

Electrical  Engineering  XII 

2 

3 

116 

Hydraulic  Engineering  II 

2 

0 

106 

Hydraulic  Engineering  III 

0 

3a 

106 

Mechanical  Engineering  IV 

2 

0 

118 

Metallurgy  VI 

lb 

0 

96 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

14a 

18a 

Total  32a 

15b 

15b 

Total 

30  b 

Power  option  students  must  take  Electrical  Engineering 

IX 

and  X. 

Communication  option  students 

must  take  Electrical 

Engineering 

XI 

and  XII. 


H.— PHYSICS 


This  course  is  designed  to  fit  men  for  positions  as  physicists  in  research 
laboratories  and  industries. 

The  importance  of  a thorough  grounding  in  the  fundamental  subjects 
of  Physics,  Mathematics,  and  Chemistry,  cannot  be  over-emphasized,  so  these 
subjects  form  the  major  part  of  the  course.  The  engineer’s  point  of  view  is 
acquired  from  the  classes  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science,  while  the  breadth 
of  view  necessary  for  a research  worker  is  gained  from  the  advanced 
theoretical  classes  in  the  major  subjects  of  the  course. 


First  Year 
See  Page  47. 

Second  Year 


The  Second  Year  of  Any  Course 


61 


Third  Year 


Lect.  Hrs. 

Lab. 

Hrs. 

per  week. 

per  week.  Page 

Mathematics  VI 

2a 

0 

68 

Mathematics  XI.  (16b)* 

3b 

0 

69 

Physics  V 

2 

72 

Physics  VI.  (10b)*  

3b 

2b 

72 

Physics  VII.  (14a  and  13b)*  , 

3a,  2b 

2 

73 

Electrical  Engineering  II.  . . . 

2 

3 

114 

Electrical  Engineering  VI.  . . , 

2b 

0 

115 

German  I 

3 

0 

65 

— 

— 

— 

11a 

7a 

Total  18a 

16b 

Fourth  Year 

9b 

Total  25b 

Mathematics  X.  (22t)*  

2 

0 

69 

Phvsics  IX.  (16a  and  20b)*.., 

3 

0 

73 

Physics  X.  (17b)*  

3b 

. 73 

Physics  XIII 

0 

6 

74 

Electrical  Engineering  VIII.  . 

1 

3 

115 

Electrical  Engineering  XI.  . . . 

1 

3 

116 

Electrical  Engineering  XII.  . . 

2 

3 

116 

German  II  or  French  

2 

0 

66 

Economics  I 

2 

0 

66 

16a 

15a 

Total  31a 

15b 

18b 

Total  33b 

•The  No.  of  the  same  course  given  in  the  Arts  Faculty. 


COURSE  FOR  PROSPECTORS 

The  course  for  prospectors  is  designed  particularly  for  returned  men,  and 
any  others  interested,  who  may  wish  to  acquire  a preliminary  training  in  the 
study  of  rocks  and  minerals  and  the  methods  of  prospecting  for  ore  deposits. 
The  course  will  consist  of  eight  weeks  of  instruction  and  will  be  offered  as 
soon  as  a sufficient  number  of  candidates  are  available.  Since  it  is  essential 
that  field  trips  be  made  to  known  mineral  localities  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston, 
classes  will  be  held  at  a time  of  year  when  this  is  possible,  preferably  from 
late  February  to  late  April.  There  are  no  academic  requirements  for  candidates, 
but  attention  is  called  to  the  physical  requirements  of  anyone  wishing  to 
undertake  the  arduous  work  of  prospecting. 

A fee  of  $75.00  will  be  charged  for  each  candidate  taking  the  course, 
at  the  completion  of  which  a letter  certifying  to  his  attendance  will  be  supplied. 


62 


Outline  of  Classes 

Chemistry — Lecture-demonstrations  in  elementary  Chemistry 

3 hours  per  week  in  the  first  four  weeks. 

Department  of  Chemistry. 

Mineralogy — The  physical  properties  of  common  rock  and  ore  minerals,  in- 
cluding those  of  “strategic”  importance,  their  identification,  association, 
use,  and  valuation.  Laboratory  work  will  consist  of  identification  of 
minerals  by  physical  properties  and  blow  pipe  methods.  Rock  and  ore 
minerals  will  be  studied  in  groups  of  associated  minerals. 

4 hours  lectures  per  week. 

6 hours  laboratory  work  per  week. 

Department  of  Mineralogy. 

Geology — General  and  Economic.  Origin  and  mode  of  occurrence  of  rocks — 
sedimentary,  igneous,  and  metamorphic ; the  deformation  of  rocks,  crustal 
movements,  folding,  fracturing,  faulting,  shearing,  etc.,  the  geological  age 
column,  with  special  reference  to  the  pre-Cambrian;  in  economic  geology, 
the  principles  of  space  making,  space  filling,  replacement,  secondary  en- 
richment, examples  of  type  deposits  and  their  structures ; reading  and 
interpretation  of  geological  maps ; geology  and  physiography  of  Canada ; 
laboratory  work. 

5 hours  lectures  per  week. 

4 hours  laboratory  work  per  week. 

Department  of  Geology. 

Prospecting — Definitions — requirements,  prospecting  agreements,  suitable  dis- 
tricts, methods.  Staking  in  Ontario  and  other  important  laws.  Staking 
on  location,  trenching,  sampling,  diamond  drilling,  dip  needle  prospecting, 
underground  work,  preliminary  reports,  options. 

2 hours  lectures  per  week. 

Department  of  Mining. 

Assaying — A brief  course  in  assaying  gold  ores. 

5^2  hours  per  week. 

Department  of  Metallurgy. 

Mechanical  Drawing — The  use  of  drawing  instruments  and  lettering  pens. 
Simple  line  drawings,  tracings  of  maps.  Blue-printing,  white  printing. 

4 hours  per  week. 

Department  of  Drawing. 

Field  Trips — Four  field  trips  on  Saturdays  on  which  various  types  of  igneous, 
sedimentary,  and  metamorphic  rocks  and  mineral  deposits  of  iron,  lead, 
and  zinc,  mica,  barite  and  feldspar,  will  be  studied. 

GRADUATE  COURSE  IN  COMMERCE 

A year’s  course  in  Commerce  for  graduates  in  engineering  of  Queen’s 

and  other  universities.  The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  aid  in  preparing 

engineers  for  work  in  the  administrative  or  financial  branches  of  industry. 


The  year’s  work  will  consist  of  five  full  courses  or  their  equivalent  (in 
economics  and  commerce)  to  be  approved  by  the  Department. 

For  description  of  Commerce  courses,  see  the  Calendar  of  the  School 
of  Commerce  and  Administration. 

GRADUATE  COURSE  IN  GEOLOGY 

The  establishment  of  the  Miller  Memorial  Research  Cnair  in  Geology  has 
made  it  possible  to  give  graduate  work  in  Geology. 

The  courses  are  planned  to  give  to  those  men  who  have  graduated  in 
Mining  Engineering,  Geology  option,  the  additional  training  in  Geology  that  is 
needed  for  those  who  intend  to  undertake  exploration  and  development  work. 

For  those  who  intend  to  make  Geology  their  profession  a year’s  work 
satisfactorily  completed  at  Queen’s  is  equivalent  to  a year’s  graduate  work  at 
other  universities  and  is  accepted  as  such  at  most  of  the  important  graduate 
schools  in  (neology.  It  has  the  advantage  of  giving  to  graduates  who  intend 
to  practice  their  profession  in  Canada  an  opportunity  to  study  Canadian  local- 
ities and  problems  in  more  detail  than  is  otherwise  possible  since  the  collections 
of  material  from  the  important  mineral  deposits  of  the  Canadian  shield  arc 
large  and  fairly  complete,  and  there  is  also  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston  the 
opportunity  for  field  study  of  Pre-Cambrian  rocks. 

Graduates  in  courses  A,  Geology  option,  and  C in  the  Faculty  of  Applied 
Science  at  Queen’s  University  and  graduates  in  equivalent  courses  of  other 
universities  may  proceed  to  the  M.Sc.  degree.  (See  p.  45.)  The  courses  are 
open  only  to  graduates. 

For  outline  of  courses  see  page  86. 

COMBINED  COURSE  IN  ARTS  AND  APPLIED  SCIENCE,  A COURSE  LEADING 
TO  THE  DEGREES  OF  B.A.  AND  B.Sc.  IN  SEVEN  YEARS 

Students  taking  this  Course  are  required  to  have  Arts  Matriculation.  They 
will  pay  full  Arts  fees  for  the  first  three  years.  In  the  fourth  and  fifth 
years  they  will  register  in  both  Arts  and  Applied  Science  but  will  pay  fees  in 
Applied  Science  only.  They  will  register  in  the  sixth  and  seventh  years  in 

The  Arts  regulation  in  regard  to  back  classes  will  apply  for  the  first  four 
years, — (see  regulation  15,  page  80  of  the  Arts  calendar).  Students  with  back 
the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science  and  will  pay  fees  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied 
Science. 


64 


classes  in  Arts  will  not  be  permitted  to  make  up  these  classes  while  they 
are  registered  in  the  Faculty  of  Applied  Science. 

The  courses  must  be  taken  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  outlined  in  the 
calendar. 

The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts  will  be  conferred  on  candidates  who 
complete  five  years’  work  as  outlined  below,  with  a minimum  standing  of  fifty 
per  cent,  and  sixty-two  per  cent,  in  half  the  classes. 

First  Year 

English  1. 

French  1 or  ♦German  1 or  ♦Greek  1 or  Latin  1. 

Mathematics  1. 

Physics  1. 

Chemistry  1. 

*Stu^ents  who  have  not  matriculated  in  German  or  Greek  will  have  to  take 
German,  A or  Greek  A before  registering  in  German  1 or  Greek  1.  In  such 
cases  the  A course  will  not  count  towards  the  degree. 

Second  Year 

English  2. 

One  course  not  already  offered,  to  be  selected  from  French  1,  2,  German  1,  2, 
Greek  1,  2,  Latin  1,  2. 

A course  in  History  or  Economics  or  Politics. 

Mathematics  I (Applied  Science). 

Physics  II  (Applied  Science). 

Third  Year 

Three  courses  in  Arts  to  be  selected  from  courses  which  will  not  be  covered 
later  in  Applied  Science. 

Chemistry  I (Applied  Science). 

Mathematics  III  (Applied  Science). 

Mathematics  IV  (Applied  Science). 

Fourth  Year 

Philosophy  1 or  2. 

Two  courses  in  Arts  to  be  selected  from  courses  which  will  not  be  covered 
later  in  Applied  Science. 

Mathematics  II  (Applied  Science). 

Physics  I (Applied  Science). 

Drawing  (Applied  Science). 

Surveying  (Applied  Science). 

Projection  (Applied  Science). 

Fifth  Year 

The  regular  second  year  Science  programme.  The  work  of  this  year  includes 
courses  in  Mathematics,  Physics  and  Chemistry  which  will  be  counted 
towards  a degree  in  Arts. 

Sixth  and  Seventh  Years 

The  sixth  and  seventh  years  are  the  same  as  the  third  and  fourth  years 
of  the  Course  leading  to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science. 


65 


SUBJECTS  OF  STUDY 


ENGLlbH 

Assistant  Professor — C J.  Vincent,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

Lecturer — W.  Angus,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

First  Year  English 

This  course  consists  of  the  writing  of  weekly  compositions  and  the  study 
of  prescribed  works  by  the  following  authors : Huxley,  Butler,  Lewis,  Wells, 
Galsworthy,  Shaw,  Day,  etc. 

Foerster  and  Steadman,  Writing  and  'Thinking  (Boston:  Houghton 
Mifflin  Company)  ; O.  J.  Campbell,  J.  Van  Gundy,  and  Caroline  Shrodes,  edd. 
Patterns  For  Living  (New  York:  MacMillan  Co.). 

Lectures — Sections  1-4,  Monday  and  Wednesday  8-9. 

Sections  5-8,  Monday  and  Wednesday  1-2. 


GERMAN 

Professor — Heinrich  Henel,  Ph.D. 

GERMAN  I 

For  third  year  students  in  Courses  B and  H,  and  fourth  year  students 
in  Course  C. 

This  course  is  intended  to  meet  the  needs  of  students  who  enter  the 
University  with  little  or  no  knowledge  of  German.  The  work  comprises  a 
study  of  elementary  German  grammar  and  the  reading  of  easy  scientific 
literature. 

Text-books — Hagboldt  and  Kaufmann,  A Brief  Course  in  German 
(Heath)  ; Wild,  An  Introduction  to  Scientific  German  (Oxford). 

Lectures — Monday,  Wednesday  and  Friday  at  4. 

Professor  Henel. 


66 


GERMAN  II 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  B and  H or  any  Science  students. 

This  course  is  designed  for  students  who  are  doing  advanced  work  in 
chemistry,  physics,  geology  and  mineralogy.  Prerequisite : Matriculation  in 
German,  German  A (Arts),  or  (German  I. 

Text-books — Wizinger,  German  Science  Readings  (Crofts)  ; Curts,  Read' 
ings  in  Scientific  and  Technical  German  (Holt)  ; Patterson,  Germcm-English 
Dictionary  for  Chemists  (Wiley)  ; scientific  journals  bearing  on  each  student’s 

special  field. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday  at  9. 

Professor  Henel. 


FRENCH 
French  I. 

For  prescription,  hours -^and  instructors,  see  the  Arts  Calendar. 


ECONOMICS 

Economics  I. 

Professor — J.  C.  Cameron,  M.  Com.  (Head  of  the  Industrial  Relations 

Section) 

Required  of  fourth  year  students  in  all  courses. 

This  is  a business-background  course  for  engineers.  The  main  emphasis 
is  on  personnel  management. 

Assigned  Readings. 

Lectures — Monday  at  9,  and  one  additional  hour  to  be  arranged. 

Professor  Cameron. 


67 


MATHEMATICS. 

The  N.  F.  Dupuis  Professor  in  Mathematics — J.  Matheson,  M.A. 

Professor — C.  F.  Gummer,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 

Professor — N.  Miller,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor — K.  P.  Johnston,  B.A.,  B.Sc. 

Assistant  Professor — G.  L.  Edgett,  M.A.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professor — I.  Halperin,  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (on  active  service'*'). 

Assistants— J.  E.  Staples,  B.A.,  R.  H.  Hay,  M.Sc.,  P.  T.  Demos,  B.Sc., 
N.  A.  Williams,  B.Sc. 

An  essential  part  of  the  student's  training  in  all  courses  in  Mathematics 
is  the  training  in  accurate  computation.  He  should  cultivate  the  habit  of  care 
and  accuracy  in  all  his  numerical  work. 

MATHEMATICS  I 

For  first  year  students  in  all  courses. 

Trigonometry,  to  cover  spherical  trigonometry  and  a review  and  ex- 
tension of  the  more  important  parts  of  plane  trigonometry. 

Text  Book — Rider,  Plane  and  Spherical  Trigonometry  (MacMillan). 
Sections  1-4,  Tuesday  and  Thursday,  1-2;  Sections  5-8,  Tuesday  and  Thurs- 
day, 9-10. 

Messrs.  Hay,  Demos  and  Williams. 

MATHEMATICS  II 

For  first  year  students  in  all  courses. 

Calculus.  A course  covering  differentiation  and  the  simpler  methods 
of  integration  with  applications  to  rates,  maxima  and  minima  and  the  finding 
of  areas,  volumes,  surfaces,  fluid  pressure,  centres  of  gravity,  moments  of 
inertia,  etc. 

Text  Book — Phillips,  Calculus  (John  Wiley  and  Sons). 

Sections  1-4,  Tuesday  and  Thursday,  2-3;  Sections  5-8,  Tuesday  and 
Thursday,  10-11. 

Professors  Miller  and  Edgett  and  Mr.  Staples. 

MATHEMATICS  III 

For  first  year  students  in  all  courses. 

Analytic  Geometry.  A course  in  plane  analytic  geometry. 

Text  Book — Brink,  Analytic  Geometry,  Revised  Edition  (D.  Appleton- 
Century  Co.). 

Sections  1-2,  Wednesday  10-11,  Friday  3-4;  Sections  3-4,  Monday,  3-4, 
Wednesday,  10-11;  Sections  5-8,  Wednesday,  3-4.  Friday,  1-2. 

Professor  Gummer  and  Mr.  Staples. 

^ Lieutenant,  Royal  Canadian  Artillery, 


68 


MATHEMATICS  IV. 

For  first  year  students  in  all  courses. 

Synthetic  Solid  Geometry,  covering  the  properties  of  the  principal 
solid  figures,  methods  and  formulae  for  areas  and  volumes,  etc. 

Text  Book — Kern  and  Bland,  Solid  Mensuration  (John  Wiley  and  Sons). 

Astronomy,  including  the  fundamental  principles  of  the  subject,  such  as 
the  systems'  of  co-ordinates,  planetary  motion,  time,  the  use  of  the  Nautical 
Almanac. 

Sections  1-4,  Monday  and  Friday,  10-11 ; Sections  5-8,  Monday  and  Fri- 
day, 3-4. 

Professors  Johnston  and  Edgett. 


MATHEMATICS  V. 

For  second  year  students  in  all  courses. 

Calculus  and  Algebra.  This  course  continues  the  Calculus  of  Mathe- 
matics II  and  covers  certain  important  parts  of  Algebra.  It  includes,  along 
with  their  applications,  such  topics  as  annuities,  curvature,  convergence  of 
series,  Taylor’s  series,  integration  of  more  difficult  forms,  and  simple 
differential  equations.  ' 

Text  Book — Phillips,  Calculus  (John  Wiley  and  Sons). 

Monday,  Wednesday  and  Friday  11-12. 

Professors  Gummer,  Miller  and  Edgett. 


MATHEMATICS  VI. 

For  third  year  students  in  courses  F and  H. 

A continuation  of  Mathematics  V to  cover  certain  topics  in  analytic  solid 
geometry  and  in  addition,  partial  differentiation,  maxima  and  minima  for 
functions  of  several  variables,  double  and  triple  integration  and  simple  differ- 
ential equations  with  applications. 

Text  Book — Phillips,  Calculus  (John  Wiley  and  Sons). 

Wednesday  and  Friday,  10-11,  first  term. 


Professor  Miller. 


69 


MATHEMATICS  VTI. 

For  third  year  students  in  course  G. 

Mathematics  VI  and  a continuation  to  include  such  topics  as  hyperbolic 
fjuictions,  the  catenary,  a more  detailed  study  of  differential  equations,  in- 
troduction to  Fourier  series  and  the  use  of  the  complex  variable. 

Text  Book — Miller,  First  Course  in  Differential  Equations  (Oxford 
University  Press). 

Wednesday  and  Friday,  10-11. 

Professor  Miller. 


MATHEMATICS  X. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  course  H. 

A course  in  the  Theory  of  Functions  of  a Complex  Variable. 

Text  Book — Osgood,  Functions  of  a Complex  Variable  (Stechert). 
Wednesday  and  Friday,  9- 10. 

Professor  Miller. 

MATHEMATICS  XI. 

For  third  year  students  in  course  H. 

A course  in  Differential  Equations  to  include  the  more  important 
methods  of  solution  of  ordinary  differential  equations,  and  a brief  intro- 
duction to  partial  differential  equations. 

Text  Book — Miller,  First  Course  in  Differential  Equations  (Oxford 
University  Press). 

Tuesday,  Thursday  and  Saturday,  8-9,  second  term. 

Professor  Gummer. 

ASTRONOMY  II. 

For  second  year  students  in  courses  E,  F,  and  G. 

Applications  of  Spherical  Trigonometry  to  Astronomy.  The  method  of 
least  squares. 

Sections  1-6,  Saturday,  10-11;  Sections  7-12,  Tuesday,  10-11. 


Professor  Johnston. 


70 


PHYSICS 

Professor — A.  L.  Clark,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C. 

The  Chown  Research  Professor — J.  A.  Gray,  B.Sc.,  D.Sc.,  O.B.E., 
F.R.S.,  F.R.S.C. 

The  Robert  Waddell  Professor  of  Experimental  Physics — J.  K. 
Robertson,  M.A.,  F.R.S.C. 

Professor — K Flammer,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant  Professors — H.  M.  Cave,  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (on  leave  of  absence^*')  ; 
B.  W.  Sargent,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C.  (on  leave  of  absence*)  ; E.  E. 
Watson,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. ; H.  W.  Harkness,  B.Sc.,  B.A.,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Lecturers — R.  H.  Hay,  M.Sc.,  R.  A.  Chipman,  Ph.D. 

Instructor — A.  Vibert  Douglas,  M.B.E.,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Demonstrator — R.  A.  Burr,  B.Sc. 

The  work  in  Physics  is  carried  on  in  lecture  and  laboratory  courses  which 
run  parallel  to  each  other.  In  the  lecture  room  the  fundamental  principles  arc 
developed  and  applied,  experimental  demonstrations  given  and  many  prob- 
lems solved.  In  all  classes  in  Physics  weekly  exercises  are  required  of  stu- 
dents. In  the  laboratory  a large  number  of  experiments  are  perform- 
ed. These  are  designed  to  train  the  student  in  manipulation  of  apparatus  and 
instruments  of  precision,  to  teach  him  to  make  accurate  measurements  and  to 
give  practice  in  properly  recording,  interpreting  and  reducing  experimental 
data. 

In  all  the  courses  in  Physics,  the  work  in  the  laboratories  will  be  counted 
as  a certain  percentage  of  the  whole  work  of  the  session.  In  estimating  the 
standing  in  the  laboratory  work,  both  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  work 
done  will  be  considered. 

Physics  I and  II,  together  forming  a complete  introductory  course,  are 
taken  by  all  first  year  students.  The  laboratory  work  of  this  year  is  arranged 
to  supplement  the  lectures  in  both  Physics  I and  II,  and  credit  tor  this  work 
is  given  on  the  written  papers  in  both  subjects.  Students  in  both  classes  have 
opportunity  for  assistance  by  Douglas  Tutors.  (See  page  38). 

PHYSICS  I. 

Required  of  all  first  year  students. 

Mechanics,  Properties  of  Matter,  and  Heat. 

Lectures — Sections  1-4,  Monday  11-12,  Thursday  3-4. 

— Sections  5-8,  Monday  4-5,  Thursday  8-9. 

Professors  Watson  and  Harkness. 

♦War  Research,  National  Research  Council,  Ottawa. 


71 


PHYSICS  II. 

Required  of  all  first  year  students. 

A course  of  lectures  of  two  hours  per  week  on  Magnetism,  Electricity, 
Wave  Motion,  Sound,  and  Light.  These  topics  are  discussed  mathematically 
and  illustrated  by  experiments. 

Lecture s—Stct\ons  1-4,  Wednesday  and  Friday  at  11. 

Sections  5-8,  Wednesday  4-5,  Friday  2-3. 

Professors  Robertson,  Cave,  and  Mr.  Hay. 

Laboratory — Section  1,  Monday,  1-3,  Section  2,  Monday,  3-5. 

Section  3,  Thursday  8-10,  Section  4,  Thursday  10-12. 

Section  5,  Monday  8-10,  Section  6,  Monday  10-12. 

Section  7,  Thursday  1-3,  Section  8,  SaUirday,  9-11. 

PHYSICS  III. 

This  class  required  of  students  in  the  second  year  in  courses  E,  F,  G. 

This  course  of  lectures  is  a continuation  of  Physics  I.  A general  review  of 
the  important  fundamental  principles  of  Physics  occupies  the  first  few  weeks. 
These  are  then  applied  to  problems  dealing  with  Motion  in  a Circle,  Simple 
Harmonic  Motion,  Composition  of  Simple  Harmonic  Motions  with  applications, 
Moments  of  Inertia,  Rotation,  Friction  of  Belts,  Pivots  and  Bearings, 
Oscillations,  Centre  of  Percussion,  Elasticity  in  Stretching,  Bending  and 
Twisting,  Energy  and  its  Transformations. 

The  laboratory  work,  which  runs  parallel  with  the  lectures,  is  a con- 
tinuation of  the  work  of  the  first  year. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Friday,  9-10. 

Professor  Harkness. 

Laboratory — Sections  1-6,  Wednesday,  1-3;  Sections  7-12,  Friday,  1-3. 

Professors  Sargent,  Watson  and  Harkness, 

PHYSICS  IV. 

This  class  which  is  required  of  students  in  the  second  year  in  Courses- 
E,  F,  G,  consists  of  (a)  two  lectures  per  week,  (b)  a laboratory  course  of 
two  hours  per  week. 

In  the  lectures,  fundamental  electrical  ideas  are  discussed,  with  special 
emphasis  on  quantitative  relations.  Problems  are  assigned  weekly  dealing 
with  basic  ideas  of  Electrostatics,  Magnetism,  Electromagnetism,  Electro- 
dynamics, Electromagnetic  Induction,  and  Alternating  Currents. 

The  laboratory  course  includes  a series  of  experiments  designed  to  train 
the  student  in  standard  electrical  measurements,  as  well  as  to  illustrate  work 
discussed  in  lectures. 

Lectures — Wednesday,  9-10,  Friday,  8-9.  Professor  Watson. 

Laboratory — Sections  1-4,  Saturday,  8-10  (a),  Monday,  1-3  (b)  ; Sections 
5-8,  Thursday,  1-3;  Sections  9-12,  Thursday,  3-5. 

Professors  Sargent,  Watson,  Harkness,  and  Mr.  Burr. 


72 


PHYSICS  XIV. 

This  class  is  required  of  students  in  the  second  year  in  courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M. 
There  are  three  lectures  per  week  in  the  first  term  and  two  in  the  second, 
four  laboratory  hours  in  the  first  term  and  two  in  the  second. 

The  work  comprises  nearly  all  of  the  work  of  Physics  III  and  parts  of 
Physics  IV.  Approximately  two-thirds  of  the  time  is  given  to  Mechanics 
and  one-third  to  Electricity  and  Magnetism. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Thursday,  10-11;  Tuesday  10-11  (a). 

Professors  Flammer,  Sargent,  and  Dr.  Chipman. 
Laboratory — Section  1,  Mo7tday,  3-5  (a)  ; Tuesday,  1-3. 

Section  2,  Monday,  1-3  (a)  ; Tuesday,  3-5. 

Professors  Sargent,  Cave,  Harkness,  and  Mr.  Hay. 


PHYSICS  V. 

Required  of  students  in  third  year  of  Courses  G and  H. 

The  work  of  this  class  comprises  a course  of  lectures  on  the  Elementary, 
Mathematical  Theory  of  Electricity  and  Magnetism,  and  a course  of  labora- 
tory experiments  in  advanced  electrical  measurement. 

In  the  lectures  are  treated  such  -topics  as  the  more  important  laws  and 
theories  in  Electrostatics,  the  laws  of  the  Magnetic  Field,  Electrodynamics 
and  Electromagnetic  Induction.  At  each  lecture  problems  are  assigned  for 
solution  and  these  are  later  discussed  in  class. 

In  the  laboratory  the  students  make  detailed  study  of  several  groups  of 
experiments.  These  comprise  careful  study  of  galvanometers  using  both  steady 
and  transient  currents,  measurem.ents  of  capacities,  permeability,  insulation 
resistance,  and  self  and  mutual  inductance,  the  use  of  the  potentiometer  in 
measurement  of  electro-motive  force  of  cells,  calibration  of  voltmeters  and 
ammeters,  and  study  of  electrical  waves  and  discharge  phenomena. 

Lecture — Thursday,  9-10,  first  term. 

Thursday  4-5,  second  term. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  2-4. 

Professor  Flammer. 


PHYSICS  VI. 

Elementary  Theoretical  Mechanics. 

Required  of  students  in  third  year  of  Course  H. 

This  course  consists  of  a series  of  lectures  in  which  the  elements  of 
Statics  and  Dynamics  of  a Particle  are  discussed. 

Lectures — Tuesday,  Thursday  and  Saturday,  10-11,  second  term. 
Laboratory — Monday^  1-3,  second  term. 

Professors  Flammer  and  Watson. 


73 


PHYSICS  VII. 

Required  of  students  in  third  year  of  Course  H. 

HEAT.  This  part  of  the  course  is  an  introduction  to  Thermodynamics, 
beginning  with  a detailed  discussion  of  the  isothermal  and  the  basis  of 
thermometry  and  continuing  with  the  development  of  the  laws  of  Thermo- 
dynamics and  a discussion  of  entropy,  its  properties  and  applications. 

ELECTRICITY.  The  general  aim  of  this  part  of  the  course  is  to 
acquaint  the  student  with  the  modern  developments  in  such  branches  of 
Physics  as  Radiation,  X-rays,  Conduction  of  Electricity  through  Gases, 
Radioactivity,  etc. 

Text  Book — Ions,  Electrons  and  Ionising  Radiations,  by  J.  A.  Crowther. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Wednesday,  11-12;  and  Friday,  11-12,  first  term. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-3. 

Dean  Clark,  Professors  Gray  and  Cave,  and  Mr.  Hay. 


PHYSICS  IX. 


Required  of  students  in  fourth  year  of  Course  H. 

MECHANICS  OF  RIGID  AND  ELASTIC  BODIES.  This  part  of 
the  course  includes  a discussion  of  such  topics  as  the  Motion  of  a Rigid 
Body,  Ellipsoids  of  Inertia,  Motion  with  Fixed  Axis  and  Fixed  Point, 
Euler’s  Equations,  and  applications  to  motion  of  the  symmetrical  top;  Stress 
and  Strain  relations  in  Elastic  Bodies,  Elastic  Constants. 

* 

ELECTRICITY.  The  lectures  in  this  part  of  the  course  are  on  advanced 
Electrodynamics. 

Monday,  Wednesday  and  Friday,  11-12. 

Professor  Flammer. 


PHYSICS  X. 

Required  of  students  in  fourth  year  of  Course  H. 

KINETIC  THEORY  OF  GASES.  This  part  of  the  course  includes 
the  topics  of  the  Maxwellian  distribution  of  velocities,  free  path  phenomena, 
viscosity,  thermal  conductivity,  diffusion,  Van  der  Waal’s  equation,  and  the 
quantum  theory  as  applied  to  specific  heats  and  to  radiation. 

PHYSICAL  OPTICS.  The  lectures  in  this  part  of  the  course  are  on 
the  theory  and  phenomena  of  Physical  Optics,  including  a discussion  of  Wave 
Motion,  Diffraction,  Interference  Spectroscopes,  Polarization  and  Double 
Refraction. 

Text  Book — Kinetic  Theory  of  Gases  by  Bloch. 


Lectures — First  term,  Tuesday,  10-11,  Thursday,  11-12,  and  Friday,  10-11; 
second  term,  Tuesday  and  Thursdfiy,  11-12. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  1-4,  second  term. 


Professors  Gray  and  Robertson. 


PHYSICS  XIII. 


Required  of  fourth  year  students  in  Course  H. 

An  advanced  laboratory  course  of  experiments  in  Optics,  Electricity  and 
Magnetism  and  Heat. 

Thursday  and  Friday,  1-4.  Dean  Clark  and  Professor  Robertson. 

PHYSICAL  LABORATORIES. 

The  Physics  Department  is  located  in  Ontario  Hall,  and  contains  two  large  lec- 
ture rooms,  with  seating  capacities  of  125,  and  90  respectively,  a small  lecture  room 
with  seating  capacity  of  60,  two  small  class  rooms,  three  large  rooms  equipped  as 
general  elementary  laboratories,  and  another  room  equipped  for  advanced 
work,  offices  for  the  staff,  research  rooms,  a large,  well-lighted  library  and 
reading  room,  smaller  rooms  for  special  purposes,  apparatus,  and  store  rooms. 
The  equipment  for  lecture  table  and  laboratory  is  steadily  growing  and  com- 
prises most  of  the  more  important  pieces  of  apparatus  for  these  purposes. 

Research  in  Physics  is  being  carried  on  by  members  of  the  staff  and  by 
senior  students.  It  is  desired  to  extend, this  activity  as  far  as  possible.  A 
limited  number  of  workers  who  desire  to  use  the  facilities  of  the  laboratory 
may  be  admitted  and  assisted.  Particulars  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Professor  of  Physics. 


LIBRARY 

The  Departmental  library  contains  text-books,  works  of  reference,  and 
journals  devoted  to  Physics  and  related  subjects.  These  may  be  freely  consulted 
by  the  student  in  the  reading  room  between  the  hours  of  8 a.m.  and  5 p.m. 
Books  may  in  general  be  taken  from  the  building  overnight  upon  reporting  to  a 
member  of  the  staff  and  making  a record  in  a book  provided  for  that  purpose. 
Books  may  be  kept  longer  than  one  night  at  a time  only  by  special  permission. 


CHEMISTRY. 

Professor — J.  A.  McRae,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C.,  F.R.S.C. 

Professor  of  Industrial  Chemistry — L.  F.  Goodwin,  F.C.G.I.,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C. 
Associate  Professor — Grenville  B.  Frost,  B.A.,  Ph.D. 

Associate  Professor — L.  A.  Munro,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.C.I.C. 

Associate  Professor — J.  F.  Logan,  M.A.,  Ph.  D. 

Associate  Professor — Roy  L.  Dorrance,  M.A.,  F.C.I.C. 

Lecturer — E.  G.  Taylor,  B.Sc.,  Sc.M.,  Ph.D.,  A.I.C. 

Lecturer — R.  N.  Jones,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. 


75 


Canadian  Industries  Ltd.  Fellow — R.  Y.  Moir,  M.A. 
Reuben  Wells  Leonard  Fellow — L.  M.  Wise,  B.A. 
Milton  Hersey  Fellow — W.  W.  Maynard,  B.Sc. 
William  Neish  Fellow — 

Demonstrators — A.  G.  Stewart,  B.A.,  C.  Gogek,  B.Sc. 


Second  or 

Research 

First 

Advanced 

Training 

Courses. 

Courses. 

Courses. 

General  Chemistry  

I 

II,  III 

IV 

Qualitative  Analysis  

I 

— 

Organic  Chemistry  

I,  V 

II 

IV 

Quantitative  Analysis  

I,  11 

IV 

Physical  Chemistry 

I 

II,  HI 

IV 

Industrial  Chemistry  

I,  II 

Hla 

IV 

Colloid  Chemistry  

la 

H 

IV 

General  Chemistry  I. 

For  all  first  year  students  in  Science. 

The  history,  methods  of  preparation,  properties  and  industrial  applications 
of  the  more  important  non-metallic  elements  and  their  compounds  are  dis- 
cussed in  the  lectures  and  the  fundamental  theories,  laws  and  principles  of 
chemistry  emphasized.  The  first  part  of  the  laboratory  work  consists  of  a 
number  of  experiments  illustrating  gravimetric  and  volumetric  procedures,  in 
the  second  part  the  qualitative  reactions  of  the  acid  radicals  are  studied.  A 
set  of  problems  is  assigned  each  week. 

Text-books  — Sherwood  Taylor,  Inorganic  and  Theoretical  Chemistry, 
(Heinemann)  ; Partington  and  Stratton,  Intermediate  Chemical  Calculations 
(Macmillan) . 

Lectures — Monday,  Wednesday,  Friday  at  9,  or  Monday,  Wednesday 
at  2 and  Friday  at  11,  in  room  310,  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Sections  5-8,  Tuesday,  1-4.  Sections  1-4,  Wednesday,  1-4  in 
laboratories  305,  308,  301  Gordon  Hall. 


Professor  Dorrance. 


76 


General  Chemistry  II. 

For  students  in  Courses  EFG  Second  Year. 

This  lecture  course  is  designed  to  supplement  Chemistry  I,  including  such 
chemical  principles,  facts  and  theories  as  find  application  in  Civil,  Mechanical 
and  Electrical  Engineering.  Some  of  the  topics  dealt  with  are  the  chemistry 
of  the  metals,  fundamental  chemical  theory,  the  laws  of  solution,  and  its 
measurement,  the  colloidal  state,  simple  organic  types  and  electrochemistry. 
These  topics  are  illustrated  by  lecture  experiments,  problems  and  technical 
applications  appearing  in  current  Engineering  Journals. 

Text-books — Chapin,  Second  Year  College  Chemistry  (Wiley  and  Sons)  ; 
Sherwood  Taylor,  Inorganic  and  Theoretical  Chemistry  (Heinemann). 

Reference  text — Gyngell,  Applied  Chemistry  for  Engineers. 

Lectures — Thursday  8-9,  and  Saturday  11-12. 

Professor  Munro. 


General  Chemistry  III. 

Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  third  year. 

A study  of  inorganic  chemistry  based  on  the  modern  form  of  the  periodic 
system  and  the  electronic  theory  of  valency. 

Lectures — Mondiny  and  Wednesday  at  9. 

Professor  Frost. 

General  and  Inorganic  Chemistry  IV. 

Research  Training 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing  thesis  option  in  General 
and  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

Professors  Frost,  Munro,  and  Dr.  Taylor. 


Qualitative  Analysis  I. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M,  second  year. 

The  lectures  deal  with  the  theory  of  analytical  chemistry.  The  modern 
concept  of  the  structure  of  matter  is  related  to  analytical  behaviour.  '1  he 
development  and  application  of  the  laws  of  equilibrium  .:nd  solutions  are 
emphasized. 

The  laboratory  work  consists  of  the  systematic  analysis  of  basic  and  acid 
ions  leading  to  the  analysis  of  alloys,  salt  mixtures,  minerals  and  various 
commercial  products. 


77 


• Texts — Engelder,  Semi-Micro  Qualitative  Analysis,  (Wiley),  Munro  and 
Pearce,  Laboratory  Chart. 

Reference  Texts — Treadwell  and  Hall.  Vol.  1.  (Wiley)  ; Curtman, 
Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis  (Macmillan)  ; Sherwood  Taylor,  Inorganic  and 
Theoretical  Chemistry  (Heinemann). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  11-12,  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Friday,  1-4;  Saturday,  9-12.  Professor  Munro. 

Organic  Chemistry  I. 

For  students  in  Courses  B and  D,  third  year. 

An  introductory  course  on  the  chemistry  of  the  compounds  of  carbon. 
The  principal  classes  of  aliphatic  and  aromatic  compounds  are  studied  to 
illustrate  both  their  theoretical  and  practical  importance.  In  the  laboratory 
a number  of  aliphatic  and  aromatic  compounds  is  prepared  to  illustrate  typical 
operations  employed  in  organic  chemistry. 

Texts — Conant,  The  Chemistry  of  Organic  Compounds  (Macmillan)  ; 
Adams  and  Johnson,  Laboratory  Experiments  in  Organic  Chemistry,  (Mac- 
millan). 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  at  11  in  room  310  Gordon  Hall 
(Wednesdays)  and  in  Nicol  Hall  (Fridays). 

Laboratory — B students,  Monday,  1-4  in  rooms  213  and  201,  Gordon  Hall. 

D students,  Wednesday,  1-4,  first  term,  and  Saturday^  9-12, 
in  the  second  term. 

Professors  McRae  and  Logan. 

Organic  Chemistry  V. 

For  students  in  Course  M,  third  year. 

An  introductory  course  in  Organic  Chemistry  for  students  in  Metallurgy. 

Text-book — Garard,  Introduction  to  Organic  Chemistry  (Wiley). 

Lecture — Friday,  11-12. 


Dr.  Jones. 


78 


Organic  Chemistry  II. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year. 

The  principal  reactions  used  in  synthetic  organic  chemistry  with  practical 
illustrations  in  the  laboratory.  The  more  detailed  chemistry  of  the  aliphatic 
and  aromatic  series  and  of  the  simpler  types  of  heterocylic  compounds. 
Laboratory  practice  in  qualitative  and  quantitative  organic  chemistry. 

Text-books — Conant,  The  Chemistry  of  Orgpnic  Compounds  (Macmillan)  ; 
Adams  and  Johnson,  Laboratory  Experiments  in  Organic  Chemistry  (Mac- 
millan). 

Books  of  Reference — Karrer,  Organic  Chemistry  (Elsevier  Co)  ; Francis, 
Notes  on  Organic  Chemistry  (Arnold)  ; Hickinbottom,  Reactions  of  Organic 
Compounds  (Longmans,  Green,  and  Co.)  ; Kipping  and  Kipping,  Perkin  and 
Kipping’s  Organic  Chemistry,  Part  III ; Gattermann-Wieland,  Laboratory 
Methods  of  Organic  Chemistry  (Macmillan). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  at  11,  in  room  105,  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4;  Saturday,  9-12,  in  room  213,  Gordon  Hall. 

Professor  McRae. 


Organic  Chemistry  IV. 

Research  Training. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing  thesis  option  in  Organic 
Chemistry.  Professor  McRae  and  Dr.  Jones. 


Quantitative  Analysis  I. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  C,  D and  M,  third  year. 

This  is  an  elementary  course  designed  to  illustrate  the  fundamental 
procedures  of  Quantitative  Analysis. 

Text — Talbot,  Quantitative  Chemical  Analysis. 

Lectures — A and  C,  Thursday  1-2,  D and  M,  Wednesday  10-11,  in 
room  4(K),  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4  for  D,  Friday,  1-4  for  C and  M,  Tuesday, 
1-4,  Section  1 of  A.  Saturday  8-11,  Section  2 of  A. 


Professor  Dorrance. 


79 


Quantitative  Analysis  II. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  third  year. 

The  theory  and  technique  of  gravimetric  and  volumetric  analysis. 

Texts — Talbot,  Quantitative  Analysis;  Vogel,  A Text  Book  of  Quanti- 
tative Inorganic  Analysis  (Longmans). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday  at  8,  in  room  400,  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  1-4  and  Thursday,  1-4;  Saturday,  8-12,  second 
term,  in  207,  210  Gordon  Hall. 

, . Professor  Dorrance. 


Quantitative  Analysis  IV. 

Research  Training. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing  thesis  option  in  Quanti- 
tative Analysis.  Professor  Dorrance. 


Physical  Chemistry  I. 


For  students  in  Courses  B,  C,  D,  M,  third  year. 

The  pressure-volume  relations  of  gases ; the  nature  of  the  liquid  and 
solid  states ; solutions ; chemical  and  phase  equilibria ; thermochemistry ; 
chemical  kinetics,  and  other  related  topics. 

Text — Millard,  Physical  Chemistry  for  Colleges  (McGraw-Hill). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  at  9,  in  room  105,  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Friday,  1-4  for  B,  Tuesd^ay,  1-4  for  C,  Wednesday  1-4  (a) 
and  Saturday  9-12  (b)  for  M,  in  115,  116  Gordon  Hall. 

Students  in  course  D will  take  physical  chemical  laboratory,  in  the 
Chemical  Engineering  Department,  under  Dr.  L.  F.  Goodwin. 

Tuesday,  1-4,  D.  Professor  Frost. 

Physical  Chemistry  H. 


Electrochemistry. 

For  students  in  Courses  B,  D,  M,  fourth  year. 

A discussion  of  the  electrochemistry  of  aqueous  solutions ; applications 
to  chemical  analysis  and  to  industrial  processes,  including  fused  systems. 

The  laboratory  work  includes  electrolytic  preparations,  electrical  measure- 
ments of  the  properties  of  solutions  and  electrometric  titrations. 

Text — Thompson,  Theoretical  and  Applied  Electrochemistry.  (Macmillan). 

Reference  Texts  — Glasstone,  The  Electrochemistry  of  Solutions 
(Methuen)  ; Creighton  and  Koehler,  Electrochemistry , Vols.  I and  1 1 
(Wiley)  ; Kolthoff  and  Laitenen,  pH  and  Electrotitrations  (McGraw-Hill)  ; 
Mantell,  Industrial  Electrochemistry  (McGraw-Hill). 

Lectures — Monday  at  10  and  Tuesday  at  8. 

Laboratory — B and  M,  Wednesday  1-4;  D,  Thursday  2-5. 


Dr.  Taylor. 


80 


Physical  Chemistry  III. 

Advanced  Physical  Chemistry. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year. 

The  principles  of  chemical  thermodynamics  and  their  application  to 
chemical  problems. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  .at  10,  in  105  Gordon  Hall. 

Laboratory — Friday,  1-4,  in  116  Gordon  Hall. 

Professor  Frost. 

Physical  Chemistry  IV. 

Research  Training. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing  thesis  option  in  Physical 
Chemistry.  Professors  Frost,  Dorrance,  Munro,  and  Dr.  Taylor. 


Industrial  Chemistry  I. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

For  outline  of  topics  see  under  Department  of  Chemical  Engineering, 


Industrial  Chemistry  II. 

For  students  in  courses  B and  D,  third  year. 

D students,  third  year,  see  under  Department  of  Chemical  Engineering. 

The  lectures  deal  with  the  following  topics:  wood,  coal  and  other  fuels: 
for  steam  raising  and  drinking  purposes ; the  petroleiun  industry ; in- 
dustrial gases,  gas  producers,  by-product  coke  and  illuminating  gas;  sulphuric 
acid,  alkali  and  ammonia;  hydrochloric,  nitric  and  acetic  acids,  acetone; 
electric  furnace  products,  fertilizers,  explosives  and  artificial  silk,  manu- 
facture of  wood  pulp. 

In  the  laboratory  typical  processes,  such  as  dissolution,  crystallization, 
water  and  gas  analysis,  ordinary  and  fractional  distillation,  preparations 
involving  incomplete  chemical  reaction,  are  studied,  emphasis  being  laid  on 
systematic  records  and  interpretation  of  results. 

Text — E.  R.  Riegel,  Industrial  Chemistry, 


81 


Handbooks — Hodgman-Lange,  Handbook  of  Chemistry  and  Physics 
(Chemical  Rubber  Co.),  or  Lange’s  Handbook  of  Chemistry  (Handbook 
Publishing  Co.). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday  at  10-11,  Ontario  Hall. 

Laboratory — B,  Tuesday  1-4,  in  Ontario  Hall. 

D students  see  under  Dept,  of  Chemical  Engineering. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Industrial  Chemistry  Hla. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year — first  term. 

For  outline  of  topics  see  under  Department  of  Qiemical  Engineering. 

Texts — E.  R.  Riegel,  Industrial  Chemistry;  Badger  and  Baker,  Inorganic 
Chemical  Technology. 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  at  11,  first  term,  in  Ontario  Hall. 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-4,  first  term,  in  Ontario  Hall. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Industrial  Chemistry  IV. 

Research  Training. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing  thesis  option  in  Industrial 
Chemistry. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Colloid  Chemistry  la 

For  students  in  Course  D,  fourth  year,  first  term.  A short  introductory 
course  in  Colloid  Chemistry.  The  lectures  deal  with  the  general  properties  of 
the  colloidal  state,  particle  size  and  sedimentation  analysis,  dialysis,  ultra- 
filtration and  electrokinetic  phenomena. 

The  laboratory  work  illustrates  and  supplements  the  material  dealt  with 
in  lectures. 

Text-book — Hedges,  Colloids  (Arnold). 

Reference  Text — Lewis,  Squires  & Broughton,  Colloidal  and  Amorphous 
Materials  (Macmillan). 

Lectures — Wednesday  at  10,  first  term. 

Laboratory — Tuesday  1-3,  first  term. 

Professor  Munro 

Colloid  Chemistry  II 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year, 

A course  in  Surface  Chemistry  treating  the  general  properties  of  the 
colloidal  state  and  heterogeneous  catalysis.  The  lectures  deal  with  the  follow- 
ing topics : the  colloidal  state,  particle  size  and  sedimentation,  dialysis, 
Dorman  equilibrium,  ultrafiltration,  electrokinetic  phenomena,  surface  energy, 
interfacial  tensions,  flocculation  and  protective  action,  emulsions,  foams,  gels, 
plastics,  sorption,  the  mechanism  of  catalysis,  activation,  promotors,  carriers, 
retarders,  mixed  catalysts  and  heterogeneous  chain  reactions. 


82 


The  laboratory  work  illustrates  the  topics  dealt  with  in  lectures. 

Texts — Hartman,  Colloid  Chemistry  (Houghton  Mifflin  G?.)  ; Griffith, 
The  Mechanism  of  Contact  Catalysis  (Oxford  University  Press). 

Reference  Texts — Weiser,  Inorganic  Colloid  Chemistry,  I-HI  (Wiley)  ; 
McBain,  The  Sorption  of  Gases  by  Solids  (Routledge)  ; Maxted,  Catalysis 
and  its  Industrial  Applications  (Churchill)  ; Berkman,  Morell  and  Egloff, 
Catalysis  (Reinhold  Corp.). 

Lectures — First  term,  Wednesday  and  Friday  at  10  a.m. 

Second  term,  Wednesday  and  Friday  at  11  a.m. 

Laboratory — Tuesday  1-3  p.m.,  first  term  only.  Professor  Munro 

GEOLOGY 

Professor — M.  B.  Baker,  B.A.,  B.Sc.,  F.G.S.A.,  F.R.S.C. 

Miller  Memorial  Research  Professor — 

E.  L.  Bruce,  B.Sc.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.R.S.C.,  F.G.S.A. 

Professor — B.  Rose,  B.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  F.G.S.A.,  F.R.S.C. 

Lecturer — M.  L.  Keith,  B.Sc.,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D. 

Assistant — R.  J.  MacNeill. 

Research  Assistant — D.  F.  Hewitt. 

The  Geological  and  Mineralogical  Museum,  situated  on  the  ground  floor 
of  Miller  Hall,  is  equipped  with  splendid  collections  of  minerals,  ores,  rocks 
and  fossils,  classified  and  systematically  arranged  to  illustrate  most  of  the 
subjects  treated  in  lectures.  This  is  a section  of  the  work  in  which  the  co- 
operation of  the  mining  public  is  invited,  and  all  donations  to  this  museum 
will  be  kept  and  credited  to  the  donor. 

The  various  courses  in  Geology,  described  in  some  detail  below,  are  in- 
tended to  equip  the  professional  geologist,  the  mining  engineer,  the  civil 
engineer  requiring  a knowledge  of  the  relative  merits  of  natural  construction 
material. 

geology  I. 

For  second  year  students  in  courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M. 

Elementary  Geology.  Students  taking  this  class  must  have  passed  in 
Chemistry  I. 

An  introductory  course  in  general  Geology  is  given  preparatory  for  those 
students  who  proceed  to  a more  advanced  course  in  Geolo'gy  or  Mining,  and 
at  the  same  time  a more  or  less  complete,  though  elementary  course  for  those 
who  do  not  pursue  the  subject  any  farther. 

During  the  month  of  October  excursions  will  be  conducted  to  places  ot 
geological  interest  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston.  Students  in  Geology  and 
Mineralogy  are  required  to  take  part  in  these  excursions. 

Text-book:  Miller,  Elements  of  Geology,  (Van  Nostrand  Co,), 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  9-10,  Professor  Baker. 


83 


GEOLOGY  II. 

For  third  year  students  in  course  C. 

Structural,  Dynamical,  and  Physiographical  Geology.  Before  taking 
this  class  students  must  have  passed  in  Geology  I. 

The  principles  of  gradation,  deformation,  faulting,  mountain  formation, 
and  vulcanism  are  covered  in  a more  general  and  a more  advanced  way 
than  in  Geology  I.  Attention  is  also  given  to  the  origin  of  the  earth;  the 
metamorphic  cycle;  types  of  marine  and  continental  sedimentation;  an  in- 
troduction to  paleontology,  physiography,  map  reading  and  interpretation. 

Text-books — Nevin,  Structural  Geology;  Platt,  Geological  Map  Exercises, 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  9-10.  Professor  Rose. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  3-5. 


geology  hi.  (b) 

For  students  in  Courses  A and  C,  third  year. 

Elementary  Petrography.  Students  must  have  passed  in  Geology  I. 

This  course  is  essentially  on  igneous  geology  and  petrography,  and  on 
the  determination  of  some  of  the  more  common  rocks  and  rock  minerals  by 
both  field  and  microscopic  tests.  Some  attention  will  be  paid  to  the  sedi- 
mentary and  metamorphic  rocks.  The  lectures  will  be  supplemented  by 
laboratory  work  on  hand  specimens  and  rock  slices. 

Text-book — Pirsson  and  Knopf,  Rocks  and  Rock  Minerals. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  10-11,  second  term. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  1-3,  and  3-5.  Dr.  Keith. 

GEOLOGY  IV. 

For  third  year  s‘tudents  in  Course  A. 

Structural  Geology — Students  must  have  passed  in  Geology  I. 

Imposed  structures  in  sedimentary,  igneous,  and  metamorphic  rocks,  with 
particular  attention  to  faulting,  folding,  and  shearing.  Illustrated  mainly 
from  Canadian  occurrences  where  possible. 

Text-book — Nevin,  Structural  Geology. 

Lecture — Tuesday  and  Friday,  11-12  (a).  Professor  Rose. 


84 


GEOLOGY  V. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  A and  C. 

Geology  of  Canada.  Before  taking  this  class,  students  must  have 
passed  in  Geology  I and  II Ib. 

In  this  course  special  attention  will  be  given  to  Pre- Cambrian  Geology, 
and  the  distribution  of  the  various  rock  formations  in  Canada.  The  topo- 
graphy as  well  as  the  structural  make-up  of  the  Dominion  is  studied. 

Lecture — Wednesday,  9-10.  Professor  Bruce. 

GEOLOGY  VI. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  C. 

Historical  Geology.  After  a brief  study  of  the  various  types  of 
sedimentary  formations  and  the  principles  of  paleogeography,  the  history 
of  the  North  American  continent  is  taken  up  with  supplementary  refer- 
ences to  the  other  continents  when  desirable.  Emphasis  is  laid  on  Can- 
adian occurrences.  A number  of  the  more  important  fossils  of  each  period 
are  studied,  and  their  recognition  on  sight  required.  Brief  consideration 
is  also  given  to  the  history  of  the  Science  of  Geology. 

Text-book — Schuchert  and  Dunbar,  Text-book  of  Geology,  Part  II. 
(^Historical,  John  Wiley  and  Sons). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  9-10.  Professor  Rose. 

Laboratory — Monday,  2-4. 

GEOLOGY  VII. 

For  third  year  students  in  Course  C and  fourth  year  students  in  Course 
A (geology  option). 

Microscopical  Petrography.  A laboratory  class  on  the  identification 
of  rocks  and  rock  minerals  under  the  microscope.  A more  intensive  study 
is  made  of  the  features  of  igneous,  sedimentary  and  metamorphic  rocks  than 
was  possible  in  Geology  Ill(b). 

Laboratory — Thursday,  2-4,  second  term. 

Dr.  Keith. 

GEOLOGY  VIII. 


For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  A and  C. 

Economic  Geology.  This  class  treats  of  the  principles  of  ore  deposition. 
The  basis  of  classification  and  the  fundamental  principles  underlying  the 
formation  of  economic  deposits. 

Text-book — Tarr,  Introductory  Economic  Geology  (McGraw-Hill). 
Lectures — Mondgy  and  Tuesday,  11-12. 

Professor  Baker. 


GEOLOGY  IX. 


For  third  year  students  in  Course  E. 

Engineering  Geology.  This  course  is  intended  for  students  in  Civil 
Engineering,  and  after  a brief  introduction  to  geology  will  treat  of  the 
occurrence,  composition,  texture,  structure  and  alterations  of  rocks,  with 


85 


special  reference  to  their  effects  on  the  workability  or  removal  of  the  rocks 
in  excavation,  and  in  the  selection  of  raw  material  in  construction  work. 
There  will  also  be  lectures  on  clay-products  and  the  selection  of  building 
materials,  and  an  outline  of  the  manufacture  of  bricks,  fire-proof  blocks, 
terra-cotta,  roofing-tile,  sewer-pipe,  and  drainage-tile,  will  be  given.  Physio- 
graphy and  drainage  will  also  be  studied,  and  a brief  discussion  of  the 
principles  of  economic  geology. 

Text-book — Ries  and  Watson,  Elements  of  Engineering  Geology. 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Thursday,  11-12.  Professor  Baker. 

GEOLOGY  X. 

For  third  year  students  in  Course  C and  fourth  year  students  in  Course 
A (geology  option). 

Field  Geology.  The  field  and  laboratory  work  of  this  class  consists  of  a 
systematic  survey  of  an  area  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston.  Students  are  given 
practice  in  the  methods  of  geological  survey,  the  plotting  of  outcrops,  the 
measurement  of  stratigraphic  sections,  the  determination  of  levels,  and  then 
the  preparation  of  a contoured  geological  map  to  scale,  together  with  a geo- 
logical report  oni  the  area  studied. 

Instruction  is  given  on  instrumental  methods  of  geological  survey,  and  on 
the  techniques  of  geophysical  prospecting.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  applica- 
tion of  various  geophysical  methods  to  particular  problems  in  geology,  and  on 
control  of  such  surveys,  and  the  interpretation  of  results  by  the  geologist. 

Reference  Books — Lahee,  Field  Geology;  Eve  and  Keys,  Applied  Geo- 
physics in  the  Search  for  Minerals ; Heiland,  Geophysical  Exploration. 

Monday,  1-5.  Dr.  Keith. 

geology  XII. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  course  C 

Advanced  Petrology. 

A course  of  lectures  will  be  given  on  the  recognition  and  classification  of 
igneous,  sedimentary  and  metamorphic  rocks.  Considerable  attention  will  be 
given  to  the  genesis  of  rock  types  and  to  the  physico-chemical  conditions  effec- 
tive in  the  generation  and  the  differentiation  of  magmas. 

Text-book — Grout,  Petrography  and  Petrology.  (McGraw-Hill). 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  11-12,  first  term. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  2-4  first  term.  Dr.  Keith. 

Reports 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  C. 

Weekly  reports  or  essays  based  on  field  trips,  summer  work,  or  on 
topics  of  a mineralogical  or  geological  nature  as  prescribed  by  the  departments 
of  Geology  and  Mineralogy  will  be  required.  These  are  intended  to  test  the 
students’  ability  to  read  up  a subject,  and  then  to  summarize  it  in  presentable 
form  for  publication.  The  class  will  be  conducted  by  the  department  of 
Geology  for  the  first  term,  and  by  the  department  of  Mineralogy  for  the 
second  term.  Professor  Baker. 


86 


GRADUATE  COURSES 

For  graduates  in  Courses  A (Geology  option)  and  C. 


GEOLOGY  XIII. 

Principles  of  Pre-Cambrian  Geology.  The  origin,  history  and  distribu- 
tion of  the  rocks  older  than  the  Cambrian.  Special  attention  will  be  given 
to  Canadian  Pre-Cambrian  areas.  It  will  not  be  offered  in  1943-44. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Wednesday  at  11. 


Laboratory — Friday,  1-4. 


Professor  Bruce. 


geology  XIV. 

Metamorphic  and  Structural  Geology.  The  processes  of  rock  weather- 
ing, consolidation  of  sediments,  formation  of  gneisses,  and  the  wall  rock 
alterations  produced  by  veins  are  studied  in  detail.  The  principles  of  rock 
deformation  are  discussed.  The  course  will  be  offered  in  alternate  years.  It 
will  not  be  offered  in  1943-44, 


Lectures — Tuesday  and  Friday  at  11. 

Laboratory — Friday  1-4  or  Saturday  9-12. 

Professor  Bruce. 


geology  XV. 

Pre-Cambrian  Ore  Deposits.  Discussion  of  ore  deposits  in  Pre-Cambrian 
rocks  with  especial  reference  to  those  in  Canada.  The  genesis  and  character 
of  the  deposits  will  be  studied  in  detail.  It  will  be  offered  in  1943-44. 

Text  Book:  Bruce,  Mineral  Deposits  of  the  Canadian  Shield,  (Mac- 
millan). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Friday  at  11. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  1-4  or  Wednesday,  1.4. 

Professor  Bruce. 

Excursions  to  accessible  localities  are  required. 

geology  XVI (a) 

Chemical  Petrology.  This  course  comprises  a critical  review  of  petro- 
logical processes.  It  is  planned  as  a directed  discussion  based  upon  selected 
references  pertaining  to  both  laboratory  and  field  investigations  of  the  genesis 
of  rocks. 

Lectures — Monday  at  9,  first  term. 

Reading — Time  to  be  arranged.  Dr.  Keith. 

geology  xix. 

Regional  Geology.  A study  of  the  general  geology  of  selected  regions 
to  illustrate  geological  processes  and  +0  correlate  the  stratigraphic  and  diastropic 
history  of  the  world. 

Periods  to  be  arranged.  Professor  Rose. 

Seminar 

A Seminar  for  students  in  graduate  courses  meets  two  evenings  each 
month.  It  is  voluntary  and  no  registration  is  required. 


87 


MINERALOGY 

Professor — J.  E.  Hawley,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  F.G.S.A.,  F.R.S.C 

Lecturer — N.  W.  Buerger,  S.M.,  Ph.D.,  F.M.S.A.  (on  leave  of  absence).* 

Assistants — J.  M.  Harrison,  B.Sc.,  M.A..  M.  Young. 

The  work  in  this  department  is  intended  for  students  taking  the  courses 
in  (1)  Mining  Engineering,  (2)  Chemistry,  (3)  Mineralogy  and  Geology, 
(4)  Chemical  Engineering,  and  (5)  Metallurgical  Engineering. 


MINERALOGY  I. 

For  Second  year  students  in  Courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  M. 


Elementary  Mineralogy — Lectures  cover  (1)  the  physical  properties  and 
identification  of  the  common  rock  and  ore  forming  minerals,  (2)  The  rela- 
tion between  Mineralogy  and  Geology,  (3)  The  chemistry  of  minerals,  (4) 
Crystallography,  (5)  World  distribution  of  minerals  which  are  of  economic 
importance,  (6)  the  detailed  properties,  occurrence  and  uses  of  about  one 
hundred  important  minerals.  In  the  laboratory  practical  work  is  given  in 
crystallography  and  in  the  identification  of  minerals  by  physical  tests  and 
blowpipe  methods. 

Field  trips  during  October  and  November  are  held  in  conjunction  with 
the  Department  of  Geology. 

Each  student  is  supplied  for  the  session  with  a locked  cabinet  containing 
a collection  of  minerals  for  which  he  is  held  responsible.  A practical  examina- 
tion requiring  the  identification  of  minerals  in  hand  specimens  must  be  passed 
by  each  student  before  credit  in  this  course  will  be  given.  Students  are  urged 
to  make  use  of  the  museum,  and  of  the  study  room  provided  for  them  in  the 
Mineralogy  department. 

Text-books — For  Courses  A and  C,  Ford,  Dana’s  Text-book  of  Mm- 
eralogy,  (Wiley,  1932),  4th  edition.  For  Courses  B and  D,  choice  of 
Hurlbut,  Dana’s  Manual  of  Mineralogy,  15th  edition,  1941 ; or  Kraus,  Hunt, 
and  Ramsdell,  Mineralogy  (McGraw-Hill,  1936). 


Books  of  reference — Kraus  and  Hunt,  Mineralogy,  3rd  edition  (McGraw- 
Hill,  1936)  ; Rogers,  Study  of  Minerals,  3rd  edition  (McGraw-Hill,  1937)  , 
Brush  and  Penfield,  Manual  of  Determinative  Mineralogy  and  Blowpipe  Ana- 
lysis, 17th  edition,  1912  (Wiley). 

Saturday  Excursions. 


Lectures — Friday  at  8,  first  term;  Tuesday  at  10  and  Friday  at  8,  second 
term. 


Professor  Hawley. 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-3,  Section  1,  Monday,  3-5,  Section  2,  first  term; 
Tuesday,  1-3,  Section  2,  Tuesday,  3-5,  Section  1,  second  term. 

* Lieutenant,  United  States  Naval  Reserve.  .. 


88 


MINERALOGY  Ti. 

Physical  Mineralogy.  For  students  in  Course  C,  Third  year,  and 
Course  A,  Fourth  year,  Geology  option. 

The  work  consists  of  a course  of  lectures,  dealing  with  crystallography, 
crystal  measurements  and  drawing,  and  a more  advanced  study  of  the  physical 
properties  of  minerals. 

Text-books — Dana,  Text-book  of  Mineralogy,  1932.  (Wiley  & Sons). 

James,  X-Ray  Crystallography  (Methuen),  1930. 

Books  of  Reference — Bragg,  Atomic  Structure  of  Minerals  (Cornell 
Univ.  Press),  1937;  Wyckoff,  The  Structure  of  Crystals,  (1931)  ; Bragg, 
X-Ray  and  Crystal  Structure,  4th  Edition. 

Lectures — Monday  at  10  and  Friday  at  11.  second  term. 

Laboratory — Saturday,  10-12,  second  term. 

Professor  Hawley. 


MINERALOGY  III. 

For  students  in  Courses  B,  and  C,  third  year,  and  Course  A,  Fourth 
year.  Geology  option,  first  term. 

Optical  Mineralogy — The  work  of  this  class  deals  with  the  optical 
properties  of  nonopaque  chemical  substances  and  natural  minerals.  For 
chemistry  students  it  serves  as  an  accurate  method  of  identifying  both  organic 
and  inorganic  solid  chemical  substances  by  their  indices  of  refraction  and  other 
optical  properties,  provided  these  are  known,  as  a method  of  proving 
homogeneity  of  fine  chemical  compounds,  and  as  an  introduction  to  micro- 
chemical methods  of  testing  for  minor  constituents  in  inorganic  compounds. 
For  geology  and  mineralogy  students  it  is  preparatory  to  the  classes  of 
petrography  and  determinative  mineralogy  and  deals  with  the  optical  properties 
of  the  common  rock  forming  minerals. 

Text-book — Dana,  Text-book  of  Mineralogy,  4th  ed.,  1932  (Wiley),  or 
Winchell,  Elements  of  Optical  Mineralogy  (Part  I),  5th  ed.,  (Wiley),  1937, 
or  Rogers  and  Kerr,  Optical  Mineralogy  (McGraw-Hill),  1942. 

Reference  texts — Groth  and  Jackson,  Optic  Properties  of  Crystals  (Wiley), 
1910;  Hartshorne  and  Stuart,  Crystals  and  the  Polarising  Microscope 
(Arnold),  1934. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Friday,  at  10,  first  term. 


Laboratory — A — Geology  Option  and^  C — Tuesday  1-3,  B — Saturday,  10-12, 
first  term.  Dr.  M.  L.  Keith. 


89 


MINERALOGY  IV. 

For  students  in  Courses  A and  C,  Third  year. 

Descriptive  and  Determinative  Mineralogy — Ore  Minerals.  A course 
dealing  with  minerals  which  are  important  as  ores  of  iron,  manganese,  chrom- 
ium, tungsten,  vanadium,  tin,  nickel,  cobalt,  gold,  silver,  copper,  lead,  zinc  and 
aluminum.  In  the  laboratory  suites  of  ore  minerals  from  various  mining 
camps  are  examined  by  blowpipe  methods  and  microscopically  by  polished 
sections.  A brief  survey  is  made  of  some  important  non-metallic  minerals. 
Cabinets  furnished  with  specimens  of  minerals  from  various  parts  of  the 
world  are  supplied  for  students’  use.  Examination  of  a variety  of  mineral 
deposits  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston  is  made  in  October  and  November. 
Reports  on  these  are  required. 

Text-books — Dana,  Text-hook  of  Mineralogy,  4th  ed.  1932  (Wiley)  ; 
choice  of  Tarr,  Introductory  Economic  Geology  (McGraw-Hill  1938),  or 
Lindgren,  Mineral  Deposits  (McGraw-Hill  1933).  Reports  on  various  de- 
posits will  be  available  in  reading  room. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  8-9  (a)  ; Wednesday  and  Friday,  at 
10  (b). 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  1-3,  and  3-5  if  two  sections  are  necessary. 

Professor  Hawley. 


mineralogy  V. 

For  students  in  Course  C,  Fourth  year. 

Advanced  Descriptive  and  Determinative  Mineralogy — Non-Metallic 
Minerals.  A course  dealing  (1)  with  the  identification  of  rock  forming 
minerals  by  physical  and  optical  properties ; (2)  the  occurrence  and  utilization 
of  non-metallic  minerals  used  for  Abrasives,  Refractories,  Ceramic  Ware, 
Lime,  Cements,  Plaster,  Fertilizers,  Pigments,  Insulators,  Building  Stone, 
Gems,  etc. 

Text-book — Elements  of  Optical  Mineralogy — Part  II,  (Description  of 
Minerals),  A.  N.  Winchell,  (Wiley  and  Sons). 

Reference  Books — Publications  of  Geological  Survey  of  Canada;  Publica- 
tions of  Mines  Branch,  Dept,  of  Mines,  Canada;  Publications  of  U.S.  Geol. 
Survey;  Non-Metallic  Minerals — Ladoo  (McGraw-Hill,  1925). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday  at  10  (a)  ; Wednesday  at  11,  Thursday 
at  10  (b). 

Laboratory — Friday,  1-3. 


Professor  Hawley. 


90 


MINERALOGY  VI. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  C,  A (Geology  Option),  and  M 
(optional). 

Mineralography — An  advanced  laboratory  course  in  the  study  of  metallic 
minerals  in  polished  sections. 

Text — Microscopic  Determination  of  the  Ore  Minerals,  US.GS.  Bull.  914, 
1940.  M.  N.  Short. 

Laboratory — First  term,  Thursday,  2-4. 

Lecture  and  Discussion — Thursday,  1-2,  first  term  only. 

Professor  Hawley. 


mineralogy  Vila 

For  third  year  students  in. Course  M. 

Ore  Minerals — Their  properties,  chemistry  and  association.  A course 
of  lectures  for  third  year  Metallurgy  students  consisting  of  the  first  term 
lectures  of  Mineralogy  IV. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday  at  8,  first  term. 

Research  and  Thesis — Students  wishing  to  undertake  the  research  work 
and  thesis  of  the  fourth  year  under  the  Department  of  Mineralogy  should 
consult  with  the  instructors  not  later  than  the  beginning  of  their  fourth 
year  with  regard  to  research  subjects  and  hours. 


GRADUATE  COURSES 

For  graduates  in  Courses  A and  C. 


MINERALOGY  XV. 

Advanced  Optical  Mineralogy — A course  designed  to  give  students 
further  training  in  the  determination  of  optical  properties  of  minerals.  Special 
study  will  be  made  of  igneous  and  metamorphic  minerals,  and  of  the  heavy 
residuals  of  sedimentary  rocks.  Offered  during  session  1943-44. 

Lectures  and  Laboratory — 6 hours  a week,  to  be  arranged. 

Professor  Hawley. 


91 


MINERALOGY  XVI. 

(a)  Advanced  Study  of  Ore  Minerals  and  Mineralography  : 

Texts — Lindgren’s  Mineral  Deposits  (McGraw-Hill  1933). 

Determination  of  the  Ore  Minerals,  U.S.G.S.  Bull.  914,  1940. 
N.  M.  Short. 

This  course  alternates  with  Mineralogy  XV.  Not  offered  in  session 
1943-44. 

Lectures  and  Laboratory — Four  hours  a week  to  be  arranged. 

Professor  Hawley. 


MINERALOGY  XVIia 

Structural  Crystallography — An  introduction  to  our  present  knowledge 
of  the  structure  of  crystals,  mainly  by  means  of  x-ray  diffraction  data,  and 
the  application  of  this  knowledge  to  mineralogy.  The  lectures  include : simple 
aspects  of  x-ray  diffraction  theory  useful  in  crystallographic  investigation, 
the  powder  method,  the  rotating  and  oscillating  crystal  method,  and  the 
Weissenberg  method;  the  fundamental  laws  of  crystal  chemistry,  radius  ratio, 
co-ordination  number,  polarizability,  ionic  structures,  -electron  pair  bond  struc- 
tures, metallic  structures ; the  silicates  and  silicate  framework  crystals ; isomor- 
phism, polj'-morphism,  disordered  structures,  superstructures,  solid  solution;  the 
determination  of  phase  diagrams  and  inversion  by  means  of  controlled  tem- 
perature x-ray  powder  photographs.  Laboratory  work  consists  of  familiarizing 
the  student  with  x-ray  equipment  such  as  transformers,  tubes,  protective  de- 
vices, and  the  various  types  of  diffraction  cameras ; practical  work  with 
mineral  “fingerprinting”,  or  comparisons,  by  means  of  powder  diffraction 
patterns,  interpretation  of  sim.ple  patterns  obtained  by  powder  and  rotating 
crystal  methods;  practical  work  with  controlled  temperature  powder  camera. 

Text-book — R.  W.  James,  X-Ray  Crystallography  (Methuen,  1930). 

Reference  books — W.  H.  Bragg  and  W.  L.  Bragg,  The  Crystalline  State 
(Macmillan,  1934)  ; R.  C.  Evans,  An  Introduction  to  Crystal  Chemistry 
(University  Press,  1939).  Miscellaneous  assigned  readings. 

Lectures — Two  hours  per  week,  to  be  arranged.  Not  offered  for  the  dura- 
tion of  the  war. 

Laboratory — Three  hours  per  week,  to  be  arranged. 

Prerequisites — Mineralogy  I,  and  Mineralogy  II  (10b),  or  the  equivalent. 

Graduate  students  in  Physics  or  Chemistry  will  be  admitted  to  this  course. 

Dr.  Buerger. 


92 


MINING  ENGINEERING. 

I’kOFESSOR — S.  N.  Graham,  B.Sc. 


Mining  I. 

For  students  in  Course  A,  third  year. 

The  first  part  of  this  course  includes  a discussion  of  the  shape  and 
attitude  of  ore  bodies  and  the  description  of  the  methods  of  surveying  the 
underground  openings  required  to  work  them.  This  is  accompanied  by  drafting 
room  work  on  mine  mapping. 

Lectures  for  the  balance  of  the  year  include  the  following:  prospecting, 
mining  laws,  exploration  of  prospects,  diamond  and  churn  drills,  rock  drills 
and  steel,  explosives,  systematic  methods  of  development  and  a brief  descrip- 
tion of  common  mining  methods. 

One  hour  a week  in  the  second  term  is  given  to  the  reading  and  dis- 
cussion of  essays. 

Text-books — Peele,  Mining  Engineers  Handbook ; Lewis,  Elements  of 
Mining. 

Lecture  and  Laboratory — Tuesday  and  Wednesday,  9-11  (a)  ; Tuesday, 
Wednesday,  and  Thursday,  9-10  (b). 

Professor  Graham. 


Mining  II. 

For  students  in  Course  A,  fourth  year. 

This  course  is  a continuation  of  Mining  I and  includes  the  following 
subjects:  rock  pressure  and  meth(jds  of  support;  systematic  study  of  under- 
ground metal  mining  methods ; transportation,  mucking,  and  tramming ; 
drainage  and  pumping ; mine  atmospheres  and  mine  ventilation ; sampling 
and  estimation  of  ore ; mining  costs,  mine  valuation  and  reports ; a brief 
discussion  of  the  principles  of  geophysical  prospecting  with  special  attention 
to  magnetic  methods. 

Text-books — Peele,  Mining  Engineers  Handbook;  Lewis,  Elements  of 
Mining. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Tuesday,  8-9;  Wednesday,  10-11. 

Laboratory — Monday,  10-11;  Tuesday,  1-2  (a),  2-3  (b). 


Professor  Graham. 


93 


Mining  III. 

For  students  in  Course  A,  fourth  year. 


This  is  a drafting  room  class  with  problems  in  the  design  of  mine  buildings, 
wooden  headframes  and  ore  bins,  arrangement  of  surface  plant  and  under- 
ground workings,  and  transportation  systems. 


Text-book — Staley,  Mine  Plant  Design. 
Wednesday,  1-4. 


Mining  IV. 


Professor  Graham. 


For  students  in  Courses  C and  M,  fourth  year. 

This  is  a course  of  lectures  briefly  discussing  the  formation  of  ore-bodies, 
their  development  and  exploitation,  the  machinery  and  equipment  required,  and 
the  sampling  and  valuation  of  mining  properties.  It  is  intended  to  link  up  the 
work  of  the  geologist  and  metallurgist  with  the  mine. 

Text-books — Lewis,  Elements  of  Mining;  Hoover,  Principles  of  Mining. 

Lectures — Monday  1-2. 

Professor  Graham. 


Summer  Essay. 

For  students  in  Course  A,  fourth  year. 


In  order  to  encourage  close  observation,  and  the  faculty  of  expressing  by 
text  and  illustration,  the  student  during  his  summer  vacations  is  expected  to 
gather  material  for  an  essay  of  from  two  to  three  thousand  words. 

The  essay  must  cover  the  result  of  personal  observation  and  be  on  some 
subject  relating  to  mining,  milling,  metallurgy  or  geology. 

The  subject  title  must  be  given  before  the  end  of  October,  and  the  essay 
handed  in  before  the  15th  of  January.  Essays  requiring  revision  must  be 
returned  before  the  spring  examinations  begin. 

All  essays  must  be  typewritten  and  suitably  bound. 


Ore  Dressing. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  C and  M,  third  year. 

These  lectures  follow  the  sequence  of  operations  on  an  ore  from  the  time 
it  reaches  the  mill  until  it  leaves  as  a concentrate  or  bullion.  The  principles 
and  practice  of  rock  crushing,  ball  milling,  classification  and  concentration 
on  jigs  and  tables  are  fully  discussed.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the 
concentration  of  ores  by  flotation.  Other  accessory  processes  such  as  magnetic 
concentration  are  taken  up  and  the  flow  sheets  of  different  mills  are  studied. 

Books  of  reference — Gaudin,  Principles  of  Mineral  Dressing;  Rabone, 
Flotation  Plant  Practice;  Taggart,  Handbook  of  Ore  Dressing;  Richards 
and  Locke,  Text  Book  of  Ore  Dressing. 

Lectures — Friday,  8-9,  first  term,  and  Thursday,  11-12. 

Professor  Graham. 


94 


Milling. 

For  students  in  Courses  A and  M,  fourth  year. 

Ores  of  the  more  common  metals  are  investigated  in  the  laboratories  to 
determine  suitable  methods  of  concentration  of  or  recovery  of  their  metals  by 
milling.  Groups  of  two  or  three  students  are  given  an  ore  to  investigate. 
Examination  of  the  ore  is  first  carried  through  by  use  of  the  microscope,  by 
screen  analyses,  etc.  Based  on  the  information  thus  gained,  a course  of 
treatment  on  a sample  of  the  ore  is  carried  through.  Each  student  takes  part 
in  the  investigation  and  treatment  of  as  many  ores  of  the  precious  metals, 
and  also  of  those  of  base  metals  as  time  will  permit. 

Laboratory — Friday,  9-4,  and  Saturday,  9-12. 

Professor  Lord. 


Ore  Dressing  Laboratories 

These  are  equipped  for  the  testing  of  ores  in  small  lots  from  various 
mining  districts. 

The  equipment  consists  of  a 7 x 10  Blake  crusher,  rolls  and  fine  grinders. 
There  is  a complete  equipment  of  modern  small,  or  miniature  machines  for  test- 
ing ores  and  illustrating  principles  and  processes  of  treatment.  These  consist 
of  small  ball  and  pebble  mills,  various  types  of  screens  and  classifiers,  jigs, 
Wilfley  tables,  several  types  of  small  flotation  machines  and  magnetic 
concentrators. 


The  Metallurgical  Laboratories. 

The  Metallurgical  laboratories  proper  contain  a blast  furnace  and  a 
large  roasting  furnace,  each  served  by  a bag  house ; a Monarch  oil  furnace 
and  a gas  furnace  for  obtaining  temperatures  up  to  1400°  C;  a Hoskins  electric 
furnace  for  temperatures  up  to  1700° C;  two  electric  arc  furnaces;  a vacuum 
electric  furnace ; two  tubular  electric  furnaces ; a Hump  furnace ; an  electric 
muffle  furnace ; two  recording  potentiometers ; thermocouple  and  optical  pyro- 
meters, calorimeters,  and  a high  frequency  induction  furnace. 

The  Fire  Assaying  laboratory  contains  seven  gas  muffle  furnaces  of 
different  sizes,  a three-muffle  crude  oil  furnace,  and  four  gasoline  crucible 
furnaces. 

The  Metallography  laboratory  is  equipped  with  a complete  cutting  and 
grinding  plant;  a disc  polishing  machine;  microscopes,  with  complete  optical 
equipment;  a vertical  micrograph  outfit,  and  the  necessary  dark  room  and 
equipment ; and  well  selected  sets  of  specimens. 

Two  well  appointed  chemical  laboratories,  a balance  room  and  a room  for 
electrolytic  assaying  complete  the  laboratory  equipment  of  the  Department. 


95 


metallurgy: 


Professor — T.  V.  Lord,  B.Sc. 

Assistant  Professor — O.  A.  Carson,  B.Sc.,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

Metallurgy  I. 

For  students  in  Courses  E,  F,  G,  third  year. 


A brief  discussion  of  the  physical  properties  and  uses  of  the  common 
metals.  The  more  important  industrial  alloys,  their  composition,  properties 
and  uses.  Refractory  materials.  The  properties  of  iron  and  steel,  the  effects 
of  impurities  and  of  methods  of  manufacture  and  working,  and  the  heat 
treatment  of  steel. 

Reference  Books — Bray,  Ferrous  Production  Metallurgy ; Rosenholtz  and 
Oesterle,  Elements  of  Ferrous  Metallurgy;  Metals  Handbook.  i 


Lecture — Tuesday,  10-11  (a),  Tuesday,  8-9  (b). 

Metallurgy  II. 


Professor  Carson. 


For  students  in  Courses  A,  B,  M,  third  year. 

Heat,  calorimetry  and  pyrometry.  Solid,  liquid,  and  gaseous  fuels  and 
the  special  metallurgical  uses  of  each  kind.  An  introduction  to  general 
metallurgy — principles,  operations  and  appliances.  The  metallurgy  of  iron 
and  steel. 


Reference  Books — Bray,  Ferrous  Production  Metallurgy;  Rosenholtz  and 
Oesterle,  Elements  of  Ferrous  Metallurgy;  Metals  Hand\book. 


Lectures — Monday,  11-12;  Wednesday,  8-9  (a) 

Metallurgy  III. 


Tuesday,  11-12  (b). 

Professor  Carson. 


For  students  in  Course  M,  third  year. 

Metallurgy  calculations  based  on  the  work  covered  in  Metallurgy  11. — 
heat,  calorimetry,  and  pyrometry;  heat  balance,  iron  blast  furnace  charges, 

etc. 


Laboratory — Monday,  9-10;  Wednesday  9-10, 
Wednesday,  9-10,  second  term. 

Metallurgy  IV. 


first  term;  Monday  10-11; 

Professor  Carson. 


For  students  in  Courses  A,  M,  fourth  year. 

The  metallurgy  of  the  more  common  non-ferrous  metals — gold,  silver, 
copper,  lead,  and  zinc.  The  extraction  of  these  metals  from  their  ores,  the 
refining  of  the  metals,  their  uses,  and  the  alloys  into  which  they  enter. 

A consideration  of  the  ordinary  methods  of  recovering  nickel,  cobalt,  tin, 
arsenic,  antimony,  etc.,  from  the  ores. 

Text  Books — Dorr,  Cyanidation  and  Concentration  of  Gold  and  Silver 
Ores;  Bray,  N onferrous  Production  Metallurgy ; Newton  and  Wilson,  Metal- 
lurgy of  Copper. 

Lectures — Tuesday,  9-10;  Wednesday,  11-12;  Thursday,  11-12. 

Professor  Lord. 


96 


Metallurgy  V. 

For  students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year. 

Metallurgical  calculations  related  to  the  work  covered  in  Metallurgy  IV. 
Discussions  of  metallurgical  subjects  by  the  students  and  the  reading  and 
discussion  of  students’  essays. 


Laboratory — Tuesday^  11-12,  first  term;  Thursday,  9-10,  second  term. 

Professor  Lord. 


Metallurgy  VI. 


For  students  in  Courses  M,  G,  fourth  year. 

Electro-metallurgy ; introductory  course  in  electro-chemistry  followed  by 
the  consideration  of  the  electrolytic  refining  of  copper,  gold  and  silver,  the 
electrical  smelting  of  aluminum,  and  electric  furnaces. 

Lecture — Wednesday,  8-9,  second  term.  Professor  Carson. 


Metallurgy  VII. 


For  students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year. 

Metallurgical  plant  design.  The  calculation  of  the  capacities  of  units  in 
a plant — agitators,  sumps,  pipes,  launders,  pumps,  furnaces,  converters,  etc. 
Details  of  equipment.  Flow  sheets.  General  layout  of  plants.  Bills  of 
material.  Power  requirements. 

The  work  will  consist  largely  of  individual  problems  for  the  library  and 
drafting  room. 

Laboratory — Monday,  2-4. 

Professor  Lord. 


Metallurgy  VIII. 


For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

Laboratory  course  dealing  with  the  heat  treatment  of  steel. 

Laboratory — Friday,  8-10,  first  term. 

Professor  Carson. 


Metallography. 


Metallography  I (a).  Metallography  II  (6). 

For  students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year. 

Introductory  course  in  metallography,  including : 

(a)  Explanation  and  interpretation  of  equilibrium  diagrams. 

{b)  Constitution  and  structure  of  some  industrial  alloys,  with  special 
reference  to  brasses,  bronzes,  bearing  metals  and  diflerent  grades  of  steel. 

Lecture  and  Laboratory  work — Monday,  8-9;  Tuesday,  1-4. 

Professor  Carson. 

Students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year,  who  are  going  into  Chemical  Metal- 
lurgy have  the  option  of  substituting  Mineralogy  VI  for  Metallography  11. 
Lecture  and  Laboratory — Mineralogy  Via,  Thursday,  1-4  (a). 

Professor  Hawley. 


97 


Metallurgical  Laboratory. 

For  students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year. 

Laboratory  course  dealing  with  a number  of  metallurgical  operations. 
The  following  experiments  are  made  by  the  students  attending  this  course: 
Determination  of  calorific  power  and  impurities  in  coals,  standardization  of 
pyrometers  by  various  methods,  determinations  of  cooling  curves,  decomposition 
of  sulphates  and  reduction  of  oxides,  heat  treatment  of  steel. 

Electroplating,  operation  of  electric  furnaces. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4,  first  term;  Thursday,  2-5,  second  term. 

Professor  Carson 


Summer  Essay. 

Required  of  students  in  Course  M,  fourth  year. 

In  order  to  encourage  close  observation,  and  the  faculty  of  expressing  by 
text  and  illustration,  the  student  during  his  summer  vacations  is  expected  to 
gather  material  for  an  essay  of  from  two  to  three  thousand  words. 

The  subject  title  must  be  given  in  by  October  15th  of  the  final  year,  and 
the  essay  handed  in  before  the  end  of  the  first  term  of  the  final  year.  Essays 
requiring  revision  must  be  returned  before  the  spring  examinations  begpn. 

The  material  on  which  the  essay  is  based  must  be  information  gained  at 
first  hand  in  metallurgical  or  chemical  plants  or  laboratories  or  in  mills  during 
the  equivalent  of,  at  least,  one  complete  summer  vacation. 


Fire  Assaying. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  M,  third  year,  and  Course  C,  fourth  year. 

The  Laboratory  course  in  fire  assaying  consists  of : 

(a)  A number  of  experiments  to  test  the  action  of  the  different  re- 
agents used  and  slags  made  in  assaying. 

(t)  The  determination  of  lead  by  fire  assay  methods. 

(r)  The  determination  of  gold  and  silver  in  silicious,  oxidized  and 
sulphide  ores  and  mattes. 

Text-book — Bugbee,  Fire  Assaying. 

Laboratory — First  term.  Course  A,  Course  C,  and  M,  Section  1,  Tuesday, 
1-5;  Second  term.  Course  M,  Section  2,  Tuesday,  1-5. 


Professor  Lord. 


98 


CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING. 

Professor — L.  F.  Goodwin,  F.C.G.I.,  Ph.D.,  F.I.C. 

Assistant  Professor — G.  A.  Revell,  B.Sc.,  S.M.,  F.C.I.C. 

Fellow — G.  A.  Clark,  B.Sc. 

All  lectures  and  laboratory  work  in  Ontario  Hall. 

Industrial  Chemistry  I.  Engineering  Chemistry. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

A lecture  course  developed  for  students  in  Mining,  Mechanical  and  Civil 
Engineering.  Topics  such  as  the  rusting  of  iron  and  its  preservation  from 
corrosion,  water  for  steam  raising  and  domestic  use,  paints,  lubricants,  ex- 
plosives, pyroxylins  and  cements  are  discussed,  mainly  from  the  engineer’s 
point  of  view. 

Text-books — Leighou,  Chemistry  of  Materials  (McGraw-Hill)  ; Davis, 
Chemistry  of  Explosives ; Bulletins  of  the  US.  Bureau  of  Mines,  Canadian 
Bureau  of  Explosives  and  other  pamphlets. 

Lecture — Wednesday,  at  10,  in  Ontario  Hall. 

Professor  Goodwin. 


Industrial  Chemistry  II. 

For  students  in  Courses  B and  D,  third  year. 

The  lectures  deal  with  the  following  topics : wood,  coal  and  other  fuels ; 
water  for  steam  raising  and  drinking  purposes;  the  petroleum  industry;  in- 
dustrial gases,  gas  producers,  by-product  coke  and  illuminating  gas ; sulphuric 
acid,  alkali  and  ammonia ; hydrochloric,  nitric  and  acetic  acids,  acetone ; 
electric  furnace  products,  fertilizers,  explosives  and  artificial  silk,  manufacture 
of  wood  pulp. 

In  the  laboratory  typical  processes,  such  as  dissolution,  crystallization, 
water  and  gas  analysis,  ordinary  and  fractional  distillation,  preparations 
involving  incomplete  chemical  reaction,  are  studied,  emphasis  being  laid  on 
systematic  records  and  interpretation  of  results. 

Text-books — E.  R.  Riegel,  Industrial  Chemistry ; J.  R.  Partington,  In- 
organic Chemistry  (Macmillan). 

Handbooks — Hodgman-Lange,  Handbook  of  Chemistry  and  Physics 
(Chemical  Rubber  Co.)  ; or  Lange,  Handpoqk  of  Chemistry  (Handbook  Pub- 
lishing Co.). 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Thursday,  10-11,  Ontario  Hall. 

Laboratory — D,  Saturday,  9-12,  first  term;  Monday,  10-12,  second  term; 

B,  Tuesday,  1-4. 


Professors  Goodwin  and  Revell. 


99 


Industrial  Chemistry  Ilia. — Advanced. 

For  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year — first  term. 

This  course  deals  with  the  following  subjects : Distillation  and  dephlegma- 
tion,  wood  distillation,  alcohol,  acetic  acid,  acetone.  Manufacture  of  organic 
nitro  compounds  and  explosives.  Equilibrium  and  optimal  conditions  for  contact 
sulphuric  acid,  synthetic  ammonia  and  nitric  acid  processes.  Catalytic  reactions 
in  industry  and  high  pressure  syntheses.  The  absorption  of  gases  by  liquids 
and  solids,  absorption  and  reaction  towers,  potash  manufacture  and  recovery, 
recovery  of  waste  acids,  sulphite,  sulphate  and  mechanical  wood  pulp. 

Text-books — E.  R.  Riegel,  Industrial  Chemistry ; Badger  and  Baker, 
Inorganic  Chemical  Technology ; assigned  reading  from  Maxted,  Catalysis 
and  its  Industrial  Applications ; and  other  publications. 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  at  11,  in  Ontario  Hall. 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-4. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Industrial  Chemistry  iv. 

Research  Training 

For  graduate  students  and  students  in  Course  B,  fourth  year,  electing 
thesis  option  in  Industrial  Chemistry. 

Professor  Goodwia 

Chemical  Engineering  i. 

For  students  in  Course  D,  third  year. 

A preparatory  course  in  stoichiometrical  and  plant  calculations,  and  in 
problems  in  Applied  Physical  Chemistry. 

Text-books — Hodgmann-Lange,  Handbook  of  Chemistry  and  Physics 
( Chemical  Rubber  Co.)  , or  Lange,  Handbook  of  Chemistry  (Handbook 
Publishing  Co.)  ; Hitchcock  and  Robinson,  Differential  Equations  in  Applied 
Chemistry  (Wiley). 

Lecture  and  Laboratory — Thursday  at  11,  Friday  at  10,  second  term. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Chemical  ENGiNEaCRiNG  ii. 

For  students  in  Course  D,  fourth  year. 

Industrial  Processes — The  topics  dealt  with  are  similar  to  those  under 
Industrial  Chemistry  III  (a),  with  the  addition  of:  Plant  for  nitric  acid 
manufacture,  the  influence  of  heats  of  reaction.  Dissolution,  decantation, 
filtration,  centrifugals.  The  moving  of  gases,  liquids  and  solids.  The  mea- 
surement of  gases,  and  their  absorption  by  liquids  and  solids.  Absorption  and 
reaction  towers,  their  design  and  the  study  of  filling  materials.  The  manufac- 
ture of  nitro  compounds,  the  concentration  of  weak  acids  and  the  recovery  of 
waste  acids. 


100 


Pulp,  P>.per  and  Synthetic  Plastics — Absorption  principles  and  sul- 
phite towers.  The  manufacture  of  mechanical  and  sulphite  wood  pulp.  The 
Kraft  or  Sulphate,  and  the  soda  process,  modern  methods  of  causticising, 
washing,  and  of  lime,  soda  and  heat  recovery.  The  manufacture  of  gun- 
cotton, cordite,  nitro-cellulose  powder,  celluloid,  viscose  or  artificial  silk,  and 
other  synthetic  colloids. 

A collection  of  industrial  products  and  apparatus  is  available  for  demon- 
stration, and  visits  are  paid  to  outside  chemical  works  in  the  final  year,  at 
which  attendance  is  required. 

Designing  of  Chemical  Plant.  Calculations  and  exercises  in  designing 
chemical  plant  and  factories.  Considerations  underlying  the  choice  of  materials 
of  construction,  acid  proof  containers  and  cements.  Manufacturing  costs  as 
dependent  on  the  cost  of  plant,  raw  materials,  labour,  etc. 

Text-books — Partington,  The  Alkali  Industry;  Badger  and  McCabe, 
Elements  of  Chemical  Engineering ; Hougen  and  Watson,  Industrial  Chemical 
Calculations ; Davis,  Chemistry  of  Explosives ; Badger  and  Baker,  Inorganic 
Chemical  Technology. 

Assigned  reading  from  Maxted,  Catalysis  and  its  Industrial  Applications ; 
Davis,  Handbook  of  Chemical  Engineering ; Lunge,  Sulphuric  Acid  and 
Alkali;  and  original  publications. 

Lectures — Wednesday  and  Friday,  11  a.m.,  first  term;  Friday  and  Satur- 
day, 11-12,  second  term. 

Laboratory — Saturday,  9-12,  first  term;  Wednesday,  1-4,  second  term. 

Professor  Goodwin. 

Chemical  Engineering  hi. 

For  students  in  Course  D,  fourth  year. 

A detailed  study  of  apparatus  and  chemical  engineering  plant,  based  on 
the  chemical  and  physical  conditions  underlying  the  various  processes.  The 
elaboration  in  the  laboratory  of  the  best  working  conditions  for  a giver 
chemical  process. 

The  designing  and  drawing  of  parts  of  a chemical  plant,  based  on  ex- 
perimental results  worked  out  in  the  laboratory.  Experimental  work  with  semi- 
plant scale  chemical  engineering  apparatus.  Fuel  and  heating  calculations. 
The  gas  producer.  Materials  of  construction,  stainless  steels  and  their  uses, 
alloys  for  -high  pressure  work,  etc. 

The  practical  work  will  be  divided  between  the  laboratory  and  the 
draughting  room  as  is  found  necessary.  ' 

Assigned  reading  from  Davis,  Handbook  of  Chemical  Engineering ; 
Lunge- Cummings,  Sulphuric  Acid  and  Alkali;  and  published  papers  and 
pamphlets. 

Reference  books — Perry,  Chemical  Engineers’  Handbook ; Handbook  of 
Chemistry  and  Physics. 

Lectures — Monday,  11-12,  Tuesday,  3-4,  first  term;  Monday,  11-12,  second 
term. 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-4  (a),  1-5  (b),  Friday,  9-11. 

Professors  Goodwin  and  Revell. 


101 


Chemical  Engineering  iv. 

For  students  in  Course  D,  Fourth  Year. 

In  the  first  term  the  lectures  cover  the  metallurgy  of  iron  and  steel 
and  some  of  the  common  metals,  and  non-rusting  and  other  alloys  of  im- 
portance to  chemical  industry. 

In  the  second  term  an  introduction  to  dimensional  analysis  and  graphical 
presentation  is  given  and  illustrated  with  chemical  engineering  problems  in 
fluid  flow  and  heat  transmission. 

Lectures  include  the  processing  of  raw  materials  in  chemical  plants  and 
the  necessary  apparatus  together  with  the  methods  and  instruments  used  for 
control. 

Texts — Badger  and  McCabe,  Elements  of  Chemical  Engineering ; 

Rosenholtz,  Elements  of  Ferrous  Metallurgy. 

Reference  Text — Perry,  Chemical  Engineers’  Handbook. 

Lectures — Thursday,  11-12,  first  term;  Tuesday  and  Wednesday,  11-12, 
Thursday,  10-11,  second  term. 

Professor  Revell. 

Chemical  Engineering  v. 

For  students  in  Course  D,  fourth  year. 

The  applications  of  thermodynamics  to  practical  problems  in  Chemical 
Engineering. 

Text — Weber,  Thermodynamics  for  Chemical  Engineers. 

Lectures — Thursday,  9-10;  Tuesday,  11-12,  first  term,  one  hour  to  be 
arranged. 

Professor  Revell. 

LABORATORY  OF  CHEMICAL  ENGINEERING. 

The  laboratory  is  provided  with  large  size  models  of  steam-jacketed 
evaporating  pans,  porcelain  lined  and  fitted  with  stirring  gear,  with  a steam- 
jacketed  rectifying  column  and  still,  a steam- jacketed  vacuum  evaporator, 
pump  and  condenser,  a jacketed  vacuum  shelf  dryer,  a high  pressure  acid 
proof  filter,  a Sweetland  self-dumping  filter  press  with  sludge  tank  and 
centrifugal  pump,  a Sperry  plate  and  frame  filter  press,  a model  stream-line 
filter,  an  ordinary  and  a high  speed  centrifuge,  a rotating  high  pressure 
autoclave,  and  with  other  technical  apparatus.  Apparatus  is  being  installed 
lor  high  pressure  synthesis,  up  to  100  atmospheres. 

There  is  further  installed  a large  reaction  tower  of  earthenware  designed 
tor  experiments  in  recovering  smelter  and  other  fumes  or  gases,  connected  to 
a fan,  circulating  and  measuring  devices,  and  with  selected  types  of  earthen- 
ware filling  material. 

Instruction  in  this  laboratory  is  planned  to  train  the  student  to  handle 
tairly  large  quantities  of  material  and  to  become  familiar  with  standard  types 
of  technical  chemical  apparatus,  to  work  out  the  experimental  methods  re- 
quired for  attacking  a manufacturing  problem,  and  tO‘  translate  the  laboratory 
results  obtained  into  practice. 


102 


CIVIL  ENGINEERING. 

Professor — D.  S.  Ellis,  B.Sc.,  M.A.,  M.C.E. 

Assistant  Professor — R.  A.  Low,  B.Sc.,  M.C.E. 

Assistant  Professor — J.  B.  Baty,  B.S.  (on  leave  of  absence)* 

Assistant  Professor — C.  V.  Armour,  M.A.Sc. 

Assistant  Professor — S.  D.  Lash,  M.Sc.,  Ph.D.,  A.C.G.I. 

Lecturer— J.  D.  Lee,  B.Sc.,  M.S. 

Special  Lecturer — O.  T.  Macklem,  B.Sc. 

Demonstrator — C.  H.  Ellacott,  B.Sc. 

General  Engineering  I. 

For  students  in  all  Courses  second  year. 

This  subject  embraces  the  physical  properties  of  materials  used  in  the 
different  branches  of  engineering  and  the  principles  involved  in  the  theory 
of  beams,  columns,  and  structures. 

Materials  of  Construction — Physical  properties  of  Engineering  materials 
and  methods  of  testing.  Commercial  shapes  of  materials. 

Stresses  in  Framed  Structures — Analysis  of  stresses  in  roof  and  bridge 
trusses  under  static  and  moving  loads. 

Graphical  Statics — Graphical  representation  of  stress ; funicular  and 
force  polygons. 

Mechanics  of  Materials — Resistance  and  elasticity  of  materials ; stress 
and  strain  diagrams ; bending  and  shearing  forces ; torsion  in  shafting ; de- 
flection of  beams;  columns  and  struts;  riveted  joints;  centres  of  gravity  and 
moments  of  inertia. 

Text-book — Timoshenko  and  MacCullough,  Elements  of  Strength  of 
Materials. 

Books  of  Reference — Seeley,  Resistance  of  Materials;  Moore,  Materials 
of  Engineering. 

Lectures — Monday  and  Friday,  9-10,  ABCDM  ; Monday,  10-11,  Sections 
1-6,  EFG;  Tuesday.  11-12,  Sections  7-12,  EFG;  Wednesday,  8-9,  Sections 
1-6,  EFG;  Friday,  10-11,  Sections  7-12,  EFG. 

Professors  Ellis,  Armour  and  Lash. 

General  Engineering  II. 

Theory  of  Structures 

For  students  in  Course  E,  Third  Year. 

This  course  forms  the  basis  for  the  design  and  analysis  of  structures. 
The  subjects  considered  include:  Stresses  in  statically  determinate  framed 
structures,  bending  moments  in  continuous  and  restrained  beams,  elastic 
curves,  influence  lines,  simple  cases  of  redundant  frameworks,  combined 
stresses. 

Text-book — Timoshenko  and  MacCullough.  Elements  of  Strength  of 
Materials. 

Books  of  Reference — Spofford,  Theory  of  Structures;  George  and 
Rettger,  Mechanics  of  Materials. 

Lecture — Tuesday,  11-12  (a)  ; Tuesday,  9-10  (b). 

Professor  Lash. 

* Lieutenant,  United  States  Army  Sanitary  Corps — active  service. 


103 


General  Engineering  III. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  D,  M,  E,  F,  G,  third  year. 

This  course  consists  of  practical  work  in  the  testing  laboratory.  Its  object 
is  to  give  the  student  a knowledge  of  the  properties  of  engineering  materials 
and  of  standard  test  methods. 

The  materials  tested  include  wood,  steel  and  other  metals,  and  concrete. 

Reference — Moore,  Materials  of  Engineering . 

Laboratory — Mond{ay  afternoon,  alternate  weeks  all  year.  Courses  A,  E 
and  G 1-3;  Courses  F,  D and  M 3-5.  {Note — Alternate  Monday  afternoons — 
Thermodynamics  I.) 

Professor  Lash,  Mr.  Lee,  Mr.  Law. 

General  Engineering  IV. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

A continuation  of  the  work  of  General  Engineering  III.  Tests  are  made 
of  concrete  aggregates,  reinforced  concrete  beams,  masonry  units,  plywood, 
and  other  structural  materials.  Photo-Elastic  methods  of  stress  analysis  are 
demonstrated. 

Laboratory — Tuesday^  1-4,  first  term. 

Professor  Lash. 

General  Engineering  V. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  D,  F,  M,  third  year. 

A course  designed  to  give  the  non-structural  student  a knowledge  of  the 
fundamental  principles  involved  in  the  design  and  detail  of  simple  structures, 
in  timber,  steel  and  reinforced  concrete.  The  theory  applicable  to  columns,, 
beams,  slabs,  riveted  connections,  brackets,  retaining  walls,  trusses,  trestles,, 
water  towers,  and  head-frames  is  discussed  in  the  lectures  and  employed  in' 
the  draughting  room. 

Text-books — National  Lumber  Manufacturers  Association,  Wood  Struc- 
tural Data,  Vol.  I;  American  Institute  of  Steel  Construction,  Steel  Con- 
struction; American  Concrete  Institute,  Reinforced  Concrete  Design  Hand- 
book. 

Reference  books — Young,  Structural  Problems;  National  Building  Codey 
Seely,  Resistance  of  Materials ; George  and  Rettger,  Mechanics  of  Materials ;: 
Parker,  Simplified  Design  of  Roof  Trusses  for  Architects  and  Builders;: 
Johnson,  Bryan  and  Turneaure,  Modern  Framed^  Structures,  Part  1. 

Lectures — Wednesday,  9-10,  D,  F ; Wednesday,  11-12,  A,  M. 

Draughting — Thursday,  2-5,  A,  M ; Friday,  1-4,  D,  F. 

Professor  Armour,  Professor  Lash,  Mr.  Lee, 


104 


General  Engineering  VI. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year. 

Graphical  Representation.  Representation  of  engineering  formulae  and 
data.  Progress  and  cost  diagrams,  interpretation  of  diagrams,  solution  of 
problems  by  means  of  diagrams. 

Graphical  Statics.  Continuation  of  work  in  General  Engineering  I., 
with  relation  to  roofs,  bridges,  arches,  reinforced  concrete  and  other  structures. 

Text-book — Wolfe.  Graphical  Analysis. 

Reference  Text — Marshall,  Graphical  Methods. 

Lecture — Friday,  8-9  (a). 

Draughting — Wednesday,  1-4  (a).  Professor  Low. 

Foundations 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year. 

This  course  covers  Soil  Investigations,  Stress  Distribution  in  Soils,  Bear- 
ing Capacity  of  Soils.  Soil  Pressures  and  Stability  of  Slopes.  Approved 
methods  of  construction  of  footings,  piling,  cofferdams,  caissons  for  founda- 
tions of  buildings,  abutments,  piers,  dams  and  retaining  walls  are  outlined  and 
typical  design  problems,  quantity  estimates  and  costs  are  assigned  for  class 
and  drafting  room. 

Text-books  and  books  of  reference — Jacoby  and  Davis,  Foundation  of 
Bridges  and  Buildings;  Plummer  and  Dore,  Soil  Mechanics  and,  Foundations; 
Cain,  Earth  Pressure.  Assigned  references  for  reading. 

Lectures — Tuesday,  11-12  (b). 

Drafting  Room — Wednesday,  1-4  (b). 

Professor  Low. 

Structural  Engineering  I. 

Elementary  Structural  Design. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year. 

This  course  provides  -an  introduction  to  structural  design. 

The  materials  considered  are  timber,  steel  and  reinforced  concrete.  At- 
tention is  directed  primarily  to  the  proportioning  of  members  such  as  beams 
and  columns  and  to  the  arrangement  of  connections  and  splices. 

In  the  draughting  room  students  are  required  to  design  and  detail 
structures  and  structural  members. 

Text-books — National  Building  Code,  A.I.S.C,  Steel  Construction;  Urqu- 
hart  and  O’Rourke,  Design  of  Concrete  Structures. 

Books  of  Reference — U.S.  Forest  Products  Laboratories,  Wood  Hand- 
book; Joint  Committee  Report — 1940;  Grinter,  Design  of  Modern  Steel 
Structures. 

Lectures — Thursday,  9-10  and  Friday;  10-11. 

Draughting — Thursday,  1-4. 


Professor  Lash. 


105 


Structural  Engineering  II. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

The  theory  of  design  for  continuous  beams,  two-way  reinforcement  and 
flat-slab  construction  is  discussed.  The  fixed  arch  and  the  rigid  frame  are 
analysed  by  the  elastic  theory.  The  methods  of  slope-deflection,  moment- 
distribution  and  model  analysis  are  also  studied.  Foundations,  costs  and 
estimates  of  quantities  are  studied  as  a part  of  the  problems  of  design  in  the 
draughting  room. 

In  the  draughting  room  the  student  is  required  to  design  bridges  and 
buildings  in  accordance  with  prevailing  specifications  and  check  some  of 
his  results  by  reaction  gauges. 

Text-books — Urquhart  and  O’Rourke,  Design  of  Concrete  Structures, 
Joint  Committee  Report,  1940,  and  C.E.S.A.  Concrete  and  Reinforced  Concrete, 
1942. 

Reference  books — Taylor,  Thompson  and  Smulski,  Concrete,  Plain  and 
Reinforced,  Vols.  I and  II;  Hayden,  The  Rigid  Frame  Bridge;  Pulver,  Con- 
struction Estimates  and  Costs. 

Lectures — Monday,  1-2,  Thursday,  10-11,  first  term;  Tuesday,  10-11, 
Thursday,  10-11,  second  term. 

Draughting — Monday,  2-4,  first  term;  1-4,  second  term;  Friday,  1-4. 

Professor  Armour. 

Structural  Engineering  IV. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

Lectures — A course  of  lectures  relating  to  the  theory  of  design  as  applied 
to  riveted  truss  highway  and  railway  spans,  arches,  suspension  bridges  and 
movable  spans.  Deflections  and  secondary  stresses  are  discussed  and  the  meth- 
ods of  Single  Integration,  Moment  Area,  Slope-deflection,  and  Least- Work 
as  applied  to  stress  deformation  is  studied.  The  use  of  models  to  determine 
stress  with  deformeter  gauges  and  polarized  light  is  introduced.  Elementary 
problems  in  applied  elasticity  are  discussed. 

Draugftting  room — Projects  consist  of  the  design  and  detail  of  structures 
studied  in  the  lectures.  Models  are  made  of  a frame  that  has  been  designed 
by  an  accepted  theory  and  the  model  stressed  and  results  compared  to  the 
analytical  figures. 

Text -books — 

Johnson,  Bryan  and  Turneaure,  Modern  Framed  Structures,  Ft.  II. 

A.LS.C.  Steel  Construction. 

Books  of  Reference  — Sutherland  and  Bowman,  Structural  Design; 
Johnson,  Bryan  and  Turneaure,  Modern  Framed  Structures,  Ft.  Ill; 
Timoshenko  and  Lessells,  Applied  Elasticity;  Parcel  and  Maney,  Statically 
Indeterminate  Stresses. 

Lectures — Monday,  10-11  first  term,  Thursday,  11-12. 

Draughting — Wednesday  1-4,  Friday,  10-12. 


Professor  Armour. 


106 


Hydraulic  Engineering  I. 


For  students  in  courses  E,  F,  G,  third  year. 

Application  of  hydrostatic  pressure  in  the  case  of  dams,  gates  and  pipes. 
Flow  of  water  and  other  fluids  and  measurement  of  volume  by  various  orifices 
and  weirs.  Flow  in  open  channels,  ditches,  flumes,  etc.,  and  the  use  and 
application  of  these  conductors  of  water.  Flow  through  tubes  and  pipes.  Use 
of  pipes  as  conductors  of  supply  for  domestic  and  power  purposes.  Dynamic 
and  static  pressure  as  applied  to  motors  for  power  purposes.  Study  of  flow 
of  liquids  other  than  water. 

Experiments  to  cover  above  principles. 

Text-book — Ellis,  Hydraulics. 

Reference  books — King  and  Wisler,  Hydraulics ; A.  H.  Gibson.  Hydraulics ; 
Addison,  Hydraulic  Measurements. 

Lectures- — Tuesday,  9-10  (a),  Friday,  11-12  (b),  Wednesday,  8-9. 


Hydraulic  Engineering  II. 


Mr.  Lee. 


For  students  in  E,  F,  and  G,  fourth  year. 


Comprises  the  study  of  centrifugal  pumps,  fans  and  hydraulic  turbines; 
the  elements  of  hydrology,  the  design  and  construction  of  dams  and  ap- 
pendages ; measurement,  development  and  transmission  of  water  power ; the 
design  of  hydraulic  power  plants : 

Problems  in  relation  to  these  subjects. 

Text-book — Ellis,  Hydraulics. 

Reference  books  — Creager  and  Justin,  Hydroelectric  Hand  Book; 
Schoklitsh,  Flydraulic  Structures;  Air  Conditioning  and  Engineering; 
Daugherty,  Centrifugal  Pumps;  Angus,  Hydraidics. 


Lectures — Monday,  10-11  and  Thursday,  9-10,  F.,  Wednesday,  9-10,  Friday, 
9-10,  E.  G. 


Professor  Ellis. 


Hydraulic  Engineering  III. 


For  students  in  Courses  E,  F,  G.,  fourth  year. 

Work  in  Hydraulics  Laboratory  on  selected  experiments  dealing  with 
hydrostatic  pressure,  orifice,  and  weir  flow,  flow  through  pipes  and  open 
channels,  loss  in  valves  and  pipe  fittings,  efficiency  tests  on  centrifugal 
pumps,  and  reaction  and  impulse  turbines.  Investigation  of  flow  in  draft 
tube.  Air  flow  in  ducts.  Tests  on  fans.  Studies  on  air  foils,  etc.,  in  wind 
tunnel. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  1-4  G,  first  term.  Saturday,  9-12  E,  second  term, 
F — Tuesday,  1-4,  second  term. 


Professor  Ellis,  Mr.  Lee. 


107 


Hydraulic  Engineering  IV. 


For  students  in  Courses  A,  D,  M,  of  fourth  year. 

Hydrostatics  as  applied  to  dams,  gates,  pipes,  etc.  Flow  of  water  and 
other  liquids  through  orifices,  pipes,  and  channels  ; centrifugal  pumps ; hydraulic 
models  ; air  flow ; fans ; ventilation  prohlems  on  mines  and  buildings. 
Demonstration  of  experiments  in  Laboratory. 


T ext-book — Ellis,  Hydraulics. 

Reference  books — Montgomery,  Theory  and  Practice  of  Mine  Ventilation; 
Weekes,  Mine  Ventilation. 

Lectures — Thursday,  10-11,  (a  and  b)  ; Friday,  8-9  (a)  ; Tuesday,  10-11 

(b). 

Professor  Ellis. 


Railway  and  Highway  Engineering 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year. 

Economics  of  railway  and  highway  location,  effects  of  distance,  curva- 
ture, and  grades  on  operation.  The  paper  location  of  a railway  or  highway ; 
estimate  of  grading  costs ; subgrade  drainage ; and  construction  methods. 
Haul  and  the  economic  selection  of  equipment.  Materials  of  construction, 
including  elementary  soil  mechanics. 

Text-books — Webb,  Railroad  Construction ; Bateman,  Highway  Engineer- 
ing. 

Books  of  Reference — Plumber  and  Dore,  Soil  Mechanics  and  Founda- 
tions; American  Highzvay  Engineers’  Handbook. 

Lecture — Monday,  11-12,  Thursday,  10-11. 

Draughting  Room — Friday,  1-4.  Professor  Low. 


Engineering  Relations 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

A composite  course  arranged  to  acquaint  the  student  with  the  legal 
relations  and  business  methods  pertaining  to  the  engineering  profession,  in- 
cluding the  essential  principles  of  contracts  and  specifications,  cost  analysis, 
valuation  and  cost  keeping,  and  to  develop  ability  for  proper  oral  and  written 
expression  and  an  appreciation  of  ethical  and  personal  relations. 

Text-book — Kirby,  Elements  of  Specification  Writing. 

Books  of  reference — Gillette  and  Dana,  Construction  Cost  Keeping  and 
Management ; Fish,  Engineering  Economics ; Mead,  Contracts,  Specifications 
and  Engineering  Relations. 

Lecture — Tuesday,  9-10. 


Professor  Armour. 


108 


Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  I. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year. 

Sewerage — A study  of  the  factors  affecting  the  sewerage  plan,  methods  of 
estimating  future  population,  quantity  of  domestic  sewage,  rainfall  and  method 
of  estimating  run-off  producing  storm  water  flow,  the  hydraulics  of  sewers, 
the  design  of  sewer  systems,  sewer  appurtenances,  and  sewer  construction. 

Water  Supply — A study  of  the  quantity  of  water  required  for  public 
supplies,  sources  of  supply — surface  and  ground  waters,  quality  of  water  from 
various  sources  and  reliability  to  meet  the  demand,  works  for  the  collection 
and  distribution  of  water. 

Computations — Problems  on  population  estimates,  rainfall  intensity  and 
frequency.  Design  of  a separate  sewer  system  and  storm  water  drains. 

Text-books — Babbitt,  Sewerage  and  Sewage  Treatment;  Waterman.  Ele- 
ments of  Water  Supply  Engineering. 

Lectures — Monday,  10-11  and  Tuesday,  10-11,  second  term. 

Computing  Period — Tuesday,  1-4,  second  term. 

Mr.  Lee. 

Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  II 

' For  students  in  Course  E,  Fourth  Year. 

Water  Supply — A study  of  the  relationship  of  public  water  supplies  to 
public  health,  quality  of  natural  waters,  factors  affecting  natural  purification, 
sanitary  surveys,  interpretation  of  water  analyses,  water  purification  and  treat- 
ment processes,  works  for  the  purification  of  water,  the  design  of  purification 
and  treatment  units  and  examination  of  accessory  mechanical  devices,  operation 
of  water  purification  and  treatment  plant  units,  governmental  control  over 
quality  of  public  water  supplies. 

Municipal  Administration — Organization  of  municipal  governments, 
functions  of  the  office  of  city  engineer,  municipal  financing. 

Laboratory  work  includes  the  performance  of  chemical  and  bacteriological 
tests  on  water  to  determine  its  natural  quality,  a study  of  operation  of  model 
rapid  sand  gravity  filters  and  a slow  sand  filter,  tests  to  determine  effectiveness 
of  treatment  processes,  corrective  and  control  measures.  Inspections  of  municipal 
filtration  plants  may  be  arranged. 

Text-book— Waterman,  Elements  of  Water  Supply  Engineering. 

Books  of  reference  — Babbit  and  Doland,  Water  Supply  Engineering ; 
Steele,  Water  Supply  and  Sewerage;  Hardenbergh,  Water  Supply  and  Puri- 
fication; American  Water  Works  Association,  Manual  of  Water  Treat- 
ment; American  Public  Health  Association,  Standard  Methods  of  Water  and 
Sewage  Analysis;  Turneaure  & Russell,  Public  Water  Supplies. 

Lecture — Monday,  11-12. 

Laboratory— Thursday,  1-4  (in  part). 


Mr.  Lee. 


109 


Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  III 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

Sewage  Treatment  and  Disposal.  A study  of  the  characteristics  and 
behaviour  of  domestic  sewage,  principles  and  processes  of  sewage  treatment, 
factors  governing  the  selection  of  a single  process  or  combination  of  processes, 
the  design  of  sewage  treatment  plant  units  and  examination  of  accessory  mech- 
anical devices,  operation  of  sewage  treatment  plant  units,  governmental  control 
over  installation  and  operation  of  municipal  sewage  treatment  plants  in  regard 
to  pollution  of  streams,  lakes  and  other  natural  bodies  of  water. 

Treatment  and  Disposal  of  Industrial  Wastes. 

Municipal  Sanitation.  A study  of  the  methods  of  collection  and  dis- 
posal of  garbage  and  other  municipal  refuse;  municipal  incinerators. 

Laboratory  work  includes  the  performance  of  chemical  and  bacteriological 
tests  on  domestic  sewage  to  determine  its  characteristics,  a study  of  operation 
of  model  sewage  treatment  plant  units  and  accessory  mechanical  devices,  tests 
to  determine  effectiveness  of  treatment  processes  and  Quality  of  final  effluent, 
corrective  and  control  measures.  Inspections  of  municipal  sewage  treatment 
plants  may  be  arranged. 

Text-book — Babbitt,  Sezverage  and  Sezuage  Treatment. 

Books  of  reference — Steel,  Water  Supply  and  Sezverage;  Imhoff  and  Fair, 
Sezvage  Treatment ; Hardenbergh,  Sezverage  and  Sezvage  Treatment ; American 
Public  Health  Association,  Standard  Methods  of  Water  and  Sezvage  Analysis; 
Metcalf  and  Eddy,  American  Sezverage  Practice,  Vol.  III. 

Lecture — Tuesday,  11-12. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4,  (in  part). 

Mr.  Lee. 

NOTE — Laboratory  work  in  Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering  II  and 
III  and  Highway  Engineering  has  been  arranged  for  one  period  of  three  hours 
per  week,  Thursday,  1-4. 

Graduate  Course  in  Municipal  and  Sanitary  Engineering 
(Discontinued  for  the  duration  of  the  War.) 

Directed  Special  Studies 

Sanitary  Engineering  Design — Design  of  special  structures  relating  to 
water  supply  and  sewer  systems,  water  purification  and  sewage  treatment  plants, 
and  refuse  incinerators ; Examination  of  plans  and  existing  structures. 

Sanitary  Chemistry  and  Biology — Advanced  studies  of  the  chemical 
and  biological  factors  involved  in  water  purification  and  sewage  treatment; 
Microscopy  of  water  supplies ; Chemical  and  bacteriological  analyses  of  water 
and  sewage  in  the  laboratory. 


no 


Watek  Purification  and  Sewage  Treatment — Advanced  studies  of  all 
processes;  Mechanics  of  operation.of  purification  and  treatment  plant  units  and 
accessory  devices ; Laboratory  tests  for  determining  degree  of  treatment,  and 
plant  efficiency ; Corrective  and  control  measures ; Plant  records ; Inspections  of 
municipal  plants. 

Treatment  of  Industrial  Wastes — A study  of  the  methods  of  treating 
various  kinds  of  industrial  wastes  separate  from  domestic  sewage. 

Municipal  Engineering — Municipal  Administration  and  financing;  Func- 
tions of  the  office  of  City  Engineer ; Municipal  Sanitation : — Refuse  collec- 
tion and  Disposal,  Plumbing. 

Public  Health  Engineering — Sanitary  Surveys ; Protection  of  all  public 
water  supplies ; Protection  of  bodies  of  water  used  for  recreational  purposes 
or  harvesting  of  shellfish;  Stream  pollution  investigations  and  control;  Water- 
borne diseases  and  statistical  information  on  water-borne  disease  epidemics ; 
Swimming  pool  sanitation ; Rural  Sanitation  ; Functions  of  Engineering  Bureaus 
of  Government  Health  Departments ; Government  Health  Departments’  Stand- 
ards relating  to  quality  of  Public  Water  Supplies  and  Rules  and  Regulations 
governing  design  of  water  supply  and  sewerage  projects  and  operation  of  water 
purification  and  sewage  treatment  plants ; Public  Health  Laws,  Sanitary  Codes 
and  Court  cases  relating  to  violations. 

Current  Literature  on  Sanitary  Engineering. 

Special  articles  in  current  proceedings  of  water  and  sewage  works  asso- 
ciations and  engineering  journals. 

Research  and  Thesis  on  some  special  subject  in  Sanitary  Engineering. 

Professor  Baty. 

Highway  Engineering  H. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  fourth  year. 

Development  and  classification  of  road  and  street  types ; design,  methods 
of  construction,  and  maintenance.  Stabilization  of  road  subgrades  and  sur- 
faces. Economic  selection  of  surface  types.  Treatment  and  design  of 
Intersections  and  grade  separations.  Elements  of  traffic  engineering.  Highway 
planning,  financing,  and  administration. 

Soil  Mechanics  Laboratory — Materials  testing ; soils,  aggregates  and 
bituminous  materials.  Assigned  problems  in  design  of  graded  mixes,  em- 
bankment compaction  and  soil  stabilization. 

Text-book — Bateman,  Highzvay  Engineering. 

Books  of  reference — Agg,  Construction  of  Roads  and  Pavements ; Plummer 
and  Dore,  Soil  Mechanics  and  Foundations;  Traffic  Engineering  Handbook ; 
Publications,  Bureau  of  Public  Roads  and  Highway  Research  Board. 

Lecture — Wednesday,  11-12. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4,  (in  part).  Professor  Low. 


Ill 


Surveying. 

All  branches  of  Surveying  receive  full  consideration.  During  the  out- 
door instruction  students  are  given  every  opportunity  to  become  familiar 
with  the  instruments.  Notes  of  all  field  work  are  plotted  in  the  draughting- 
room,  and  the  rules  and  regulations  for  field  work  and  instruments-room 
must  be  strictly  adhered  to.  Students  must  be  engaged  in  the  work  of  a 
class  in  the  hours  set  apart  for  it,  otherwise  their  attendance  will  not  be 
counted.  Attendance  and  character  of  work  done  will  be  considered  in  the 
class  standing. 

Surveying  I. 

Required  of  all  first  year  students. 

The  description,  use,  adjustment  and  care  of  chains,  tapes,  compasses, 
levels,  transits  and  minor  surveying  equipment.  Methods  employed  in  ele- 
mentary surveying. 

The  practical  work  in  the  field  and  draughting  rooms  is  an  important 
part  of  this  course. 

Text-book — Breed,  Surveying. 

Books  of  reference — Davis  and  Foote,  Surveying  Theory  and  Practice; 
Davis,  Foote,  and  Raynor,  Surveying ; Breed  and  Hosmer,  Elementary 
Surveying. 

Lecture — {Field  Work),  Sects.  1-2,  Friday,  1-3,  Sects.  3-4,  Monday,  1-3. 

Sects.  5-6,  Friday  9-11,  Sects.  7-8,  Monday,  9-11. 

Professor  Macklem,  Mr.  Ellacott. 

Surveying  II. 

For  students  in  all  courses,  second  year. 

It  continues  the  work  of  Surveying  I,  and  includes  Land  Surveying — 
Route  Surveying — profiles,  circular  and  vertical  curves,  earthwork;  Topo- 
graphic Surveying — with  stadia,  plane  table,  hand  level,  and  transit  and  level ; 
Hydrographic  Surveying  — Methods,  sextant,  river  surveying,  stream  flow ; 
Laying  out  of  buildings  and  engineering  construction.  Underground  Surveying. 
Observations  for  Azimuth.  Errors. 

Text-books — Davis  and  Foote,  Surveying  Theory  and  Practice;  Breed, 
Surveying. 

Lecture— K,  B,  C,  D,  M,  Friday,  10-11;  E,  F,  G,  (1-6),  Tuesday,  8-9; 

E,  F,  G,  (7-12),  Monday,  10-11. 

Field  Work  and  Draughting — A,  B,  C,  D,  M,  Wednesday,  8-11;  E,  F,  G, 
Sections  1-6,  Tuesday,  9-12;  Sections  7-12,  Tuesday,  1-4. 

Professor  Low,  Mr.  Ellacott. 

Surveying  III. 

For  students  in  Course  E,  third  year,  first  term. 

Topographic  Surveying,  Stream  Measurement,  Hydrographic  Surveying, 
Mine  Surveying,  Base  Line  Measurement,  Triangulations,  Adjustment  of 


112 


simple  figures,  G^mputation  of  coordinates,  Map  Projections;  Precise  level- 
ling; Observations  for  Azimuth,  Latitude,  Time.  Introduction  to  adjustment 
of  observations.  Outlines  of  D.L.S.  and  O.L.S.  systems.  Descriptions. 

Practice.  Field  work  taken  at  Field  Survey  class  which  is  prerequisite. 

Text-book — Davis,  Foote  and  Rayner,  Surveying. 

Lecture — Wednesday^  10-11,  first  term. 

Field  Work  and  Draughting — Tuesday,  1-4,  first  term. 

Professor  Ellis. 

SURVEYING  FIELD  WORK 

The  class  in  surveying  field  work  is  intended  to  give  the  third  year  students 
in  courses  A,  C and  E an  opportunity  to  become  familiar  with  instruments 
and  methods  of  survey  under  conditions  approximating  those  of  commercial 
work.  It  is  prerequisite  for  Surveying  III. 

The  syllabus  covers  field  work  on  the  following  lines,  simple  triangula- 
tion, base  lines,  stadia,  plane  table,  location  of  engineering  structures,  land 
boundaries  and  possibly  soundings  and  stream  measurements ; azimuth  obser- 
vations on  sun  and  polaris,  mine  surveying. 

In  rotation  each  student  will  take  charge  of  his  own  party  and  ability  to 
organize  and  direct  work  will  in  part  determine  his  standing. 

Individual  copies  of  the  notes  will  be  prepared  day  by  day  by  the  note 
recorders  of  each  party.  These  will  be  used  later  in  preparing  plans,  etc. 
Observations,  etc,,  will  be  worked  out  as  taken. 

The  work  will  be  carried  out  in  the  vicinity  of  Kingston.  Transport  will 
be  arranged  by  the  department.  Students  will  need  to  carry  lunches  on 
most  days.  Each  student  will  require  tables,  etc.,  and  a reading  glass  is 
compulsory. 

Students  intending  to  take  this  class  are  required  to  notify  the  Registrar 
not  later  than  August  1st. 

The  class  work  will  commence  at  9.00  a.m.  on  Monday,  September  13th, 
and  will  end  Saturday,  September  25th. 

Professor  Low. 

Thesis. 

Fourth  Year  students  in  Civil  Engineering  are  required  to  submit  a thesis. 
The  purpose  of  the  work  is  to  provide  a training  in  collecting  data  and  pre- 
senting it  in  fair  literary  style. 

The  subject  of  the  thesis  is  to  be  from  the  field  of  Civil  Engineering 
and  the  work  may  be  the  result  of  summer  employment,  library  investigation 
or  laboratory  research.  The  title  and  a provisional  outline  of  the  proposed 
thesis  must  be  submitted  to  the  Civil  Engineering  Department  not  later  than 
October  15th,  and  the  completed  work,  in  approved  form,  handed  in  on  or 
before  February  15th.  Printed  instructions  are  issued  to  each  student  in  the 
Third  Year. 


Professor  Ellis. 


113 


Laboratories. 

The  Civil  Engineering  Laboratories,  used  principally  in  the  third  and 
fourth  years  of  the  Course,  consist  of  the  following  units. 

The  Materials  Laboratory  occupies  the  whole  of  the  basement  floor  of 
Carruthers  Hall,  which  has  recently  been  rebuilt.  There  is  a large  room 
for  concrete,  with  bin  storage  for  raw  materials  and  all  the  equipment  needed 
for  storing  and  curing  the  specimens.  It  is  fully  equipped  with  scales,  “Rotap’* 
machine,  screens,  etc.,  for  analyses  of  sand  and  coarse  aggregate,  and  there 
are  two  small  mixers. 

In  the  machine  room  adjacent  to  the  concrete  room,  the  following  testing 
machines  are  placed — A Riehle  machine  of  100,000  lbs.,  capacity,  two  Amsler 
hydraulic  machines,  each  of  50,000  lbs.  capacity,  one  of  which  has  a long 
bed  for  beams,  a 30,000  lbs.  Olsen  riachine,  a torsion  machine  of  6,000  in.  lb. 
capacity  and  an  Izod  machine  of  120  ft.  lb.  capacity. 

A full  assortment  of  gauges  for  use  with  these  machines  is  available. 

For  examination  of  the  hardness  of  metals  a Brinell  machine,  and  Shore 
Sclerometer  are  used. 

Next  the  machine  room  is  a dark  room  for  work  with  the  Photoelasticity 
apparatus  on  stress  distribution  in  transparent  models. 

The  Sanitary  Engineering  Laboratory  in  its  own  building  on  the  water 
front  is  outstanding.  It  contains  equipment  for  a small  sewage  plant  to 
rreat  70,000  gallons  per  day,  a small  rapid  sand  gravity  filter,  and  a slow 
sand  filter  with  a combined  capacity  of  68,000  gallons.  There  is  a fully 
equipped  analytic  laboratory  where  students  may  acquire  laboratory  technique 
and  a knowledge  of  processes.  At  the  same  time  they  have  an  opportunity 
to  test  actual  plant  operation  and  correlate  their  information  with  design 
of  treatment  units. 

The  Highway  Laboratory,  which  occupies  part  of  the  new  Sanitary 
Laboratory  building,  is  equipped  to  carry  out  the  standard  tests  for  bituminous 
materials  and  aggregates  used  as  highway  construction  materials.  Facilities 
are  also  provided  for  the  analysis  and  classification  of  soils  and  for  experiments 
in  the  field  of  soil  stabilization. 

The  Hydraulics  Laboratory  occupies  its  own  building  in  the  University 
Grounds.  In  the  basement  is  a large  tank  and  flume  from  which  water  may 
be  pumped  to  any  of  the  equipment.  The  equipment  of  the  laboratory  com- 
prises four  centrifugal  pumps,  and  a Francis  and  Impulse  turbine,  two  open 
channels  for  weirs  and  the  usual  pipe  racks  and  orifice  equipment.  On  the 
main  floor  of  the  same  building  is  the  Air  Laboratory  in  which  are  two 
large  and  two  small  fans,  with  ducts  of  various  sizes.  A two  foot  open  throat 
wind  tunnel  with  balance  is  used  for  aerodynamic  experiments. 

Several  sensitive  gauges  are  available  for  measurement  of  low  velocities. 


114 


ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING. 

Professor — D.  M.  Jemmett,  B.Sc.,  M.A. 

Associate  Professor — H.  H.  Stewart,  B.Sc.,  M.S. 

Assistant  Professor — H.  S.  Pollock,  M.Sc. 

Demonstrator — N.  A.  Williams,  B.Sc. 

Electrical  Engineering  I. 

FUNDAMENTAL  PRINCIPLES 

For  third  year  students  in  Courses  A,  D,  M,  E. 

The  electric  circuit.  The  magnetic  circuit.  Generated  and  induced 
electro-motive  forces.  Self  and  mutual  induction.  Elementary  theory  of 
alternating  and  direct  current  generators  and  motors.  Common  systems  of 
transmission  and  distribution  of  electric  current.  General  principles  of 
illumination.  Storage  batteries. 

Lectures — Monday,  10-11  (a)  ; Monday,  9-10  (b)  ; Friday,  9-10. 

Laboratory — D,  M,  Monday,  1-3 ; A,  and  E,  Monday,  3-5. 

Professor  Pollock  and  Mr.  Williams. 

Electrical  Engineering  II. 

For  third  year  students  in  Courses  G and  H. 

Alternating  currents.  The  use  of  the  complex  quantity.  Energy  and 
power  in  A.  C.  circuits.  Laws  governing  the  flow  of  current  in  circuits  con- 
taining resistance,  inductance  and  condensance.  The  theory,  construction  and 
operation  of  the  transformer.  Meters  and  the  measurement  of  electrical 
quantities. 

Lectures — Wednesday,  9-10  (a)  ; Monday,  9-10  (b)  ; Thursday,  11-12. 

Professor  Stewart. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  1-4.  Professor  .Stewart  and  Mr.  Williams. 

Electrical  Engineering  III. 

For  third  year  students  in  Course  G. 

The  electric  and  magnetic  circuits,  hysteresis  and  hysteresis  Iossl 
Measurement  of  magnetic  quantities.  Some  simple  transients.  Theory  of  dir- 
ect current  generators  and  motors.  Series,  shunt  and  compound  machines. 
Energy  losses,  efficiency  and  commutation,  methods  of  control,  storage  bat- 
teries. Application  of  direct  current  in  commercial  work.  Illumination  and 
photometry. 

Lectures — Monday,  9-10  (a)  ; Tuesday,  10-11  (b)  ; Wednesday,  11-12; 
Thursday,  10-11.  Professor  Jemmett. 

Laboratory — Saturday,  9-12.  Professor  Jemmett  and  Mr.  Williams. 


115 


Electrical  Engineering  IV. 

For  third  year  students  in  Course  F. 

The  electric  circuit.  Continuous-current  meters.  Continuous-current  gen- 
erator and  motor.  Batteries.  Illumination. 

Lectures — Monday,  9-10  (a)  ; Thursday,  11-12  (a)  ; Tuesday,  10-11  (b)  ; 
Friday,  10-11  (b).  Professor  Pollock. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  3-5.  Professor  Pollock  and  Mr.  Williams. 

Electrical  Engineidxing  V. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  G. 

Theory  of  alternating  current  generators.  Synchronous  and  Asynchronous 
Motors.  Rotary  Converters.  Potential  Regulators.  Phase  changing.  Multi- 
phase Systems.  Transmission  of  power.  Applications  of  alternating  current 
in  commercial  work. 

Lectures — Monday,  11-12;  Tuesday,  9-10;  Thursday,  11-12;  Friday, 
11-12  (a);  Friday,  10-11  (b). 

Professor  Jemmett. 

Laboratory — -Thursday,  1-4;  Friday,  1-4. 

Professor  Jemmett  and  Mr.  Williams. 

Electrical  Engineering  VI. 

For  third  year  students  in  Courses  G and  H. 

Properties  of  electrons  and  their  dislodgement  from  atoms  of  vapours, 
gases  and  solids.  Physics  of  thermonic  vacuum  tube.  Photo  electricity. 
Gaseous  rectifiers. 

Lectures — Wednesday,  9-10  (b)  ; Thursday,  9-10  (b). 

Professor  Pollock. 


Electrical  Engineering  VII. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  F. 

Fundamental  principles  of  alternating-current  circuits.  Single  phase  and 
polyphase  circuits.  Study  of  the  alternating-current  generator,  the  transformer, 
the  induction  motor,  the  synchronous  motor,  single-phase  motors,  and  rectify- 
ing devices. 

Lectures — Monday,  11-12;  Wednesday.  1-2.  Professor  Stewart. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  2-4.  Professor  Stewart  and  Mr.  Williams. 

Electrical  Engineering  VIII. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  G and  H. 

Exact  solution  of  transmission  lines  in  the  steady  state.  The  general 
differential  equation.  Solution  in  hyperbolic  functions.  Free,  grounded  and 


116 


leaded  lines.  Nominal  and  Equivalent  tt  and  T lines.  Constant  voltage  systems. 
Theory  of  Filters.  Use  of  complex  circular  and  hyperbolic  tables  and  charts. 
Solution  of  power  and  telephone  lines. 

•Lecture — Monday,  10-11. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  1-4  (a)  ; Wednesday,  1-4  (b). 

Professor  Jemmett. 

Electrical  Engineering  IX. 

For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  G. 

This  course  deals  with  the  general  principles  and  practical  applications 
of  radio.  Time  is  also  given  to  the  study  of  protective  relays,  their  use  in 
A.C.  and  D.C.  power  systems  and  other  related  subjects. 

Lectures — Thursday,  10-11  (b)  ; Friday,  10-11  (a);  Wednesday,  10-11. 

Professor  Pollock. 

Laboratory — Saturckiy,  9-12. 

Professors  Stewart  and  Pollock. 
Electrical  Engineering  X. 


For  fourth  year  students  in  Course  G. 

Design  and  Calculation  of  performance  of  transformers,  generators  and 
motors. 

Lecture — Tuesday,  11-12. 


Draughting  Room — Monday,  1-4. 


Professor  Jemmett. 


Electrical  Engineering  XI. 


For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  G and  H. 

A special  course  in  ultra  short  wave  radio. 

Lecture — Tuesday,  11-12  (a),  10-11  (b). 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-4.  Professor  Stewart, 


Electrical  Engineering  XII. 


For  fourth  year  students  in  Courses  G and  H. 

A course  for  the  study  of  the  various  types  of  electron  tubes  and  their 
applications.  The  three-electrode  vacuum  tube  as  an  amplifier,  oscillator, 
detector  and  modulator.  Special  types  of  vacuum  tubes.  Application  of 
electron  tubes  to  radio,  wire  telephony  and  power. 

Lectures — Wednesday,  10-11;  Thursday,  10-11,  Professor  Stewart. 

Laboratory — Saturday,  9-12.  Professors  Stewart  and  Pollock. 


Electrical  Engineering  Laboratories. 

Laboratories  Nos.  1,  2,  3 and  4 are  equipped  with  standard  types  of  direct 
and  alternating  current  machines  which  include  synchronous  motors  and 


117 


generators,  rotary  converters,  polyphase  induction  motors,  repulsion  and  com- 
pensated induction  motors,  constant  current  transformers,  series  and  potential 
transformers,  power  transformers,  direct  current  shunt,  series  and  compound 
wound  machines.  A complete  set  of  rheostats  and  brakes  with  all  necessary 
meters  are  available  for  determining  the  performance  of  these  machines. 

Laboratory  No.  5 is  the  radio  laboratory  and  is  equipped  with  power 
supplies  of  all  kinds  necessary  for  vacuum  tube  experiments,  audio  frequency 
oscillators  and  calibrated  attenuators,  vacuum  tube  voltmeters,  a signal  gen- 
erator and  output  meter  for  measuring  receiver  characteristics,  a distortion 
and  noise  measuring  set,  two  audio  frequency  bridges  for  measurement  of 
resistance,  inductance  and  capacity  and  all  necessary  meters.  A magnetic  and 
a cathode  ray  oscillograph  are  available  for  wave  form  study. 

Laboratory  No.  6 contains  the  experimental  broadcasting  station  CFRC. 

Laboratory  No.  2 contains  the  storage  battery,  balancer  and  booster  con- 
trol panels  and  a transformer  giving  voltages  up  to  100,000  volts.  A sphere  gap 
voltmeter  is  available  for  measuring  high  voltages. 

Power  is  available  from  the  University  Plant  at  220/110  volts  D.C.  direct 
or  through  a motor — generator  set  which  delivers  power  at  120/60  volts  D.C. 
and  2 phase  85  volts  25  cycles  A.C.  A 125  volt,  200  ampere  hour  storage 
battery  and  city  power  at  3 phase  220/110  volts  60  cycles  are  also  provided. 

A large  number  of  circuits  which  have  terminals  in  the  various  labora- 
tories enable  power  to  be  easily  transferred  from  any  machine  to  any  other 
machine. 

The  University  Power  Plant  is  a combination  direct  and  alternating 
current  system  making  available  for  study  and  observation  such  apparatus  as 
D.C.  generators,  synchronous  motors,  Tirril  regulators,  balancer  sets,  storage 
batteries,  power  transformers,  watthour  meters,  boosters,  switchboard  ap- 
paratus, etc. 

The  City  of  Kingston  has  a new  and  up-to-date  hydro-electric  station,  to 
which  visits  are  made  for  instruction  and  observation. 

MECHANICAL  ENGINEERING. 

Professor — Major-General  E.  Schmidlin,  M.C. 

Associate  Professor — L.  T.  Rutledge,  B.A.Sc.,  M.E, 

Assistant  Professor — W.  A.  Wolfe,  M.Sc. 

Lecturer — H.  G.  Conn,  B.Sc.  (on  active  service). 

Mechanical  Engineering  I. 

Elements  of  Machine  Design 

For  students  in  Courses  F and  G,  third  year. 

This  course  covers  the  following:  characteristics  and  properties  of 
materials  used  in  machine  industries ; simple  and  combined  stresses ; principles 

* Major,  Royal  Canadian  Ordnance  Corps,  Overseas. 


118 


governing  design  for  strength,  safety,  rigidity,  and  endurance;  analysis  of 
stresses  in  and  design  of  pressure  vessels,  fastenings,  shafts,  shaft  coupling, 
clutches,  fly  wheels,  frames  of  machines,  brackets,  welded  structures  and 
designs  of  various  typical  machine  parts  and  compound  members. 

Text-book — Vallance,  Design  of  Machine  Members. 

Lectures — Monday,  10-11;  Tuesday,  11-12. 

Professor  Rutledge. 

Mechanical  Engineering  II. 

Transmission  of  Power  and  Machinery. 

For  students  in  courses  F,  G,  third  year. 

The  work  in  this  class  consists  of  analyses  of  stress  and  design  of  power 
transmission  systems,  comprising  belt,  rope,  chain  and  gear  drives ; study  of 
couplings,  friction  clutches  and  brakes.  Dynamics  of  Machinery  including 
speed  fluctuations  in  machinery,  kinetic  energy  of  machines,  inertia,  proper 
weights  of  flywheels,  accelerations  in  machines  and  their  effects.  Disturbing 
forces : stresses  due  to  inertia,  balancing  of  machinery. 

Text-books — Design  of  Machine  Members,  by  Vallance;  Theory  of  Mach- 
ines, by  Angus ; Mark’s  Mechanical  Handbook. 

Lectures — Monday,  11-12;  Tuesday  and  Friday,  9-10,  second  term  only. 

Professor  Rutledge. 

Mechanical  Engineering  III 

Practical  Machine  Design. 

For  students  in  course  F,  third  year. 

This  course  is  a practical  application  of  the  work  taught  in  Mechanical 
Engineering  I and  II.  It  is  given  conjointly  with  Mechanical  Engineering  VII, 
on  Thursdays,  from  1.00  to  4.00  p.m. 

This  course  also  covers  a study  of  machine-shop  practice,  of  basic  machin- 
ing operations,  and  of  manufacturing  processes.  The  course  treats  of  tool 
engineering,  and  includes  the  design  and  operation  of  cutting  tools,  jigs,  fix- 
tures, machine  dies  and  cams.  This  portion  of  the  course  is  given  on  Wednes- 
days, from  1.00  to  4.00  p.m. 

Lectures  and  draughting  exercises — Wednesday,  1-4;  Thursday,  1-4. 

Professor  Rutledge. 

Mechanical  Engineering  IV. 

Elementary  Heat  Engineering 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  E,  and  G,  fourth  year. 

This  course  is  largely  of  a descriptive  character,  and  is  intended  to  give 
the  general  idea  of  Heat  Engineering  to  students  not  taking  the  Mechanical 
Engineering  course.  It  comprises  instruction  in  the  parts  of  steam  power 
plants  and  their  functions,  the  use  of  compressed  air,  the  use  of  internal- 
combustion  engines  as  power  plants,  the  principles  of  heating,  ventilating  and 
air-conditioning,  the  principles  and  uses  of  producer-gas  plants  and  the  prin- 
ciples of  fans,  blowers  and  pumps. 

Lectures — Thursday,  9-10,  and  Tuesday,  10-11  (a),  1-2  (b). 

Major-General  Schmidlin. 


119 


Mechanical  Engineering  V. 

Advanced  Machine  Design 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  covers  a more  intensive  treatment  of  Machine  Design  and 
the  theory  and  evaluation  of  stress.  It  includes  studies  of  the  following: 
theory  and  design  of  curved  beams,  crane  hooks  and  curved  frames ; eccen- 
tricity of  loading ; struts  and  tie-bars  axially  and  transversely  loaded ; mining 
machinery  such  as  mine  hoists,  cars,  skips,  and  conveying  equipment;  auto- 
mobile parts;  spiral  and  worm  gearing;  manufacturing  processes  and  methods; 
aeroplane  design  including  a brief  study  of  the  principles  of  Aeronautics  and 
Aerodynamics  necessary  to  imderstand  the  principles  of  flight. 

Text-books — The  general  texts  are  the  same  as  those  listed  in  Mechanical 
Engineering  I.  Aeroplane  Text — Wood,  Technical  Aerodynamics. 

Lectures — Mond\a'%  1-2;  Tuesday,  10-11;  Wednesday,  8-9. 

Laboratory — Monday,  2-5;  Tuesday,  1-4  (a). 

Professor  Rutledge. 

Mechanical  Engineering  VI. 

Design  of  Power  Plants,  Heating,  Ventilating  and  Refrigeration. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  is  the  continuation  of  Thermodynamics  V,  in  so  far  as  steam 
power  plants  are  concerned,  and  in  this  respect  deals  with  the  more  advanced 
study  of  steam  cycles,  the  selection  of  condensers  and  exhaust  pressures,  the 
selection  of  boiler  and  stoker  types  and  of  pressures  and  temperatures.  It 
deals  also  with  the  study  of  re-heating  and  regenerative  cycles,  binary-vapor 
cycles,  feed -water  treatment  and  heating,  the  use  of  economisers  and  air  heaters, 
the  layout  of  .power  stations,  etc.  The  economic  aspect  of  the  problem  is 
emphasized  throughout. 

The  course  also  includes  the  principles  and  practices  of  heating,  ventilating 
and  air-conditioning  and  the  practical  applications  of  refrigerating  and  ice- 
making macninery. 

Text-books — GafTert,  Steam  Power  Stations;  Allen  and  Walker,  Heating, 
Ventilating  and  Air  Conditioning. 

Lectures — Thursday,  10-12  (a)  and  10-11  (b). 

Major-General  Schmidlin. 

Mechanical  Engineering  VII. 

Practical  Machine  Design. 

For  students  in  Course  G,  third  year. 

This  course  is  a practical  application  of  work  taken  up  in  Mechanical  I 
and  II  which  courses  are  prerequisites  of  the  course. 

Draughting — Thursday,  1-4. 


Professor  Rutledge. 


120 


Mechanical  Engineering  V'III. 

Fuel  Testing. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  comprises  the  testing,  by  standard  methods,  of  solid,  liquid 
and  gaseous  fuels,  to  obtain  proximate  analyses  and  calorific  values.  It  also 
includes  standard  distillation  tests  of  volatile  fuels,  and  standard  tests  of 
lubricants,  and  the  analysis  of  flue-gases  and  internal-combustion  engine 
exhausts. 

Laboratory — Saturday,  9-12. 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Professor  Wolfe. 

Mechanical  Engineering  IX. 

Kinematics  of  Machinery 

For  students  in  Courses  E,  F,  and  G,  second  year. 

This  course  treats  of  the  theory  of  mechanisms  and  the  kinematics  of 
machinery.  It  also  includes  a treatment  of  the  fundamental  principles  per- 
taining to  the  design  of  spur  gears,  gear  trains  and  the  proportioning  of 
speeds  with  gears. 

Text-book — Angus,  Theory  of  Machines. 

Lecture — Wednesday,  10-11. 

Drafting — Sections  1-4,  Thursday,  1-3;  Sections  5-8,  Thursday,  3-5; 
Sections  9-12,  Tuesday,  8-10. 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Demonstrators. 

Mechanical  Engineering  X. 

Production  Engineering 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  includes  lectures  and  draughting  room  exercises  on  factory 
planning  and  layout,  equipment  and  services  in  buildings,  machine  foundations, 
building  types,  product  design  as  affecting  production,  the  planning  and  sche- 
duling of  machine  operations,  tolerances,  the  design  of  tools,  jigs  and  fixtures, 
types  and  uses  of  automatic  machines,  time,  motion  and  cost  studies,  selection 
of  materials,  etc. 

Lectures  and  Draughting  Room — Friday,  10-12  (a),  9-11  (b). 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Professor  Wolfe. 

Mechanical  Engineering  XI. 

Internal  Combustion  Engines. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  consists  of  lectures  on  the  basic  theory  of  operation  of  all 
types  of  internal-comibustion  engines,  and  study  of  the  effects  on  theoretical 
performance  of  practical  design  limitations.  The  methods  of  design  of 
combustion  spaces,  valves  and  valve  gear,  ignition  systems,  carburetors,  fuel 
pumps,  etc.,  are  also  included. 

Text-book — Lichty,  Internal  Combustion  Engine. 

Lectures — Wednesday.  10-12  (a),  10-11  (b)  ; Thursday,  11-12  (b). 

Professor  Wolfe. 


121 


Mechanical  Engineering  XII. 

A short  course  in  the  Elements  of  Machine  Design  for  third  year  D and 
M students,  and  covering  in  general  selected  suitable  portions  of  Mechanical 
Engineering  I. 

Lectures — Tuesday,  11-12  (a)  ; Thursday,  8-9  (b). 

Draughting — Wednesday,  1-4  (b).  Professor  Wolfe. 

Thermodynamics  I. 

Elementary  Engineering  Thermodynamics 
For  students  in  Courses  A,  D,  M,  E,  F,  and  G,  third  year. 

This  course  includes  a study  of  the  following : thermodynamic  media  and 
their  co-ordinates,  energy  factors,  the  energy  equation,  thermodynamic  pro- 
cesses, properties  of  media  and  processes,  mixtures  of  media,  availability  of 
energy,  thermodynamic  cycles. 

Text-book — Lichty,  T hermodynamics. 

Lectures — Monday,  8-9. 

Laboratory — Monday,  1-5  (in  accordance  with  group  and  period  arrange- 
ments as  shown  under  General  Engineering  III.) 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Professor  Wolfe. 

Thermodynamics  II. 

Advanced  Thermodynamics 

For  students  in  Course  D,  fourth  year. 

This  course  includes  lectures  and  laboratory  work  in  Applied  Thermo- 
dynamics, in  continuation  of  Thermodynamics  I.  The  subjects  covered  include 
the  flow  of  vapours  and  gases  through  pipes,  nozzles,  and  orifices,  the  theory 
and  practice  of  heat  transfer,  the  application  of  thermodynamics  to  the  study 
of  practical  methods  of  air  compression,  the  application  of  thermodynamics  to 
the  study  of  refrigeration  systems,  and  the  thermodynamics  of  certain  chemical 
processes  in  industry. 

Text-book — Emswiler,  Thermodynamics. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Wedjiesday,  9-10. 

Laboratory — Wednesday,  1-4  (a). 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Professor  Wolfe. 

Thermodynamics  III. 

Advanced  Thermodynamics. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  is  a continuation  of  Thermodynamics  I,  and  includes  lectures 
and  laboratory  work  on  the  flow  of  vapours  and  gases  through  pipes,  nozzles 
and  orifices,  flow  through  turbine  blading,  the  principles  of  design  of  various 


122 


types  of  steam  turbines,  the  thermodynamics  of  steam-engine  cycles,  engine 
efficiencies,  the  use  of  Steam  Tables  and  Diagrams  in  the  solution  of  problems, 
the  application  of  thermodynamics  to  the  study  of  practical  methods  of  air 
compression,  the  application  of  thermodynamics  to  the  study  of  refrigeration 
systems. 

Text-book — Emswiler,  Thermodynamics. 

Reference  works  in  the  library. 

Lectures — Tuesday  and  Wednesday,  9-10. 

Laboratory — Thursday,  1-4,  first  term. 

Major-General  Schmidlin. 

Thermodynamics  IV. 

Advanced  Thermodynamic  Laboratory  Work. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  fourth  year. 

This  course  consists  of  tests  on  steam  engines,  steam  turbines,  and  internal- 
combustion  engines  both  gasoline  and  oil  burning,  also  tests  on  complete  steam 
cycles,  including  a standard  A.S.M.E.  test  of  a steam-generating  plant.  Lec- 
tures are  also  given  on  the  practical  operation  and  features  of  design  and 
application  of  internal-combustion  engines. 

Text-books — A.S.M.E.  Proceedings  and  Bulletins ; Reference  works  on 
testing. 

Laboratory — Friday,  11-12  (b)  and  1-4. 

Major-General  Schmidlin  and  Professor  Wolfe. 

Thermodynamics  V. 

Elementary  Power  Plant  Engineering. 

For  students  in  Course  F,  third  year. 

This  course  is  a study  of  the  fundamental  principles  underlying  the 
design,  construction,  and  operation  of  steam  power  plant  equipment,  in  which 
reciprocating  steam-engines  are  used  for  the  generation  of  power.  The  marine 
power  plant,  particularly  that  of  the  merchant  marine  vessel,  is  included, 
together  with  land  installations.  The  course  includes  intensive  studies  of 
steam-engines,  both  simple  and  multiple,  steam  boilers,  feed  water  heaters, 
condensers,  pumps,  automatic  regulating  gear,  steam  piping  and  miscellaneous 
equipment,  fuels  and  combustion,  stokers,  steam  plant  measuring  instruments 
and  equipment. 

The  course  treats  at  length  of  the  losses  in  the  operation  of  steam-engines 
and  plants,  the  causes  of  such  losses  and  means  of  loss  reduction,  mathematical 
solutions  for  optimum  conditions  of  length  of  steam  admission,  compression, 
back  pressure  and  engine  speed,  and  maximum  economy  of  steam  consumption. 

Text-book — MacNaughton,  Elementary  Steam  Power  Engineering. 

Lectures — Monday,  9-10  (b)  ; 11-12  (a)  ; Wednesday,  11-12. 

Laboratory — Tuesday,  1-3. 


Professors  Rutledge  and  Wolfe. 


123 


Thermodynamics  Laboratory 

The  Thermodynamics  Laboratory  is  located  at  the  Central  Heating  Plant 
on  King  Street.  The  Internal  Combustion  Engine  section  is  equipped  with  a 
four  cylinder  high  speed  automotive  t5^pe  Diesel  engine  of  modern  design,  two 
eight  cylinder  automobile  engines  of  different  designs,  a single  cylinder 
Diesel  engine  of  nine  horsepower  and  a motor-driven  air  compressor  of  fifty 
cubic  feet  capacity,  two  sectionalized  automobile  chassis  of  different  makes. 
All  engines  are  furnished  with  the  necessary  power-measuring  brakes  and 
other  instruments  for  complete  testing  procedures.  It  is  expected  that  two 
standard  C.F.R.  Test  Engines,  one  for  gasoline  and  the  other  for  oil,  will  be 
added  shortly. 

The  steam  section  includes  two  small  steam  turbines,  one  Uniflow  engine, 
two  simple  steam-engines  and  a steam-driven  air  compressor.  A surface  con- 
denser, with  the  necessary  equipment  for  measuring  cooling- water  and  steam 
quantities,  is  installed  so  that  it  can  work  in  conjunction  with  any  of  the 
engines.  Equipment  is  also  installed  for  the  measurement  of  flow,  etc.,  of 
steam  or  air  through  nozzles,  orifices,  Venturi  tubes  and  so  on.  Steam  is 
provided  from  the  boilers  of  the  Central  Heating  Plant,  the  equipment  of 
which  is  also  available  for  demonstration  and  test  purposes. 

SHOP  WORK 

Instructors — A.  C.  Baiden,  Machine  Shop. 

C.  Brown,  Blacksmith  Shop  and  Welding. 

For  students  in  Courses  E,  F,  and  G,  second  year;  Course  F,  third 
year ; Course  D,  fourth  year. 

Students  in  courses  F and  G shall  enter  any  commercial  works  approved 
by  the  School  and  take  a special  course  of  shop  training  extending  over  a 
period  of  thirty-six  weeks  (18  weeks  between  second  and  third,  and  18  weeks 
between  third  and  fourth  college  years)  ; or,  in  case  accommodation  cannot  be 
secured,  they  shall  attend  a special  course  in  the  workshops  of  the  school, 
extending  over  a period  of  8 weeks  (4  weeks  preceding  their  third  college 
year  and  4 weeks  preceding  their  fourth  college  year). 

A student  in  Course  H shall  enter  any  commercial  works  approved  by 
the  University  and  take  a special  course  of  shop  training  extending  over  a 
period  of  12  weeks,  between  the  second  and  third  years  of  his  course. 

If  a student  enters  a commercial  machine  shop  to  take  his  practical 
work,  as  indicated  above,  he  must  at  the  end  of  each  term  present  a 
certificate  from  the  manager  of  the  plant  stating  the  character  of  the 
work  taken  and  the  amount  of  time  spent  in  the  various  departments. 

The  student  must  present  the  certificate  to  the  Professor  of  Mechanical 
Engineering  who  has  general  supervision  over  all  shop  work. 

A complete  forge  shop  forms  part  of  the  equipment,  so  that  efficient 
instruction  can  be  given  in  machine  shop  practice,  and  in  blacksmithing.  The 
forge  shop  is  located  in  the  basement  of  the  workshop  building,  and  is  equipped 


124 

with  the  latest  type  of  down  draft  forges,  and  electric  drive  for  the  blower 
and  exhauster. 

In  connection  with  the  work  in  blacksmithing  a short  course  is  now 
given  in  cutting  and  welding  by  the  Oxy- Acetylene  process.  Five  welding 
tables  and  one  cutting  bench  have  been  installed  and  completely  equipped  with 
the  most  modern  torches  and  other  apparatus  supplied  by  the  Dominion 
Oxygen  Company.  Instruction  is  also  given  in  electric  welding. 

Students  in  all  courses  will  be  given  a course  of  practical  work  in  work- 
shops of  the  School  as  per  schedule  of  courses. 

Work  Shop — Second  year,  E,  F,  G,  Sections  \-Z, Tuesday,  1-3,30;  Sections 
4-6,  Tuesday,  3.30-6;  Sections  7-9,  Wednesday,  1-3.30; 
Sections  10-12,  Wednesday,  3.30-6. 

Third  Year,  F,  Saturday,  8-11  (a),  9-12  (b). 

Fourth  Year,  D,  Friday,  1-4,  second  term. 

DRAWING 

Professor — A.  Jackson,  B.Sc. 

Lecturer — H.  J.  Styles,  B.Sc.  (on  active  service). 

Instructors — H.  I.  Marshall,  B.Sc.;  D.  Jack,  M.Sc. ; W.  E.  Gorham. 

Demonstrators — A.  R.  Asquith,  B.Sc. ; D.  M.  MacKeracher. 

All  drawings  are  to  be  drawn  in  the  drafting  room  assigned.  Drawings 
made  by  the  students  are  con-sidered  the  property  of  the  department. 

DRAWING  I. 

For  all  first  year  students. 

Each  student  at  the  opening  of  the  term  must  provide  himself  with  a set 
of  drawing  instruments  of  approved  standard. 

The  class  standing  will  be  determined  by  the  term’s  work. 

The  work  will  consist  of  freehand  lettering  and  sketching,  geometrical 
drawings,  auxiliary  views,  sections,  screw  threads,  dimensioning,  working 
drawings,  assembly  drawings,  tracing,  checking  and  blue  printing. 

Text-books — Svensen,  Drafting  for  Engineers;  Svensen,  Schumann  and 
.Street,  Drafting  Problem  Layouts. 

Sections  1-4,  Tuesday,  9-12;  Sections  5-8,  Wednesday,  9-12. 

DRAWING  II. 

For  students  in  Courses  A,  B,  C,  D,  and  M,  second  year. 

The  work  will  include  structural  and  machine  drawing,  assembly  drawings, 
detail  drawings  from  free-hand  sketches  of  details  of  machines,  developed 
surfaces  and  intersections,  tracing,  checking  and  blue-printing. 

The  class  standing  is  determined  by  the  term’s  work. 

Text-books — Svensen,  Drafting  for  Engineers;  Svensen,  Schumann  and 
Street,  Drafting  Problem  Layouts. 

Reference  Book — A.  I.  S.  C.  Steel  Construction. 

Wednesday,  1-4. 

♦ Lieutenant- Colonel,  Royal  Canadian  Ordnance  Corps  Overseas. 


125 


DRAWING  III. 

For  students  in  Courses  E,  F,  and  G,  second  year. 

A more  extended  course  than  as  outlined  in  Drawing  II. 

The  class  standing  is  determined  by  the  term’s  work. 

Text-books — Svensen,  Drafting  for  Engineers ; Svensen,  Schumann  and 
Street,  Drafting  Problem  Layouts. 

Reference  Book — A.  I.  S.  C.  Steel  Construction. 

Monday,  3-5,  first  term;  Thursday,  9-12. 

Prcjectio.nt 

For  first  year  students  in  all  courses. 

A course  in  the  principles  of  Orthographic,  Axonometric  and  Isometric 
Projection,  and  the  projections  of  a solid  revolved  about  different  axes. 

Also  a short  course  in  Descriptive  Geometry  preparatory  to  that  subject 
in  the  second  year  dealing  with  problems  involving  true  length  of  line  and 
size  of  a plane,  true  slope  of  line  and  plane  and  projection  of  lines  and  planes 
on  auxiliary  planes. 

Text-books — Svensen,  Drafting  for  Engineers ; Warner,  Applied  Descrip- 
tive Geometry. 

Sections  1-2,  Thursday,  9-12;  Sections  3-4,  Friday,  1-4;  Sections  5-6, 
Thursday,  1-4;  Sections  7-8,  Frid^ay,  8-11. 


Descriptive  Geometry 

Required  of  all  second  year  students. 

This  class  continues  the  work  in  Descriptive  Geometry  which  was  taken 
in  the  class  in  Projection  and  includes  solution  of  problems  dealing  with 
perpendiculars  to  lines  and  planes,  intersections  of  planes,  common  perpen- 
diculars to  two  lines,  dihedral  angles,  angle  between  line  and  a plane,  tangent 
planes,  revolution  of  lines  and  planes,  perspective  drawing,  locus  of  a line, 
and  mining  and  guide  pulley  problems. 

Text-book — Warner,  Applied  Descriptive  Geometry. 

A,  B,  C,  D,  M,  Thursday,  1-3;  E,  F,  G,  Sections  7-12,  Monday,  1-3; 
Sections  1-6,  Friday,  1-3. 


126 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Medical  Officer:  Dr.  J.  T.  Tweddell. 

Physical  Director:  John  F.  Edwards,  B.A.  (on  leave  of  absence).* 

Physical  Instructor:  R.  Seright,  B.Sc. 

Each  first  year  student  is  given  a careful  examination  by  the  Medical 
Officer  at  the  beginning  of  his  college  course,  the  appointments  being  made 
on  the  day  of  registration.  Corrective  and  remedial  work  is  then  given  in 
the  gymnasium  when  it  is  needed  by  the  students. 

With  the  exception  of  those  excused  by  the  Medical  Officer  because  of 
ill-health,  all  first  year  students  are  required  to  take  two  hours  of  gymnasium 
work  per  week  during  the  whole  of  the  school  year.  The  timetable  for 
such  classes  is  posted  in  the  gymnasium  very  soon  after  registration  and 
these  classes  may  be  taken  voluntarily  by  any  registered  sophomore,  junior, 
or  senior  in  good  standing.  The  work  varies  throughout  the  year  and  as 
much  time  as  possible  is  spent  outdoors  in  the  early  Fall  and  Spring.  This 
consists  of  touch  football,  track  and  field,  and  softball,  while  every  student 
is  given  a swimming  test  and  the  non-swimmers  are  automatically  placed  in 
an  instruction  group. 

Indoor  work  follows  with  cooler  weather  and  consists  of  swimming, 
Danish  calisthenics,  marching,  setting  up  exercises,  and  apparatus  work  on 
the  parallel  bars,  the  horse,  the  mats,  and  the  horizontal  bar.  The  winter  term 
brings  basketball,  indoor  softball,  group  games,  and  indoor  track  and  field. 
Each  student  is  encouraged  to  learn  something  about  all  of  these  activities 
and  a wide  variance  of  exercise  is  achieved. 

Equivalent  credit  is  given  for  attendance  at  regular  organized  swimming 
and  life-saving  classes,  C.O.T.C.  training,  and  for  playing  on  university 
teams  in  track,  football,  basketball,  hockey,  water  polo,  gymnastics,  tennis, 
and  boxing  and  wrestling.  Such  credit  TERMINATES  WITH  THE 
REGULAR  SCHEDULED  PROGRAMME  OF  ACTIVITIES  OF  EACH 
RESPECTIVE  CLUB,  when  students  will  rejoin  the  weekly  gymnasium 
classes  or  engage  in  any  other  of  the  sports  listed  above. 

All  first-year  students,  regardless  of  any  equivalent  credit 
they  expect,  should  report  at  the  opening  classes  in  Physical 
Training. 

* Sub-Lieutenant,  Royal  Canadian  Naval  Volunteer  Reserve. 


Ml 


FELLOWSHIPS  AWARDED  IN  THE  'FACULTY  OF 
APPLIED  SCIENCE  1942 


The  Inco  Scholarship — D.  B,  Hyland,  Windsor,  Ontario, 

Postgraduate  Scholarship  in  Chemical  Engineering — G.  A.  Clark,  Eden 

Manitoba. 

Milton  Hersey  Fellowship — W.  W,  Maynard,  Orillia,  Ontario. 


DEGREES  AWARDED  IN  THE  FACULTY  OF 
APPLIED  SCIENCE  1942 

Master  of  Science 

Name  Address 

Brown,  1.  C.,  B.Sc Ottawa,  Ontario 

Griffiths,  F.  H,,  B.Sc Sarnia,  Ontario 

fMartison,  N.  W.,  B.Sc Arntfield,  Quebec 

Quinn,  H.  A.,  B.Sc King  Kirkland,  Ontario 

Smeltzer,  H.  V.,  B.Sc Picton,  Ontario 


Acres,  H.  D.  . . . 

Beland,  R 

Clark,  G.  A 

Duncan,  D 

Eckman,  L.  P.  . . 

Elder,  L.  C 

Fraser,  D.  A.  . . . 

Hyland,  D.  B.  . . 

Meanwell,  H.  B. 

Parker,  E.  W.  E 
Pasquet,  P.  A.  . . 

Smith,  W.  J.  ... 

Timm,  H.  A.  . . . 

Watson,  G.  R.  . 


Bachelor  of  Science  (Honours) 

Britannia  Bay,  Ontario 

Cabano,  Quebec 

Eden,  Manitoba 

Sudbury,  Ontario' 

Winnipeg,  Manitoba 

Plensall,  Ontario' 

Gatchell,  Ontario 

Windsor,  Ontario 

Windsor,  Ontario 

Ottawa,  Ontario 

Kingston.  Ontario 

Dutton,  Ontario 

Westmeath,  Ontario' 

Oba,  Ontario 


128 


Bachelor  of  Science  (Pass) 

Name  Address 


Anderson,  A.  H. 
Armstrong,  H.  E 
Armstrong,  J.  A. 


Ottawa,  Ontario 
Rodney,  Ontario 
Dauphin,  Manitoba 


Bartlett,  R.  L.  . . , 

Bayly,  J.  G 

Beswick,  P.  J.  . . . 
Boucher,  H.  P.  . . 

Brooks,  J.  A 

t Brooks,  M.  L.  G. 

Brown,  G.  C 

Bunston,  R.  F.  E. 


Ottawa,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Port  Co'lborne,  Ontario 
Sudbury,  Ontario 
Sarnia,  Ontario 
Sudbury,  Ontario 
Ridgeville,  Ontario 
Thorold,  Ontario 


Campbell,  D.  W.  . 
Campbell,  G.  I.  . . 
Carmichael,  D.  A. 
fCasselman,  G.  A. 
Chilman,  W.  R.  . . 
Christie,  D.  J.  . . . 
Coburn,  W.  R.  . . 
Cockburn,  K.  O.  . . 
Coleman,  R.  L.  . . 

Cote,  A.  P 

tCraig,  B.  C 

Crawley,  T.  B.  . . 


Barrie,  Ontario 
Col  borne,  Ontario 
Fort  William,  Ontario 
Berwick,  Ontario 
Hamilton,  Ontario 
Calgary,  Alberta 
Brandon,  Manitoba 
, Crysler,  Ontario 
Copper  Cliff,  Ontario 
Cooksville,  Ontario 
Arnprior,  Ontario 
Dryden,  Ontario 


Daly,  J.  A 

Diebel,  J.  K 

Douglas,  R,  J,  W. 
Dunn,  R,  C 


London,  Ontario 
Copper  Cliff,  Ontario 
Hawkesbury,  Ontario 
London,  Ontario 


Feick,  J.  R Kitchener,  Ontario 

Foster,  D.  A Iroquois,  Ontario 

Fry,  C.  K St.  Thomas,  Ontario 


Gage,  J.  O 

fGilbert,  L.  J,  . 
Graham,  A.  C.  . 
Graham,  E,  S.  . . 
Grandfield,  N.  A 
Grant,  G.  O.  . . . 
Grisdale,  W.  L. 


Ancaster,  Ontario 
Schumacher,  Ontario 
Trail,  British  Columbia 
Kingston,  Ontario 
Hamilton,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Kirkland  Lake,  Ontario 


129 


Name  Address 

Haacke,  E.  M Deloro,  Ontario 

Hamilton,  J.  C Westport,  Ontario 

Hammonci,  H.  R Ottawa,  Ontario 

Hanna,  W.  E Penetanguishene,  Ontario 

Hill,  D.  H Kingston,  Ontario 

Hood,  J.  R • Galt,  Ontario 

Hueston,  O.  T Brockville,  Ontario 

Humbert,  C.  C Chandler,  Quebec 

Hutchison,  A.  M Windsor,  Ontario 

Jordan,  A.  T Yorkton,  Saskatchewan 

Kozlowski,  PI.  J Ottawa,  Ontario 

Liddle,  A.  J.  H Belleville,  Ontario 

Little,  R.  W Barrie,  Ontario 

Lyne,  L.  M Sioux  Lookout,  Ontario 

Maynard,  W.  W Orillia,  Ontario 

Miron,  E.  J Sudbury,  Ontario 

Motherwell,  R.  K Ottawa,  Ontario 

Mullins,  F.  R Watertown,  New  York 

Munger,  H.  H Hamilton,  Ontario 

Murdock,  J.  M Osgoode,  Ontario 

MacAskill,  D Copper  Cliff,  Ontario 

McCaffrey,  G.  F Stittsville,  Ontario 

McCallum,  J.  F Port  Arthur,  Ontario 

McCaskill,  K McDonald’s  Corners,  Ontario 

McCullough,  J.  G Toronto,  Ontario 

fMcDonough,  E.  P Cobalt,  Ontario 

McIntosh,  D,  G St.  George,  Ontario 

McKerrall,  A.  T Chatham,  Ontario 

McKinnon,  H.  C Orillia,  Ontario 

McLean,  A.  M Grimsby,  Ontario 

Nelligan,  J.  E Hamilton,  Ontario 

Newman,  F.  S Picton,  Ontario 

Perry,  F.  L Winnipeg,  Manitoba 

Ritchie,  F.  A Windsor,  Ontario 

Rivington,  G.  N,  C Carp,  Ontario 

Rust,  T.  G Stratford,  Ontario 


130 


Name 


Address 


Savory,  H 

Schultz,  G.  A.  . 

Scott,  J.  D 

Scldoii,  J.  M.  . . 
Seymour,  D.  L. 
Sherk,  J.  W.  .. 
Smith,  A.  R.  . . 
Smith,  D.  L.  . . . 
tSmith,  T.  B.  . . 
Sorensen,  E.  E. 
Spurr,  J.  C 


Hamilton,  Ontario 
Thessalon,  Ontario 
Almonte,  Ontario 
Newmarket,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Ridgeway,  Ontario 
Saskatoon,  Saskatchewan 
Lakefield,  Ontario 
Parry  Sound,  Ontario 
Kingston,  Ontario 
New  Glasgow,  Nova  Scotia 


Tait,  R.  E 

Tetu,  D,  A 

Tctu,  PI 

Thomas,  J.  A.,  B.A 
Thomas,  J.  E.  A.  . , 
Thomson,  D.  W.  . . . 
Thomson,  K.  D.  . . , 
Tinning,  G.  M 


Sudbury,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Belleville,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 
Toronto,  Ontario 
Winnipeg,  Manitoba 
Windsor,  Ontario' 


Ward,  J.  L 

Weightman,  O.  E. 

Wheal,  J.  W 

Williams,  A.  R.  . . 


Toronto,  Ontario' 
Glenboro,  Manitoba 
Hamilton,  Ontario 
Ottawa,  Ontario 


Zavitz,  R.  C City  View,  Ontario 

t Indicates  graduates  of  October,  1942. 


FIRST  YEAR— ALL  COURSES 


131 


ja 

00  flj 
-HlA  hJ  <N 


j:  u 

Q.  ID 


CO  t-i 


sc? 

j: 

0^ 


73 

S.S 

'w  _C 
M u 


►-4  m 

p u 
^ v 
(liCO 


CO) 


rt  - 
0.5 

’tn  _C 
^’cd 


tut 

c 


s.t 


bxi 

C 

a 


CO 


HH 

hH 

Math.  III. 
Sects.  3-4 
Math.  IV. 
Sects.  5-8 
Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  2 

Chem.  I. 

Sects.  5-8 

Chem.  I. 

Sects.  1-4 

Math.  III. 

Sects.  5-8 

Phys.  I. 

Sects.  1-4 

Projection 

Sect'  5-6 

Math.  III. 

Sects.  1-2 

Math.  IV. 

Sects.  5-8 

Projection 

Sects.  3-4 

II.  1 

Chem,  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  1 

Surv.  I, 
Sects.  3-4 

Math.  II. 

Sects.  1-4 

Chem.  I. 

Sects,  5-8 

Chem.  I. 

Sects.  1-4 
Chem.  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

Math.  II. 

Sects.  1-4 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 

Sect.  7 

Projection 

Sects,  5-6 

1 

Surv.  I. 

Sects.  1-2 

Phys.  II. 

Sects.  5-8 

Projection 

Sects.  3-4 

M 

English  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  1 

Surv,  I. 
Sects.  3-4 

Math,  I. 

Sects.  1-4 

Chem.  I. 

Sects.  5-8 

Chem.  I. 
Sects.  1-4 
English  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

Math.  I. 
Sects  1-4 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  7 
Proiection 
Sects.  5-6 

Surv.  I. 

“^ects.  1-2 

Math.  III. 

Sects.  5-8 

Projection 

Sects.  3-4 

' 

M 

X 

Phys.  I. 

Sects.  1-4  i 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  6 

Draw.  I. 
Sects.  1-4 

1 

Phys.  II. 

Sects.  1-4 
Draw.  I. 

Sects.  5-8 

Proiection 
Sects.  1-2 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  4 

Phys.  II. 

Sects.  1-4 

Chem.  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

X 

Math.  IV. 

Sects.  1-4 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect.  6 

Surv.  I. 
Sects.  7-8 

Math.  II. 

Sects.  5-8 

Draw.  I. 

Sects.  1-4 

Math.  III. 

Sects.  1-4 

Draw.  I. 
Sects.  5-8 

Projection 
Sects.  1-2 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 
Sect,  4 
Math.  II. 

Sects.  5-8 

Math.  IV. 

Sects.  1-4 
Surv.  I. 
Sects.  5-6 

Projection 
Sects.  7-8 

Phys.  II.  Lab. 

Sect.  8 

X 


> 


S to 
V 

^ V 
Uco 


J3 

ta 

JlO 


u 

x: 

a. 


.CO 


3 u 


.00 

•SiS 

rt  o 

M lU 

«(/) 


^ in 

rt 

u c< 
Oco 


i-;'T  • °° 

i 

1-H  to 

tn  ^ tn 
tt)  nj 

o i.,  u 

* <U  Q dJ 


C eg 

.Sr^ 

•4-J 

o . 

_<u  tn 

o o 

U o 

PL,cri 


XI 

rt  . 00 

•-3  fo  •-‘lA 


•-<  o •*■> 

. cj  n 

X 

A 


tr 


B (0  f*  M 

0)  4->  li  .M 

^030 

«•  CO  U 

^cn  CO 


C 00 


o 

0)  cn 

•*— . 

O O 

a,co 


t-l  Tl- 


X 

(d 

(-3  VO 


i-i 

.2  c/; 
b£  O 
d ^ 


l-t  O 

X 

0. 


►H 

.2  «; 
he  o 
C 4/ 
HCO 


X 

« . 00 
*-l  f^'-'vA 

X ^ 
04 


C 00 


u . 

V (/) 

o t! 

U <u 
O4  CO 


X 

d 

t-3  00 


l-H  O 

. 1/ 
^CO 
X 

04 


<u 

3 

H 


12 


04 


*j 

Id 

CO 


SECOND  YEAR 


I 


132 


IV. 

Phys.  XIV.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Miner.  I.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Drawing  III.  (a) 
E.F.G. 

Phys.  XIV. 

A.B.C.D.M..  2 

Miner.  I.  (b) 

A.B.C.D.M.,  1 

Shop  Work 

E.F.G.,  Secs.  4-6 

3.30  - 6 

Shop  Work 

E.F.G.,  Secs.  10-12 

3.30  - 6 

Mech.  IX. 

E.F.G.,  5-8 

Phys.  IV. 

E.F.G.,  9-12 

Engineering 

Society 

Ill 

Phys.  XIV.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Miner.  I.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Drawing  III.  (a) 
E.F.G. 

Phys.  XIV. 
A.B.C.D.M..  2 
Miner.  I.  (b) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 
Shop  Work 
E.F.G.,  Secs.  4-6 
3.30  - 6 

Drawing  II. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

Shop  Work 

E.F.G.,  Secs.  10-12 

3.30  - 6 

Mech.  IX. 

E.F.G.,  5-8 

Phys.  IV. 

E.F.G.,  9-12 

Qual.  Anal.  I. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

11. 

Miner.  I.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Phys.  XIV.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Descrip.  Geom. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 

Phys.  IV.  (b) 
E.F.G.  1-4 

Phys.  XIV. 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Miner.  I.  (b) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 
Shop  Work 
E.F.G.,  Secs.  1-3 

1 - 3.30 

Drawing  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 
Phys.  III. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 

Shop  Work 
E.F.G.,  Secs.  7-9 

1 - 3.30 

Descrip.  Geom. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

Mech.  IX. 

E.F.G.,  1-4 

Phy<!.  IV. 

E.F.G.,  5-8 

Qual.  Anal  I, 

A.B.C.D.M. 

Descrip.  Geom. 

E.F.G.,  1-6 

Phys,  III. 

E.F.G.,  7-12 

I. 

Miner.  I.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Phys.  XIV.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Descrip.  Geom. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 

Phys.  IV.  (b) 

E.F.G,  1-4 

Phys.  XIV. 
A.B.C.D.M.,  1 
Miner.  I.  (b) 
A.B.C.D.M.,  2 
Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 
Shop  Work 
E.F.G.,  Secs.  1-3 

1 - 3.30 

Drawing  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 
Phys.  III. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 

Shop  Work 
E.F.G.,  Secs.  7-9 

1 - 3.30 

Descrip.  Geom. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Mech.  IX. 
E.F.G.,  1-4 

Phys.  IV. 
E.F.G.,  5-8 

Qual.  Anal.  I. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

Descrip.  Geom. 

E.F.G.,  1-6 

Phys.  III. 

E.F.G.,  7-12 

XI. 

Math.  V. 

A.B.C.D.M., 

E.F.G.H. 

Qual.  Anal.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 

GenL  I. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 

Math.  V. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

E.F.G.H. 

Qual.  Anal.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Drawing  III. 
E.F.G. 

Math.  V. 

A.B.C.D.M., 

E.F.G.H. 

QuaL  Anal.  I. 

A.B.C.D.M. 

Chem.  II. 

E.F.G. 

X. 

Phys.  XIV. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

GenL  I. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 
Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 

Phys.  XIV.  (a) 
A.B.C.D.M. 
Miner.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M..  (b) 
Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 

Ast.  II. 
E.F.G.,  7-12 

Surv.  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Mech.  IX. 

E.F.G. 

Phys.  XIV 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Drawing  III. 
E.F.G. 

Surv.  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

GenL  I. 

E.F.G.,  7-12 

QuaL  Anal.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M., 

Ast.  II. 

E.F.G.,  1-6 

IX. 

GenL  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 
Phys.  III. 
E.F.G. 

GeoL  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Surv.  II. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 
Mech.  IX 
E.F.G.,  9-12 

Surv.  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Phys.  IV. 
E.F.G, 

Geol.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Drawing  III. 
E.F.G. 

Genl.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Phys.  III. 
E.F.G. 

Qual.  AnaL  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Phys.  IV.  (a) 
E.F.G.,  1-4 

VIIL 

Surv.  II. 

E.F.G.,  1-6 
Mech.  IX. 
E.F.G.,  9-12 

Surv.  II. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

GenL  I. 
E.F.G.,  1-6 

Chem.  II. 
E.F.G. 

Miner.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 

Phys.  IV. 
E.F.G. 

Phys.  IV.  (a) 
E.F.G.,  1-4 

i 

1 

Tues. 

1 

Thurs. 

Fri. 

Sat 

(a) — First  term.  __  (b) — Second  term. 


THIRD  YEAR 


133 


A .X 

Em  8 

w « o 


dNgN 

SQ^Q 

O S 


CO  n 

« o 

<3  +J  r<i  ^ 

O . 

<11  <1^  -*-’  ^ 

fe  *^2 

§ 


^ oj 


C w 


*1  o . 

t-H  <U  f I 

Mry-j'-' 


s< 

o 


sw 

(U 

O 


« . d x' 


hW^, 


w ^ 


bi  o 

o 


t-l^ 

«Q^Q 
O h 


6^ 

X o 
CJ  <u 
. ^ 
■♦-•  , 
d ■• 
rt<3 

O’ 


V)  1— I 
CA 

Em 


Ci.  'M 

1^ 


o <; 

(L>  ^ 


rj  ►-(  S 

^ E l-H  4i  • 

"5  « . • -£■!  Q 

'S“s'^“u 

O 


•rJ 

G 

M 


>. 

X, 

Oi 


.X 

^ oa 

l-H  . 


<■ 


8- 

o 


• X 

^ E ri  B ^'~' 

8-^ 
Q 


c 

d 

3 

o 


tD 

Ui 

o 


>1 
X 
pH 


d 6 o i . ^' 


o 


H 1-4 

O 


W 


E^: 

U 

j:  o 

d < 
3 

o 


>1 

cd  ^ n 
to  r" 
in 

Sm 


dJ 

TM 


d 

(j  ^ 6 

S To 

x:  d:  U o • 

U 
c 


’T3 

G 


in 

>, 

Ph 


'd 

: 


'“'  o 

<u 

C'M 


E 

■ -M  aj 

'-’  -C 

fl  j ^ 


eT  s ^ 
SIS  « d 

-C 


Ui^(^opc0  .CJ  . 


'<  r 


O's  c 
« d 
O 3 

O’ 


bJ3 

I-. 

o 


■>1 

x: 

Ph 


x;^' 

X ^ 

8-^ 

Q 


Q 

U 

m 


!d  od  i 


O 

bh  O 


W 


-•w  SdoP^-dti^ 

1<U  ° "® 

o ^ g 
o 


X 


+jpq 


ES 

(U  w 
X3 

^Q 

tJ 

c 


E^ 

«j  +j 
X u 

O 


d Q 

W t-H 

in 
< 


d 


d < 
3 

o 


CP  ■ H-t  • Q 

• .E  >o- 

1 s ^ 

^ M p^ 


r-«  (j 

d) 

her'  ^ 


:e 

<u 


E- 

<u  d 

^Ui-Jc>oCJpCQ^. 

M . r . p 


O _c 


o<'B 

V d 

O 3 

o 


M 

1-. 

o 


>1 

x: 

Ph 


|Xg 

-3  ^ 

8-^ 

s": 

Q 


o 

u 

C5 


-w  X 5 
. c .0 

ti^  -s 

52  <D 


£< 

o 


E 

-cQ 

Up5 

bi 

Ui 

o 


X 


pW 

Wq 


c 


Ns<jl“ 

« Oq 


c 


X} 

G 


i) 


X 


• c 

jj  w ^ 

. O J 

82-cp^ 

Pi  o 

«Q 

j CJ 
<3  (i> 


i) 


br  d t-H 


U 


•S 

S 8 
a 


x:  Q 


O 


m 


X} 

G 


bC' 


d 


C 

;e< 


>CJ 

c 

§ 


V . 

CJ'^ 

pQ 

c 

d 

3 

o 


bi) 

.E< 

3 

is 


Eg’ 

ti 

uH 

u 

^M 

x: 

Ph 


<3 


E 

xM 

O 

ri 

<u 

O 


•-t  K-  HH 
t-H  J*  . I-H 

J tS^s 


M 

hH 

(0 

HH 

E 

b-'ri-c 

HI 

HH 

'-H 

og 

id 

1-4  ^ 

>5 

hH 

M -OPC 

> 

x<^ 
h ' 

.*< 

.Eg 

Min 

Quant 

g 

-:s 

•“  PQ 

H < 
Cl 

g 


3 

O 

g 


9 

3 

f- 


■S 


(a) — First  term.  fb) — Second  term. 


THIRD  YEAR 


134 


> . 

£<< 

o 


. w 

K-)  C 

'C  >> 

Chri  U Si 

nl  M (1) 

P -CO 

gm-r.  O 


o 


w 

c 

W 


00 


’3^ 

4)  ^ 

o 


6 6 
u <u 
j;  . 43  _ 

CJfq^Q 

c ^ 
rt  2 

O’  O’ 


>u 


8 

o 


(Uh 


<1 

c 


B 

V 

43  . 

om 

(fl 

>. 

43 

P. 


B 

4» 

rC 

U<5 

c 

CQ 

3 

O 


Q 

U 

w 


x; 


> . 

s< 

o 


B 6 

I ^ . 

OpQ-OQ 

si 

c c 

« 2 

3 5 

o O' 


>u 


o 

o 

a 


S g H 

" . S 2 

jJ  • 4J 

T-  ’*“'  r* 

C C M 

3 § 3 

o o O 


Wl 

.2 

4) 

QO 


bfi 

w6 

EQ 

(U 

43 

o 


_.u 

”2  n 

o 


2 

4) 

43  . 

UM 

ifi 

>, 

43 

(X 


2 


O' 


lU 


3 

nl 

3 

o 


”3  d 

(y 

O 


2 

o 

43  . 

OCQ 


in 

>> 

43 

Ph 


1> 

43 

o 

.u 

4-- 

C 

P 

o 


> . 

o 

V 

O 


. 43 

H A 

r3  • ' 

“d 


2 
, OJ 
; 43 
O^ 

M 

u 

o 


M ^43 

I2ko  '”' 


2 ~ d ^ 

_ £ rt 

” r 43  — ^ x:  ^ 

o • 

*jm  4 .Q  Q 

e .5  bB 

o 


O c 

^ H-l 


2- 
4)  X! 

6'^ 

^ brH 

efi  ^ 

f»» 

43 

A. 


X 


dujd 

•^.Cod 

2 T) 

o « 


43  rt 

V— ✓ 'w' 

>d”‘L) 

.2  p 


bJJ 

3 

wd, 

2Q 

o 

43 

O 


2^v 
4)  *J 
43  O h 

- 

£<• 
3 ; 

O ' 


' B_e 

i • 

idod^u 

I c .2 

I § s 

o 


d-  ^ 


.d^Q 

bfl 

i-i 

o 


X) 

3 


2- 
U X) 
43 

o . 

>» 

X 

Ph 


X 


2S 

- .xd 

hB<0  • 

3 .X 

:2 

^ £ 


i-i  w 


£d 

w -< 


-•u 


o 

4> 

O 


2^  d 

^ti|x 


o o 


pq 


d d 

Ef  -o 

O £ 


2- 

W X3 
X C- 

o . 

gS 

X 

p< 


M C r*^  . . 

M -OpqXx  . , 
g rt  8 ^ 

o ^ 


be 


P ■ 

o< 


2 . 2 
X tJ^x 

Oc^Od 

■p  * +j  I 

£<  2 
fS  ^ nJ 
3 3 

O o 


;« 


3 

c 


•d 


t« 

(A 


(a) — First  term.  (b) — Second  term. 


THIRD  YEAR  E. 


135 


IV. 

[ Elect  I. 

A. E. 

Genl.  III. 

D.M.F. 
Thermo.  I. 
D.M.F. 

German  I. 

B. H. 

> 

u 

w 

German  I, 

B.H. 

III.  1 

Elect  I. 

1 A.E. 

Genl.  III. 

D.M.F. 
Thermo.  I. 
D.M.F. 

1 Mun.  and  San. 

I.  (b) 

E. 

Surv.  III.  (a) 

E. 

Elect  IV. 

F. 

Elect  II. 

G.H. 

Genl.  VI. 

E.  (a) 

Foundations 

E.  (b^ 

Mech.  III. 

F. 

Phys.  V. 

G.H. 

M 

Thermo.  I. 

A.E.G. 

Genl.  III. 
A.E.G. 

Phys.  VI.  (b) 

H. 

Mun.  and  San. 

I.  (b) 

E. 

Surv.  III.  (a) 

E. 

Thermo.  V. 

F. 

Elect.  II. 

G.H. 

Genl.  VI. 

E.  fa) 

Foundations 

E.  fb) 

Mech.  III. 

F. 

Phys.  V. 

G.H. 

M 

Thermo.  I. 
A.E.G. 

Genl.  III. 
A.E.G. 

Phys.  VI.  (b) 

H. 

Mun.  and  San. 

I.  (b) 

E. 

Surv.  III.  (a) 

E. 

Thermo.  V. 

F. 

Elect  II. 

G.H. 

Genl.  VI. 

E.  fal 

Foundations 

E.  (b^ 

Mech.  III. 

F. 

M 

X 

Rwy.  & Highway 

E.  1 
Mech.  II.  (b) 

F.G. 

Thermo.  V.  (a) 

F. 

Phys.  VII. 

H. 

1 

Genl.  II. 

E.  (a) 
Foundations 

E.  (b) 

Mech.  I. 

F.G. 

GeoL  IX. 

E. 

Thermo.  V. 

F. 

Elect  III. 

G. 

Ph3rs.  VII. 

H. 

Elect.  I. 
A.D.M.E.  (a) 
Mun.  and  San. 

I.  (b) 

E. 

Mech.  I. 

F.G. 

Met  I.  (a) 
E.F.G. 

Mun.  and  San. 

I.  (b) 

E. 

Elect  IV.  (b) 

F. 

Elect  III.  (b) 

G. 

Phys.  VI.  (b) 

H. 

Surv.  III.  (a) 

E. 

Math.  VI.  (a) 

P H 

[ Math.  VII. 

1 G. 

1 IX. 

Elect.  I. 
A.D.M.E.  (b) 
Elect.  IV.  (a) 

F. 

Thermo.  V.  (b) 

F. 

Elect  III.  (a) 

G. 

Elect  II.  (b) 
G.H. 

Hydraulics  I.  (a) 
E.F.G. 

Genl.  II. 

E.  (b) 

Mech.  II.  (b) 
F.G. 

Genl.  V. 

D.F. 

Elect  VI.  (b) 

G H 

Elect’ll',  (a) 
G.H. 

I-J 

S' 

M 

dO 

CO 

ad 

M 

M 

> 

t:w 

-oW 

>> 

a 

§ 

i 

a 

H 

(a) — First  term.  (b) — Second  term. 


THIRD  YEAR  E. 


136 


O 

tn' 


>K 

>> 

Xi 

cx, 


rttii 

O 

O 


-it 

<u  .)=; 
o 

w 


<->  (jJ 

Ih 

00 


x x 

o o 

(U  a> 


>> 

(Q 

M 


M f> 


ffi 


■ fc 


W ' 
ca  £3 

. o 

>> 

Oi 


, 

1-4 

►-I 

►H 

4J  • 

hH 

> 

U M 

g 

CJ 

X 

u 

•4-» 

<U 

V 

C/a 

> . 
d .W 

i/i 

>> 

,G 

Ah 


E»> 

n 

.Sf  > 

S ; .d 

oa 

. o 

>. 


ow 

u 

H-> 

C/3 


^ . 

jjdjjd  t/jM 

S S flH 


>, 

CQ 

w J> 

W • Ah’ 
oa  gQ 

. o 

>, 

A! 


X 


X > 

t-l  KH  ^ 

. rt 
A3  A 
8 £^ 
o w 


;1S 


U , , 
« - 

w 


.o 

•Ia; 

w 


<n  • 
Ah 


M 


O t-l 


ex, 

o- 

J! 

to 


iO 


’ o 

I o 


X 


cd 

X 

W) 

X 

oa 


A3 


4jd>ili 

A3  f! 

Ah 


l-H 

t-l  P>  t-l 

. ■> 

+j  • T!  • 

mW 

i 8 Ah  A ^ ■£ 

.-H  +J  exj 
^ Cl]  ‘rj 

teH  ^ 


t-l 

O t-l 


a 

o 

X 

to 


Ah  +H-d^tri 


o 

(U 

s 


W3 

>> 

x: 

Ah 


X 

h-» 

Struct.  I. 

E- 

Phys.  V.  (a) 

G H 

Elect.  Vi.  (b) 
G.H. 

Elect.  I. 
A.D.M.E. 

Mech.  II.  (b) 
F.G. 

i 

Shop  Work 

F. 

Elect.  III. 

G. 

HH 

M 

t>  ra 

»— 1 

hC 

r-^ 

« . J3  . 

> 

rtW 

£ A3 

oAh  isa 

S 

O 

5 s 

« 

Wi 

3 

JA 

H 


^5 


(a) — First  term.  (b) — Second  term. 


FOURTH  YEAR 


137 


> 

German  I. 

C. 

Chem.  Engv  III. 

D.  (b) 

Mech.  V. 

F. 

Geol.  II. 

A.  ( Geol.  opt.) 

Fire  Assay  (a) 

C. 

1 

1 

I 

i 

i 

III.  1 

Ind.  Chem.  III. 
B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  fb) 

Geol.  VI. 

C. 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D. 

Met.  VII. 

M. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Mech.  V. 

F. 

Elect  X. 

G. 

Elect.  XI. 

G.H. 

Geol.  II. 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  (b) 

Fire  Assay  (a) 

C. 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D.  (a) 

Metallography 

I (a) 

M. 

Metallography 

II.  (b) 

M. 

Genl.  IV.  (a) 

E. 

Mech.  V.  (a) 

F. 

Hydr.  III.  (b) 

F. 

Elect  VIII. 

G.H.  (a) 

Phys.  X. 

H.  (b) 

Ind.  Chem.  III. 
B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  (b) 

Geol.  VI. 

C. 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D. 

Met.  VII. 

M. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Mech,  V. 

F. 

Elect  X. 

G. 

Elect.  XI. 

G.H. 

Min  III.  (a) 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 
i Mining  II.  (b) 

A. 

Coll.  Chem.  II. 

B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt 

1 . B.  (b) 

1 Fire  Assay  (a) 

C. 

Coll.  Chem.  I.  (a) 

D. 

Metallography 

I (a) 

M. 

Metallography 

II.  (b) 

M 

Genl.  IV.  (a) 

E. 

Mech.  V.  (a) 

F. 

Hydr.  III.  (b) 

F. 

Elect  VIII. 

G.H.  (a) 

Phys.  X. 

H,  (b) 

»— i 

Ind,  Chem.  III. 

B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt 

B.  (b) 
Mining  IV. 
C.M. 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Mech.  V. 

F. 

Elect  X. 

G. 

Elect  XI. 

! G.H. 

Min.  III.  (a) 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 
Mining  II.  (a) 

A. 

Mech.  IV.  (b) 

A. E.G. 

Coll.  Chem.  II. 

• B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  (b) 

Fire  Assay  (a) 

C. 

Coll.  Chem.  I.  (a) 

D. 

Metallography  I. 
M.  (a) 

Metallography  II. 

M.  (b) 

GenL  IV.  (a) 

E. 

Mech.  V.  (a) 

F. 

Hydr.  III.  (b) 

F. 

Elect.  VIII. 

G.H.  fa) 

Phys.  X. 

H.  (b) 

X 

1 

Geol.  VIII. 
A.C. 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D. 

Mun.  & San.  II. 

E. 

Elect  VII. 

F. 

Elect  V. 

G. 

Phys.  IX. 

H. 

Geol.  VIII 
A.C. 

Org.  Chem.  11. 
B. 

Chem.  Eng.  IV.  (b) 

D. 

Met  V.  (a) 

M. 

Mun.  and  San.  III. 

E. 

Elect  X. 

G. 

Elect  XI.  (a) 
G.H. 

Phys.  X. 

H.  (b) 

Mining  II. 

A. 

Min.  II.  (b) 

A.  ( Geol.  opt.) 
Min.  III.  (a) 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 

Phys.  Chem.  II. 
B.D.M. 

Struct.  IV.  (a) 

E. 

Hydraulics  II. 

F. 

Elect  VIII. 
G.H. 

Mech.  IV.  (a) 
A.E.G. 

Hydr.  IV.  (b) 
A.D.M. 

Phys.  Chem.  III. 

B. 

Min.  V.  (a) 

C. 

Chem.  Eng.  V.  (a) 

D. 

Struct  II.  (b) 

E. 

Mech.  V. 

F. 

Elect  XI.  (b) 
G.H. 

Phys.  X. 

H.  (aO 

\ ’XI 

1 

Econ.  I. 
A.B.C.D.M. 
E.F.G.H. 

j 

Met  IV. 

A. M. 

j 

German  II. 

B. H. 

GeoL  VI. 

C. 

Thermo.  II. 

D. 

Thermo.  III. 

F. 

Eng.  Rel. 

E. 

Elect  V. 

G. 

1 TIIA 

Mining  II. 

A. 

1 

j 

1 

Metallography 

I.  (a) 

1 M. 

Metallography 

n.  (b) 

M. 

1 Mining  II. 

A. 

Phys.  Chem.  II. 
B.D.M. 

1 

1 

1 

Mon. 

t 

3 

fa) — First  term,  (b) — Second  term. 


FOURTH  YEAR 


138 


c 

W,  r 

U 

V 

o 


e 

(U 

oP 


WQ 


>» 

J3 

Oh 


tt)  S 


Ki 

M S . W 


rt  H-i 


6P'^""tiW  >'^^0 


> s 


c 


'CPi  £ ,q3  tj  . o® 

£ H u K 


»-(  HI  rt 


a 

o 


t>  S 

o ^ 

(U  . 

o< 


s 

a>  . 
J3  cq 

o 

hi) 

Ih 

o 


« a 

ro 


C HH 


'-'  ?5» 

HI 


> O 

1) 

cO 


:X, 


U 


• j^wSwIwg  ^ -- 

X 


50 


w 

J3 

0^ 


d 

3 


s 

w 

o 

•CJ 

H 


1) 

W 


J3 

PU 


X 


A 


l< 

S 


e . 


tfl  HH 

•^> 

hH  WT-HH 

— ' c :^. 


> « 


o U ix^  U • O P 


x/i 

>> 

X. 

a, 


o 

u 

O 


. u 

O 3 

I- 

CO 


JW  laPo 


o 

o 

s 


ll 

'O 

>. 

K 


t-(  ^ 

>^ 

*j  hi 
o . 
iiO 

w 


h>  ° 

o 

4)  . 

o< 


s 

o . 

X cq 

o ^ 

hi) 

u 

O 


re  a 
":'Q 

HH 

>”0 

w 

dO 


“<  H-(  H- 1 re 

^ ,_j 

cJ  *2  ^ re  5 ^ ^ 

.5  re  hh 

tj  .yw^wgw|  ^ ^ 

^ s M d d S3  “ 

>d  3 j2 

S S H 


u 


4: 

Ph 


P B 

. 4> 

c 

S ^ 

fl^ 


. OT 

^ 'ot 

l«=i  t) 

pqg 


U 


re  HH 


• c!  b 
bw 


;Q 


u 

H 


(U 

O 


•>  .1 

3 O 

H 0) 

4^  i-H 

CO  W 


iC 


H-i  -a 
>- 
■Hi  ffi 


n3 


O I 

S' 


o 


■ B 

> o ^ jc  cq 


re  ^ 03 , 

^ CO  /D  HH 


fe 'm 
' TJ  ' 


X, 


do 

.*-i 


UO 

hil 

U 

o 


reW  gw  g 


c 

q 


s 


HH  re 

HH  HH  ^ 


HH  HH  ^ re 

^ <J 

*-'  -<3 " ■ 

^ ^ocq 


S 3^hh 

<U  w HH 

X 


• • ^ 

>^  *^0  hi^  re 
X c d c-^  fe 
'W  W^ 


^ O*^ 


XOc"-w  W-fWW 

- S^gOgOS 


tc 


T) 

C 


O 

o 


o o 


HH  >■ 

•“•  w 


^ • B 

re  j "^W 

S3<  o 


bJ3 

Ih 


hi/— \ 

c re 

W'^ 


O 


e 

t> 

o 


p 


W 


^ ^ X ^ 

.re  . .a 

W ^-d  ^ 

o • o • 

«J  W 4)  W 


CO 


t[o 

V 

s 


t/) 

>, 

w 


X 


X 

w 


b)) 
d * 


HH 

a 

, 

HH 

HH 

S 

V 

(a) 

■n.  I. 

a 

0) 

X 

o 

0)  Q 
.x: 

o^ 

wo 

* 

X) 

o 

o 

"o 

O 

c 

HH 

hH 

X 

X cd 

{j 

o 


X 


X I 


o 

w 

S 


o 


;c 


w 


> 

db 


> 

HH 

HH 

HH 

HH 

HH 

bi^ 
c ^ 

a 

y w 

X -H 

HH 

> 

W 

t3W 

d 

(D 

o 

3 

u 

lA 

Hi 

■H> 

CO 

o 

.d 

O 

.c 

W 

w 


x^P 

^.cXP 

■hJ'-"  .b 


w 


<u 

S 


HH 

b hh 

HH 

> _ 

’-'  HH 

C/D 

U 

X 

eol. 

A.C. 

hermo 

D. 

lermo. 

F. 

rauli 

E.G 

-•  w 

•gHH 

re 

O 

^ P 

P 

-u 


o 

<u 

O 


bD 

d 

W 

ri 

u 

a" 

U 


Q 


re  p" 

S« 


Q 

o 


U W 
'C 
>. 

P 


HH*0 

o 

s 


u ^ 

<I> 


'S 


(D 

Ih 

3 

j: 

b 


(a) — First  term.  (b) — Second  term. 


FOURTH  YEAR 


139 


> 

German  I. 

C. 

Engineering 

Society 

III  1 

Milling 

A.M. 

Phys.  Chem.  III. 

B. 

Thesis 

C. 

Shop  Work  (b) 

D. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Thermo.  IV. 

F. 

Elect.  V. 

G. 

Phys.  XIII. 

H. 

• 

Milling 

A.M. 

Ph3rs.  Chem.  III. 

B. 

Thesis 

C. 

Min.  V. 

C. 

Shop  Work  (b) 

D. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Thermo,  IV. 

F. 

Elect.  V. 

G. 

Phys.  XIII. 

1 H. 

-H 

Milling 

A.M. 

Phys.  Chem.  III. 

B. 

Thesis 

C. 

Min.  V. 

C. 

Shop  Work  (b) 

D. 

Struct.  II. 

E. 

Thermo.  IV. 

F. 

Elect.  V. 

G. 

Phys.  XIII. 

H. 

-H 

Min.  II.  (b) 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 
Milling 

A.M. 

Ind.  Chem.  III. 

B.  (a) 

Coll.  Chem.  II. 

B.  (b) 

Geol.  XII.  (a) 

C. 

Chem.  Eng,  II. 

D. 

Struct.  IV. 

E. 

Mech.  X. 

F.  (a) 

Thermo.  IV. 

F.  (b) 

Elect.  V. 

G.  (a) 

Phys.  IX.  . 

H. 

Min.  II.  (b) 

A.  ( Geol.  opt.) 
Milling 

A.M. 

Org.  Chem.  II. 
B. 

Chem.  Eng.  II. 
D. 

Hydr.  III. 

E.  (b) 

Mech.  Eng.  VIII 

F. 

Elect.  IX. 

G. 

Elect.  XII. 
G.H. 

A 

Min.  III.  (a)  ' 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 
Milling 

A.M. 

Coll.  Chem.  II. 
B.  (a) 

Chem.  Opt. 

B (b) 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 

D. 

Struct.  IV. 

E. 

Mech.  X. 

F. 

Elect.  V. 

G.  (b) 

Elect.  IX. 

G.  (a) 

Phys.  X. 

H.  (a) 

Min.  II.  (b) 

A.  (Geol.  opt.) 
Milling 

A.M. 

Org.  Chem.  II. 

B. 

Chem.  Eng.  II. 

D.  (a) 

V,1  ;■ 

¥ 

Hydr.  III. 

E.  (b) 

Mech.  Eng.  VIII, 

F. 

Elect.  IX. 

G. 

Elect.  XII. 
G.H. 

1 VIII  1 IX  1 

Milling 

A.M. 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  (b) 

Chem.  Eng.  III. 
D. 

Hydr.  II. 

E G 

Met.  Vili.  (a) 

h . 

Mech.  X. 

F.  (b) 

Math.  X. 

H. 

Milling 

A.M. 

Org.  Chem.  II. 

B. 

Chem.  Eng.  II. 

D.  (a) 

Hydr.  III. 

E.  (b) 

Mech.  Eng.  VIII 

F. 

Elect  IX. 

G. 

Elect  XII. 
G.H. 

i 

Hydr.  IV.  (a) 

A. D.M. 

Chem.  Opt. 

B.  (b) 

Met.  VIII.  (a) 

F. 

Fri. 

Sat. 

(a) — First  term.  (b) — Second  term. 


SIGN  BOOK  CARD 


The  following  publications  are  issued  by  the  University 
and  on  application  to  the  Registrar,  Queen’s  University, 
Kingston,  are  sent  free  of  charge  to  students,  except  where  a 
price  is  mentioned. 

CALENDAR  OF  THE  FACULTY  OF  ARTS 

CALENDAR  OF  THE  FACULTY  OF  APPLIED  SCIENCE 

CALENDAR  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  COMMERCE  AND 
ADMINISTRATION 

ANNOUNCEMENT  OF  THE  SUMMER  SCHOOL 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  MATRICULATION 

EXAMINATION  PAPERS  of  the  Science  Faculty,  bound 
together.  (Price  50  cents;  postage  5 cents  extra). 

LIST  OF  GRADUATES,  ALL  FACULTIES.  (Price  25  cents, 
postage  4 cents). 

CALENDAR  OF  QUEEN’S  THEOLOGICAL  COLLEGE. 
(Apply  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Theological  College). 

CALENDAR  OF  THE  FACULTY  OF  MEDICINE. 

(Apply  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Medical  Faculty).